diff --git a/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Configuring Content Localization/02 Setting Translator Roles.html b/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Configuring Content Localization/02 Setting Translator Roles.html
index c6ca2d7b60f..ec458daff0f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Configuring Content Localization/02 Setting Translator Roles.html
+++ b/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Configuring Content Localization/02 Setting Translator Roles.html
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
Setting Translator Roles
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ About Modules
See "About Module Settings" and the related section for details on setting the module settings that are common to all modules.
- See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/Drag and Drop Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/Drag and Drop Module.htm
index cad1a566789..e10783a722e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/Drag and Drop Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/Drag and Drop Module.htm
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Drag and Drop Module
-
+
- To move the module to a new page, See "Configuring Advanced Page Settings for a Module"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Add New User/Adding a New User.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Add New User/Adding a New User.html
index b8bd86a9ab1..345be281604 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Add New User/Adding a New User.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Add New User/Adding a New User.html
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-
+
Adding a New User
How to add a new user to a DotNetNuke site using the Add New User module. Each time a new user is added a new user record is created in the User Accounts module.
-
+ Restricted to Administrators.
Note 1: Usernames are unique and cannot be changed. If you attempt to save a user account using an existing username the following message is displayed: "A User Already Exists For the Username Specified. Please Register Again Using A Different Username." In this scenario you should change the username and retry saving the new account.
Note 2: The site may be set to only allow unique passwords. If this is the case, you will be asked to choose a new password, or opt for a random password.
Note 3: The Add New User module should be added to any custom Registration page that you create. See "Configuring a Custom Registration Form"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/About the Banners Module.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/About the Banners Module.html
index c0e9fd5a7b2..b15a292c0a8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/About the Banners Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/About the Banners Module.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ About Banners
See "About Admin Vendors"
-
- See "About the Host Vendors Module"
+ See "About Host Vendors"
-
See "Enabling/Disabling Banner Advertising"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Setting the Banner Border.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Setting the Banner Border.html
index ffc2b82450a..33360d3036a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Setting the Banner Border.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Setting the Banner Border.html
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
-
+
Setting the Banner Border
How to set the width and color of the border around each banner that is displayed in a banners module.
- - Select Banner Options from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Banner Options from the module actions menu.
- In the Border Width text box, enter the pixel width of the border. E.g. 3
- In the Border Color text box, enter a hex number (#6495ED) or color code (CornflowerBlue) to set the color of the border.
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ Setting the Banner Border
Click the OK button to confirm.
- Tip: You may like to for the Display Container? field on the Module Settings for this module to hide the module container.
-
+
Tip: You may like to unmark the Display Container? check box Module Setting to hide the module container.
+
The Banners module with Borders displayed
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying .html
index 507e05ae9ae..91c9aa90f2c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Banners/Module Editors/Troubleshooting Image Not Displaying .html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,8 +8,8 @@ Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying
- Navigate to Admin > File Management - OR - Go to a Digital Asset Management module.
- Navigate to the required folder. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders"
- - Select the folder and click the View Folder Properties button in the toolbar - OR - Right click on the folder and select View Folder Properties.
- - Under Attributes, at Hidden.
+ - Select the folder and click the View Folder Properties button in the toolbar - OR - Right click on the folder and select View Folder Properties.
+ - Under Attributes, mark the Hiddencheck box.
- Return to the module to see if the image is displaying. You may need to Refresh the pag e(Hold down the Shift key and then strike F5) to see the changes.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/About the Console Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/About the Console Module.htm
index 413ab4d5b79..51fc4eac3a4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/About the Console Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/About the Console Module.htm
@@ -1,15 +1,13 @@
-
+
- About the Console Module
- The Console module displays a list of links to the child pages below any parent pages. The Console module is added to both the Admin Console and Host Console pages by default and can also be deployed to a site and added to any page. The Console module can be configured to display links in a variety of layouts and to display more or less information about the pages that are listed.
- Installation Note: This module is typically installed on the site.
-
+ About the Console
+ The Console displays a list of links to the child pages below any parent pages. The Console is added to both the Admin Console and Host Console pages by default and can also be deployed to a site and added to any page. The Console can be configured to display links in a variety of layouts and to display more or less information about the pages that are listed.
-
The Console Module on the Admin page of DNN Platform
+
The Console on the Admin page
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/GroupsConsole.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/GroupsConsole.html
index 1cd7a770a6f..8406d1bd9d0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/GroupsConsole.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/GroupsConsole.html
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Displaying Groups using the Console
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/PagesConsole.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/PagesConsole.html
index 8835e1fdce2..5ba8404ad7a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/PagesConsole.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/PagesConsole.html
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Displaying Child Pages using the Console
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Tip: If an icon has not been set on a page then the default icons called "icon_unknown_32px.gif" for the large icon and "icon_unknown_16px.gif" for the small icon will be displayed. An example of this is seen on the parent page "Our Services" in the below image.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/ProfileConsole.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/ProfileConsole.html
index 12f44003eeb..6adbcaf1df0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/ProfileConsole.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Console/ProfileConsole.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ Displaying Profiles using the Console
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/HTML/About the Text HTML Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/HTML/About the Text HTML Module.htm
index 3244617628d..2d57bd592b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/HTML/About the Text HTML Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/HTML/About the Text HTML Module.htm
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
-
+
- About the HTML Module
- The HTML module (typically titled Text/HTML) displays rich text, HTML, images, flash or can perform a script. This is a free form module that uses the Editor control to manage content using either a Basic Text Box or Rich Text Editor.
- Installation Note: This module is typically pre-installed on the site.
-
+ About HTML
+ HTML (typically titled Text/HTML) displays rich text, HTML, images, flash or can perform a script. This is a free form module that uses the Editor control to manage content using either a Basic Text Box or Rich Text Editor.
-
The HTML Module
+
HTML
+
Features:
- Replacement Tokens
@@ -17,7 +16,7 @@ About the HTML Module
- Workflow support for Direct Publish
-
+
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/About the Journal Module.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/About the Journal Module.html
index d44a1dcc107..7de5394a70b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/About the Journal Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/About the Journal Module.html
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
-
About the Journal Module
- The Journal module allows registered users to write journal entries that can be viewed by all or some site users. A file or image can be attached to journal entries and the module can be configured in a number of layouts. The Journal forms part of each uses profile as well as being a standalone module that can be added to any site page. This module is typically installed on the site and cannot be uninstalled.
+ About the Journal
+ The Journal allows registered users to write journal entries that can be viewed by all or some site users. A file or image can be attached to journal entries and the module can be configured in a number of layouts. The Journal forms part of each uses profile as well as being a standalone module that can be added to any site page. This module is typically installed on the site and cannot be uninstalled.
-
The Journal Module
+ The Journal
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Adding a Journal Entry.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Adding a Journal Entry.html
index b39538a2d8c..e6980d377c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Adding a Journal Entry.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Adding a Journal Entry.html
@@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
Adding a Journal Entry
- How to post an entry to the Journal module. Depending on the Journal settings, you may be able to attach a photo or a file to each post. You cannot add more than one attachment (either a photo or a file) to a post. Photo attachments display below the post and are scaled up or down to be as a standard width of 250 pixels. File attachments display as a File icon above the linked file name.
+ How to add Journal entry. Depending on the Journal settings, you may be able to attach a photo or a file to each post. You cannot add more than one attachment (either a photo or a file) to a post. Photo attachments display below the post and are scaled up or down to be as a standard width of 250 pixels. File attachments display as a File icon above the linked file name.
- - Click on your Display Name link - OR - Go to a Journal module.
+ - Click on your Display Name link - OR - Go to a Journal.
- In the "Tell the world something..." message box, paste or type your message. A maximum length is set for each message so if you paste in a message longer than the allowed message length, then the additional characters will be trimmed from the end of the message. Likewise, if you attempt to type in a longer message than is permitted you will be prevented from entering any additional characters once the maximum is reached. Note: You can cancel the new entry by clicking the Cancel button that is displayed in the top right corner of the module once you commence entering the message.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Deleting a Journal Entry.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Deleting a Journal Entry.html
index 3a118d8b399..868f2331523 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Deleting a Journal Entry.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Journal/Deleting a Journal Entry.html
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
-
+
Deleting a Journal Entry
- How to post an entry to the Journal module. Depending on the Journal settings, you may be able to attach a photo or a file to each post. You cannot add more than one attachment (either a photo or a file) to a post. Photo attachments display below the post and are scaled up or down to be as a standard width of 250 pixels. File attachments display as a File icon above the linked file name.
+ How to post a Journal entry. Depending on the Journal settings, you may be able to attach a photo or a file to each post. You cannot add more than one attachment (either a photo or a file) to a post. Photo attachments display below the post and are scaled up or down to be as a standard width of 250 pixels. File attachments display as a File icon above the linked file name.
- - Click on your Display Name link - OR - Go to a Journal module.
+ - Click on your Display Name link - OR - Go to a Journal.
- Hover your mouse over the entry to be deleted. This displays a Delete button to the right of the entry.
- Click the Delete button. This will display the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?'
- Click the Yes button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Connecting with a Member.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Connecting with a Member.html
index 017ec8711ce..4e01a0545e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Connecting with a Member.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Connecting with a Member.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Connecting with a Member
- Select one or more of the following options:
- Click the Add as Friend link to send a friend request to the member. The request must now be accepted by the member.
- Click the Follow link to follow the activity of the member.
Note: The Unfollow link will now replace the Follow link, enabling you to remove this connection any time you choose.
-
- Click the Send Message button to compose a message to the member.
+
- Click the Send Message button to compose a message to the member.
- In the Subject text box, enter the subject of this message.
- In the Your Message text box, enter the body of this message.
- Click the Send link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Configuring Search Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Configuring Search Settings.html
index b6386ef7a22..03c39b7196a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Configuring Search Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Configuring Search Settings.html
@@ -4,6 +4,6 @@
Configuring Search Settings
- How to enable/disable search capabilities on the Member Directory module and configure the advanced search options.
-Two search tools can be enabled. The Simple Search tool allows members to search by user name, first name or last name of the message recipient or role name. The Advanced Search tool allows up to four search criteria to be specified for searches. The available options are Display Name, Email, Prefix, First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, Suffix, Unit, Street, City, Region, Country, Postal Code, Telephone, Cell/Mobile, Website, IM, or Fax.- Select the Member Directory Settings tab.
- Expand the Search Settings section.
- At Display Search, select from these options:
- None: Select to remove both the simple and advanced search tools.
- Simple Search: Select to only display the simple search box.
- Simple and Advanced Search to display both the basic and advanced search boxes.
- At Search Field 1, select the first field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is Username.
- At Search Field 2, select the second field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is Email.
- At Search Field 3, select the third field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is City.
- At Search Field 4, select the fourth field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is Country.
- Click the OK button to confirm.
The default search setting for the Members Directory module
Related Topics:
- See "Searching for Members"
+ How to enable/disable search capabilities on the Member Directory and configure the advanced search options.
+Two search tools can be enabled. The Simple Search tool allows members to search by user name, first name or last name of the message recipient or role name. The Advanced Search tool allows up to four search criteria to be specified for searches. The available options are Display Name, Email, Prefix, First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, Suffix, Unit, Street, City, Region, Country, Postal Code, Telephone, Cell/Mobile, Website, IM, or Fax.- Select the Member Directory Settings tab.
- Expand the Search Settings section.
- At Display Search, select from these options:
- None: Select to remove both the simple and advanced search tools.
- Simple Search: Select to only display the simple search box.
- Simple and Advanced Search to display both the basic and advanced search boxes.
- At Search Field 1, select the first field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is Username.
- At Search Field 2, select the second field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is Email.
- At Search Field 3, select the third field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is City.
- At Search Field 4, select the fourth field displayed on the advanced search box. The default option is Country.
- Click the OK button to confirm.
The default search setting for the Members Directory module
Related Topics:
- See "Searching for Members"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Managing Templates.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Managing Templates.html
index f715e535771..5894494147a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Managing Templates.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Managing Templates.html
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-
+
Managing Templates
- The layout of the Member Directory module can be changed using the templates maintained on the Member Directory Settings page. In the below image the default templates that are provided with DNN are used.
+ The layout of the Member Directory can be changed using the templates maintained on the Member Directory Settings page. In the below image the default templates that are provided with DNN are used.
Here's how to configure the Member Directory templates:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Paging Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Paging Options.html
index f305c76a2fb..22849c6a628 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Paging Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Member Directory/Settings/Paging Options.html
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
- Setting Paging Options
How to set the number of members records displayed on each page of the Member Directory module and enable or disable the ability to view more results than displayed on the first page.
-- Select the Member Directory Settings tab.
- Expand the Paging Optionssection.
- At Disable Paging, to disable the "Load More" button. This will only display the number of members displayed on the first page.
- At Page Size, select the number of members to be displayed on each page.
- Click the OK button to confirm.
+ Setting Paging Options
How to set the number of members records displayed on each page of the Member Directory and enable or disable the ability to view more results than displayed on the first page.
+- Select the Member Directory Settings tab.
- Expand the Paging Optionssection.
- At Disable Paging, to disable the "Load More" button. This will only display the number of members displayed on the first page.
- At Page Size, select the number of members to be displayed on each page.
- Click the OK button to confirm.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Archiving a Message.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Archiving a Message.html
index b67eff55f5c..c354f9e5606 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Archiving a Message.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Archiving a Message.html
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-
+
Archiving a Message
How to archive a message sent to you using either your User Profile or using a standalone Message Center module. Archiving a message moves that message from the Inbox tab to the Archived tab. Note: The images used in this tutorial use the User Profile page, rather than the Message Center module.
- - Click the Check Messages button - OR - Navigate to a Message Center module.
+ - Click the Check Messages button - OR - Navigate to a Message Center module.
- The latest messages are displayed. If the required message isn't displayed, click the Load More link to view additional messages.
- Once the required message is visible, you can either hover your mouse over the message title and then click the Archive link (as shown below) - OR - Click on the message title to read the message in full and then click the Archive link - OR - beside multiple messages and select Archive from the Actions drop down list.
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Configuring Message Center Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Configuring Message Center Settings.html
index 68a7d327131..e72745fde53 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Configuring Message Center Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Configuring Message Center Settings.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -9,10 +9,10 @@ Configuring Message Center Settings
Here's how to set the correct permissions:
-
-
+
- Select the Page Settings tab.
- - At Inherit View Permissions from Page, .
+ - At Inherit View Permissions from Page, .
- In the View Module column, click on the Registered Users and (optionally) Unverified Users check boxes to grant permission to these roles.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Setting Messaging Template Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Setting Messaging Template Settings.html
index 2bd98b4bdcd..67d707e2aa5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Setting Messaging Template Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Message Centre/Settings/Setting Messaging Template Settings.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting Messaging Template Settings
How to create a custom template to be used for messages sent from this instance of the Messaging module.
-
-
+
- Select the Messaging Settings tab.
- In the Template text box, enter a custom template. Replacement tokens and HTML formatting are allowed.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Performing a Search.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Performing a Search.htm
index bcc680c7e20..bae6d577620 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Performing a Search.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Performing a Search.htm
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-
+
Performing an Advanced Search
How to perform an advanced search for site content using either the default search box that is typically displayed in the top right corner of each page or using the Search Results module.
- Note: Searches for files other than site pages
+ Note: Searches for files other than site pages are only available in Evoq products.
- Enter your search criteria in the search box displayed in the top right corner of any page or into a Search Results module. The top five results are displayed as you type. If the result you want is displayed, then simply click on it. If the result is a site pages you will be taken to the page. If the result a file such as an image or a document, the file will be opened or available for opening directly from the search results.
@@ -19,18 +19,18 @@ Performing an Advanced Search
- Click the See More Results link or the Search button to go to Search Results page where you can view additional results and configure additional advanced options.
- - Optional. Click the Advanced button to open the Advanced options drop down window where you can set one or more of these advanced search criteria:
- Filter by Tags: Enter one or more tags to only view results that include this tag.
- Last Modified: Select an option to only view results for items that were modified within the last 1 day, 7 days, 30 days, 90 days or 1 year.
- Filter: Select to filter results by one or more locations.
- Exact Search: to only view exact matches.
- Click the Search button.
+ - Optional. Click the Advanced button to open the Advanced options drop down window where you can set one or more of these advanced search criteria:
- Filter by Tags: Enter one or more tags to only view results that include this tag.
- Last Modified: Select an option to only view results for items that were modified within the last 1 day, 7 days, 30 days, 90 days or 1 year.
- Filter: Select to filter results by one or more locations.
- Exact Search: to only view exact matches.
- Click the Search button.
- - On the Search Results page you can now choose from these options to modify the order and number of current results and view additional results:
- Results Per Page: Select the number of results to be displayed on one page: 15, 25, 50, or 100.
- Relevance: Select to view the most relevant results at the begin of the list.
- Date: Select to view the most recently added results at the begin of the list.
- Page [1]: Click on the Next button to view results on the next page.
+ - On the Search Results page you can now choose from these options to modify the order and number of current results and view additional results:
- Results Per Page: Select the number of results to be displayed on one page: 15, 25, 50, or 100.
- Relevance: Select to view the most relevant results at the begin of the list.
- Date: Select to view the most recently added results at the begin of the list.
- Page [1]: Click on the Next button to view results on the next page.
- Tip: Click the Advanced Tips link to view detailed information on how to perform a wide range of advanced searches.
+ Tip: Click the Advanced Tips link to view detailed information on how to perform a wide range of advanced searches.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Settings/SearchResultsSettings.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Settings/SearchResultsSettings.htm
index 106ec58358f..6301e680eaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Settings/SearchResultsSettings.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Search Results/Settings/SearchResultsSettings.htm
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -7,13 +7,13 @@ Configuring Search Results Settings
How to configure the results displayed in the Search Results module.
-
-
+
- Select the Search Results Settings tab.
- At Title Link Target, choose where results will be displayed from these options:
- On Same Page: When you click on a linked search result the details will be displayed on the current page. This is the default setting.
- Open New Page: When you click on a linked search result the details will be displayed in a new site page.
- - At Results Scope for Sites(s), beside each site that can be searched. Prerequisite. The current site must belong to a Site Group.
- - At Results Scope for Content Type(s), beside a type of content to limit the Search Results. All Items are checked by default.
- - At Enable wildcard searches by default, select from these options:
- enable searches for partial words. E.g. typing "org" will find "organization" or "organize". This ensures more results and increases a users chances of finding information. This is the default setting.
- to disable wildcard searching if results are taking too long to retrieve.
+ - At Results Scope for Sites(s), beside each site that can be searched. Prerequisite. The current site must belong to a Site Group.
+ - At Results Scope for Content Type(s), beside a type of content to limit the Search Results. All Items are checked by default.
+ - At Enable wildcard searches by default, select from these options:
- Mark the check box enable searches for partial words. E.g. typing "org" will find "organization" or "organize". This ensures more results and increases a users chances of finding information. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box to disable wildcard searching if results are taking too long to retrieve.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Social Groups/Configuring Social Groups Settings.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Social Groups/Configuring Social Groups Settings.htm
index 951f1549774..d8f616aef53 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Social Groups/Configuring Social Groups Settings.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/Social Groups/Configuring Social Groups Settings.htm
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,14 +8,14 @@ Configuring Social Groups Settings
- Navigate to a Social Groups module.
-
-
+
- Select the Group Module Settings tab.
- At Default Role Group, select the role group that contains the roles you want to display.
- At Module View Mode, select to display groups as a list or view.
- At Group View Page, select the page where users will go to view a particular group.
- At Group View Template, modify the default template in order to customize the group list display. Common tokens are: [groupitem:GroupName] [groupitem:GroupDescription] [groupitem:PhotoURL] [groupviewurl]
- - At Groups Require Approval, if groups must be approved before they are displayed on this module - OR - to display all groups.
+ - At Groups Require Approval, if groups must be approved before they are displayed on this module - OR - to display all groups.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/ViewProfile/About the ViewProfile Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/ViewProfile/About the ViewProfile Module.htm
index ecc8a683d2e..6164977d922 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/ViewProfile/About the ViewProfile Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Installed Modules/ViewProfile/About the ViewProfile Module.htm
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
About the ViewProfile Module
The ViewProfile module enables users to manage their user credentials, password, profile and subscriptions to services. The module is accessed by clicking on your display name (the name you chose to be displayed to you and to others on the website) which is typically located in the top right hand corner of the website.
- Installation Note: This module is pre-installed on the site.
Module Version: The version number is always the same as the DNN framework version number.
The View Profile module
-
+
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Announcements/About the Announcements Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Announcements/About the Announcements Module.htm
index 996c990a41f..00dd15803e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Announcements/About the Announcements Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Announcements/About the Announcements Module.htm
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
-
+
About the Announcements Module
The Announcements module displays a list of announcements. Each announcement includes a title and a rich text description. Announcements are ordered by their publish date by default; however view order can be specified. Optional fields include an image, date of publication and a read more... link.
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 04.00.03 / Minimum DNN Version: DNN 04.07.00
Features: IPortable, ISearchable
- Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on this DNN installation by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
The Announcements Module
-
+
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Blog Module Options/Windows Live Writer Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Blog Module Options/Windows Live Writer Settings.html
index 1fa4e2c3972..d79c4e0426a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Blog Module Options/Windows Live Writer Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Blog Module Options/Windows Live Writer Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Windows Live Writer Settings
@@ -9,15 +8,15 @@ Windows Live Writer Settings
- Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. This opens the Blog Module Options page.
- Go to the Windows Live Writer Settings section.
- - At Allow Windows Live Writer, enable users to use WLW (or other remote blogging tools that use the MetaWeblog API) to post and edit blog posts - OR - to disable.
- - At Use Excerpt in Windows Live Writer, to enable the user to use the Excerpt text box in WLW at the bottom to create a summary of the post in plain text. Any split in the post will be ignored and the excerpt will be used instead. This is useful if you want to ensure the summaries are text only (I.e. not HTML).
+ - At Allow Windows Live Writer, enable users to use WLW (or other remote blogging tools that use the MetaWeblog API) to post and edit blog posts - OR - to disable.
+ - At Use Excerpt in Windows Live Writer, enabto enable the user to use the Excerpt text box in WLW at the bottom to create a summary of the post in plain text. Any split in the post will be ignored and the excerpt will be used instead. This is useful if you want to ensure the summaries are text only (I.e. not HTML).
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Configuring Blog Tag Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Configuring Blog Tag Settings.html
index 864903a7aa1..9fd717f5e4f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Configuring Blog Tag Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Configuring Blog Tag Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Blog Tag Settings
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Configuring Blog Tag Settings
- Go to the Blog_Tags module.
-
-
+
- Select the Blog Tag Settings tab.
- Select from the following options:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights.html
index ef8b70804cf..4dd9e1d063b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Blog/Configuration/Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights
@@ -10,7 +9,7 @@ Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights
- Go to the View_Blog module.
-
-
+
- Select the Permissions tab.
- At Edit Module (DNN Platform) or Full Control (Evoq Content and Evoq Content Enterprise), select the roles/usernames who are authorized to create a blog.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/About the Documents Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/About the Documents Module.htm
index 2d347c01166..f26ac6c955e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/About the Documents Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/About the Documents Module.htm
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Documents Module
The Documents module displays a list of documents that can be set as downloadable. All document records Title and a link to view (depending on a user's file associations) or download the document. Link tracking and logging are also available.
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 05.00.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 05.01.00
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Downloading a Document.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/All Users/Downloading a Document.html
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Downloading a Document.html
rename to Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/All Users/Downloading a Document.html
index da953a0ab3f..1985ea0de9c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Downloading a Document.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/All Users/Downloading a Document.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
Downloading a Document
@@ -10,7 +9,7 @@ Downloading a Document
- Click the Download link located beside the required document.
-
+
- Open or save the document to your computer as desired.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Viewing a Document.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/All Users/Viewing a Document.html
similarity index 64%
rename from Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Viewing a Document.html
rename to Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/All Users/Viewing a Document.html
index 4da3fb76e78..f23ab5c6dc1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Viewing a Document.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/All Users/Viewing a Document.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
Viewing a Document
@@ -10,20 +9,20 @@ Viewing a Document
- In the Title column, click on the linked document title.
-
+
- The document is now viewable in either the current Web browser, a new Web browser, or it may be available for download. This will depend on your Web browser settings.
-
+
-
- See "Setting the Visibility of Document Columns"
+ See "Setting the Visibility of Document Columns"
-
- See "Enabling/Disabling the Title Link"
+ See "Enabling/Disabling the Title Link"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Module Editors/Adding a Document.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Module Editors/Adding a Document.html
index f1b12e7967f..768f2118140 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Module Editors/Adding a Document.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Module Editors/Adding a Document.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Adding a Document
How to add a document to the Documents module. Note: Because the size of documents located on external resource such as another website is not known by your site the text "Unknown" is displayed in the Size column.
Note 1. The Sort Index setting is overridden by automatic sorting. See "Adding Document Sorting by Column Name"
- - Select Add New Document from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Add New Document from the module actions menu.
- In the Title text box, enter a title for the document. Note: This is the only field required by this page, however you should also set the Link field. If you update this document now without setting the Link, then the first file that is listed in the File Name field will be sed.
@@ -19,7 +18,7 @@
Adding a Document
- Optional. At Category, enter or select a category for the document.
- Optional. At Owner, select from these options:
- Click the Change Owner link and select a different user to be listed as the owner of this document
- Select None Specified to leave the owner field blank.
- - Recommended. At Link, set the link to this document (See "Setting a URL Link" or See "Setting a File Link" ) - OR - Select None for no link. Tip: The default folder for files can be modified. See "Setting the Default Folder for Documents"
- Recommended. At Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked? to track clicking. If this field is unchecked, the number of the clicks will not recorded. If the clicks are recorded, you have the option of displaying this information in the optional Clicks column. See "Setting the Visibility of Document Columns"
+ - Recommended. At Link, set the link to this document (See "Setting a URL Link" or See "Setting a File Link" ) - OR - Select None for no link. Tip: The default folder for files can be modified. See "Setting the Default Folder for Documents"
- Recommended. At Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked? to track clicking. If this field is unchecked, the number of the clicks will not recorded. If the clicks are recorded, you have the option of displaying this information in the optional Clicks column. See "Setting the Visibility of Document Columns"
- Optional. In the Sort Index text box, enter a number to set the order of this document. Leave blank to use zero (0) and display documents alphabetically.
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Adding Document Sorting by Column Name.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Adding Document Sorting by Column Name.html
index 98cdf78cdb4..0d3fb32d668 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Adding Document Sorting by Column Name.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Adding Document Sorting by Column Name.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Adding Document Sorting by Column Name
How to set cascading sorting of documents for this instance of the Documents module. This setting overrides the Sort Order field on the Edit Documents page.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- At Sorting, if Sort Index sorting option is displayed, click the Delete Sort Order link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling Manual Document Sorting.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling Manual Document Sorting.html
index 0b3395f07ec..ec8aad41c7f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling Manual Document Sorting.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling Manual Document Sorting.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling Manual Document Sorting
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Enabling Manual Document Sorting
Tip: Manual Sorting is the default setting for newly added modules.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- At Sorting, select Sort Index from the left drop down list. This may be pre-selected for you.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Sort Documents.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Sort Documents.html
index 5705b79b9a6..5658ba45286 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Sort Documents.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Sort Documents.html
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling Users to Sort Documents
How to enable or disable document sorting by users on the Documents module. If this setting is enabled, the column names become links which enables users to sort documents in ascending or descending order by any column title.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- - At Allow Users To Sort?, to enable user sorting - OR - to disable it.
+ - At Allow Users To Sort?, to enable user sorting - OR - to disable it.
@@ -23,7 +22,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling Users to Sort Documents
-
The Documents module with user sorting enabled
+
Documents with user sorting enabled
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Categories List.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Categories List.html
index 368692a093f..9b68962fd8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Categories List.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Categories List.html
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling the Categories List
How to enable or disable the categories list on the Documents module. Selecting this option displays a drop down list beside the Category field on the Edit Documents page. Categories are disabled by default. Important: Categories can only be created and maintained by SuperUsers therefore you should organize with your host to create the required categories prior to enabling them.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- - At Use Categories List?, to enable the categories list - OR - disable it.
+ - At Use Categories List?, to enable the categories list - OR - disable it.
- At Categories List Name, select the category list name from the drop down list. E.g. Documents
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Title Link.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Title Link.html
index 3897ebec92e..9b66cb44418 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Title Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Title Link.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling the Title Link
@@ -9,12 +8,12 @@ Enabling/Disabling the Title Link
Important. Documents cannot be downloaded if the 'Show Title Link' field is disabled and the 'Download Link' is not Visible. In this scenario, the document titles and visible columns are displayed as static text to all users who can view the module.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- At Show Title Link?, select from these options:
-
- to set the title as a link.
- to disable the link.
- - Recommended. At Display Columns - Download Links, at Visible to display download links.
+ - Mark the check box to set the title as a link.
- Unmark the check box to disable the link.
+ - Recommended. At Display Columns - Download Links, at Visible to display download links.
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Default Folder for Documents.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Default Folder for Documents.html
index 759da21361c..92337a832d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Default Folder for Documents.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Default Folder for Documents.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Setting the Default Folder for Documents
The default folder must have the correct Folder Security Settings granted in the Digital Asset Management module located on the Admin > File Management page. See "About Folder Security Settings". In DNN Platform, users who can view the module must be granted 'Open Files in Folder' permission to the folder. Module Editors can be granted either 'Open Files in Folder', 'Browse Files in Folder' or 'Write To Folder' permissions depending on your requirements. In Evoq Content and Evoq Content Enterprise, users who can view the module must be granted 'View' permission to the folder. Module Editors can be granted either 'Browse Folder', 'View' or 'Add' permissions depending on your requirements.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- At Default Folder, select a folder name from the drop down list. E.g. Documents. The default option is typically the Root folder.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Order of Document Columns.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Order of Document Columns.html
index deca1d6e479..cc1006dc7e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Order of Document Columns.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Order of Document Columns.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Setting the Order of Document Columns
How to set the order of columns in the Documents module.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- At Display Columns, perform the following as required:
-
- Click the Up button to move a column one position up (i.e. one position to the left on the module)
- Click the Down button to move a column one position down (i.e. one position to the right on the module).
+ - Click the Up button to move a column one position up (i.e. one position to the left on the module)
- Click the Down button to move a column one position down (i.e. one position to the right on the module).
@@ -22,7 +21,7 @@
Setting the Order of Document Columns
-
A Documents module with the columns reordered as shown above
+
Documents with the columns reordered as shown above
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Visibility of Document Columns.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Visibility of Document Columns.html
index bbfa892968c..7078cb960dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Visibility of Document Columns.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Documents/Settings/Setting the Visibility of Document Columns.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Setting the Visibility of Document Columns
@@ -10,10 +9,10 @@ Setting the Visibility of Document Columns
Note: The Clicks column only displays the number of clicks for documents which have link tracking enabled. I.e. The "Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked?" field is checked.
-
-
+
- Select the Documents Module Settings tab.
- - At Display Columns, at Visible to set a column as visible - OR - to set a column as not visible.
+ - At Display Columns, at Visible to set a column as visible - OR - to set a column as not visible.
@@ -25,7 +24,7 @@
Setting the Visibility of Document Columns
-
The Documents module with column visibility modified as shown above
+
Documents with column visibility modified as shown above
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/About the Events Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/About the Events Module.htm
index c5253404100..fc95979a5b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/About the Events Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/About the Events Module.htm
@@ -1,11 +1,12 @@
-
+
About the Events Module
- The Events module displays a list of upcoming events. Events can be displayed in chronological order as list or in a monthly or weekly calendar. Each event includes a title, start and end date/time, a description and an optional image. Events can be set to automatically expire on a particular date, or to recur by any specified number of days, weeks, months or years. Event moderation, event notification and enrolments also be used.
+ The Events module displays a list of upcoming events. Events can be displayed in chronological order as list or in a monthly or weekly calendar. Each event includes a title, start and end date/time, a description and an optional image. Events can be set to automatically expire on a particular date, or to recur by any specified number of days, weeks, months or years. Event moderation, event notification and enrollments also be used.
The Events module can be configured to require moderation of events and enrollments. Moderation can be required for all event/enrollment changes or only for new items. One or more moderators will be sent email notification when items require moderation.
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 06.00.03 / Minimum DNN Version: 06.01.02
Features: ISearchable
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Canceling an Event Enrollment.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Canceling an Event Enrollment.html
index 9e650a00c1b..10a48fb9196 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Canceling an Event Enrollment.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Canceling an Event Enrollment.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Canceling an Event Enrollment
How to cancel an enrollment to an event using the Events module. Note: You cannot cancel from paid events.
- View your enrollments. See "Viewing Your Event Enrollments"
- - In the Select column, beside each enrollment you want to cancel.
+ - In the Select column, beside each enrollment you want to cancel.
- Click the Cancel Selected Enrolments link. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Cancel the SELECTED Enrolments?"
-
Click the OK button to confirm.The selected enrollments are now removed from the list.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Changing the Event View.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Changing the Event View.html
index f6d0e4a8a19..36d66d2fa19 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Changing the Event View.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Changing the Event View.html
@@ -1,12 +1,11 @@
-
+
-
Changing the Event View
The Events module allows you to view events in either a monthly calendar, a weekly list or as a list. All three view options are available in the default configuration, however one or more views can be disabled and the design and fields displayed in each view can also be modified. In the below images, the default configurations are used.
- Important. If the Icon Bar has been disabled, unauthenticated users will be unable to change the view because access to the module actions menu is restricted to authenticated users only.
+ Important. If the Icon Bar has been disabled, unauthenticated users will be unable to change the view because access to the module actions menu is restricted to authenticated users only.
Here are the three different views that can be selected using either the module actions menu or the Event module Icon Bar:
List View: Displays events in a list.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Requesting Event Reminder.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Requesting Event Reminder.html
index 1e1e4e03566..dd6b1c66176 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Requesting Event Reminder.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Requesting Event Reminder.html
@@ -1,12 +1,10 @@
-
+
-
Requesting Event Reminder
- How to request notification of an event on the Events module. Note: Reminders may not be available on some or all events.
- Tip: Events that allow notifications typically display the Reminder icon.
+ How to request notification of an event on the Events module. Note: Reminders may not be available on some or all events. Note: Events that allow notifications typically display the Reminder icon.
- Go to the event details page of the required event. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)", See "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or See "Viewing Event Details (Week View)".
@@ -15,13 +13,13 @@ Requesting Event Reminder
- In the Remind me about this Event @ text box, enter the email address to receive this reminder. If you are logged in, the email address associated with your user account is automatically displayed however you can enter an alternate address.
-
- Set the number of Minute(s),Day(s), or Hour(s) - Before Event Starts that you want to be notified.
+ - Set the number of Minute(s), Day(s), or Hour(s) - Before Event Starts that you want to be notified.
- - Optional. At Remind about all Events in this series? to be reminded of all events in this series - OR - to be notified for this single event only. This option is only displayed for recurring event.
+ - Optional. At Remind about all Events in this series? to be reminded of all events in this series - OR - to be notified for this single event only. This option is only displayed for recurring event.
- Click the Remind me about this Event @ link. This display a message detailing when you will be notified. E.g. "You will be reminder about this event on [selected date and time]"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Subscribing to New Event Notifications.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Subscribing to New Event Notifications.html
index a4248ddc77a..4b78001ed62 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Subscribing to New Event Notifications.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Subscribing to New Event Notifications.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Subscribing to New Event Notifications
@@ -10,7 +9,7 @@ Subscribing to New Event Notifications
Prerequisite. The Event Notification schedule must be enabled for event/enrollment notifications to be sent. See "Enabling/Disabling a Task"
- The Notify Me check box is located in the top right corner of the Events module toolbar.
-
- Check the check box to subscribe to notifications.
- Uncheck the check box to unsubscribe from notifications.
+ - Mark the check box to subscribe to notifications.
- Unmark the check box to unsubscribe from notifications.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Viewing Your Event Enrollments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Viewing Your Event Enrollments.html
index 6a08946b2f7..378207e66a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Viewing Your Event Enrollments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/All Users/Viewing Your Event Enrollments.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Viewing Your Event Enrollments
@@ -14,14 +13,14 @@ Viewing Your Event Enrollments
The following details are displayed for each event you have enrolled for:
- - Select: and then click the Cancel Selected Enrollments link to cancel one or more enrollments. This option may not be available.
+ - Select: and then click the Cancel Selected Enrollments link to cancel one or more enrollments. This option may not be available.
- Start: The start date and time of the event.
- End: The end date and time of the event.
- Event: The title of the event which links to more event details.
- - Approved: Displays if your enrollment has been approved ( checked ) or is unapproved ( unchecked ).
+ - Approved: Displays if your enrollment has been approved or is unapproved .
- Amount: Displays the amount ( if any ) that has been paid to attend the event.
- Quantity: The number of attendees you have enrolled for this event.
- - Total: Total amount for this enrolment.
+ - Total: Total amount for this enrollment.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Enrollments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Enrollments.html
index c13a40f70a0..53eb79f783d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Enrollments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Enrollments.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Approving All Moderated Enrollments
@@ -10,8 +9,8 @@ Approving All Moderated Enrollments
- Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu - OR - Click the Moderate Events button. This opens the Moderate Enrollment - Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Enrollments. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation.
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments.
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notifications.
+ - Mark the check box to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments.
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- Unmark the check box if you don't want to send email notifications.
- Click the Approve All link. This will display the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Events.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Events.html
index 3481c41d1f7..947f0ce2fff 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Events.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving All Moderated Events.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Approving All Moderated Events
@@ -10,8 +9,8 @@ Approving All Moderated Events
- Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu - OR - Click the Moderate Events button. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Events. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation.
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the users who created the events.
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notifications.
+ - Mark the check box to send email notification to the users who created the events.
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- Unmark the check box if you don't want to send email notifications.
- Click the Approve All link. This will display the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Enrollments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Enrollments.html
index 386711dca71..504306dcdd6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Enrollments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Enrollments.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Approving Moderated Enrollments
@@ -10,8 +9,8 @@ Approving Moderated Enrollments
- Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu - OR - Click the Moderate Events button. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Enrollments. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation.
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the users who created the events.
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that is displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notifications.
+ - Mark the check box to send email notification to the users who created the events.
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that is displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- Unmark the check box if you don't want to send email notifications.
- In the Action column, select Approve beside each enrollment to be approved.
-
Click the OK button to confirm. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Events.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Events.html
index 2a394a43b3d..fb9e976e366 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Events.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Approving Moderated Events.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Approving Moderated Events
@@ -12,8 +11,8 @@ Approving Moderated Events
- Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu - OR - Click the Moderate Events button. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Events. This displays a list of any events that are awaiting moderation
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the user or users who created the event(s).
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notification.
+ - Mark the check box to send email notification to the user or users who created the event(s).
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- Unmark the check box if you don't want to send email notification.
- In the Action column, select Approve beside each event to be approved.
-
Click the OK button to confirm. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Enrollments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Enrollments.html
index 50b9a8e700d..cfa3a3197c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Enrollments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Enrollments.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Denying All Moderated Enrollments
@@ -10,8 +9,8 @@ Denying All Moderated Enrollments
- Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu - OR - Click the Moderate Events button. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Enrollments. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation.
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments.
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notifications.
+ - to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments.
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notifications.
- Click the Deny All link. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Events.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Events.html
index 38dfa9c73fb..fb213c75040 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Events.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying All Moderated Events.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Denying All Moderated Events
@@ -10,9 +9,9 @@ Denying All Moderated Events
- Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu - OR - Click the Moderate Events button. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Events. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation.
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the users who created the events.
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that is displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notifications.
- - Click the Deny All link. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
+ - Mark the check box to send email notification to the users who created the events.
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that is displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- Unmark the check box if you don't want to send email notifications.
+ - Click the Deny All link. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email)?"
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Enrollments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Enrollments.html
index 3ac5022cbd3..86a34ae7dbc 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Enrollments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Enrollments.html
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Denying Moderated Enrollments
How to deny one or more enrollments awaiting moderation on the Events module. Note: Denying enrollments permanently deletes all details of the events.
- - Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
+ - Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Enrollments. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation.
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments.
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that is displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notification.
+ - to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments.
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that is displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notification.
- In the Action column, select Deny for each enrollment to be denied and deleted.
-
Click the OK button to confirm.This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Events.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Events.html
index 38d2ecc4c08..0b588e343cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Events.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Moderator/Denying Moderated Events.html
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Denying Moderated Events
How to deny one or more events awaiting moderation on the Events module. Note: Denying events permanently deletes all details of the events.
- - Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
+ - Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.
- At Select View to Moderate, select Moderate Events. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation.
- At Email Action Notification to User?, select one of these options:
-
- to send email notification to the user or users who created the event(s).
-
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- if you don't want to send email notification.
+ - Mark the check box to send email notification to the user or users who created the event(s).
+
- In the Email From text box, edit the email address that will be displayed in the From field when the user receives the message. The email address of the logged in moderator will be displayed by default.
- Optional. In the Email Subject text box, edit the subject of the email.
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, edit the message of the email.
- Unmark the check box if you don't want to send email notification.
- In the Action column, select Deny for each event to be denied and deleted.
-
Click the OK button to confirm. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Update/Delete Item(s) (and send Email) ?"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Adding an Event.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Adding an Event.html
index f0773d88fb8..a2cc11f5d66 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Adding an Event.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Adding an Event.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Adding an Event
@@ -12,13 +11,13 @@ Adding an Event
- Go to the Event Settings section. This section name is only displayed if additional sections are enabled.
- In the Title text box, enter a title for this event. Note: Although this is the only required field, you should also update the Notes field to remove/edit the default text. If you choose to create an event using the default settings, the event start date/time and end date/time will be the current date/time.
- At All Day Event, select from these options:
-
- if the event lasts all day. This removes the time fields from the next two fields.
- to set a start and end time for the event.
+ - Mark the check box if the event lasts all day. This removes the time fields from the next two fields.
- Unmark the check box to set a start and end time for the event.
- At Start Date/Time, set the following:
- Click the Calendar button and select the start date of the event. See "Working with the Calendar"
- If the time selection field is displayed, click the Time View button and select the start time for the event.
- Click the Copy to End Date link. This updates the End Date/Time field so it displays the Start Date you selected.
- At End Date/Time, set the following:
- Click the Calendar button and select the end date for the event.
- If the time selection field is displayed, click the Time View button and select the end time for the event.
- At Display End Date, select from these options;
-
- to display the end date in all views.
- to hide the end date in all views.
+ - Mark the check box to display the end date in all views.
- Unmark the check box to hide the end date in all views.
- At Time Zone, you may be able to select the time zone for this event depending on the settings configured for this module.
- Optional. At Importance, select Low, Normal or High from the drop down list to set the importance of the event. The default setting is Normal.
- Optional. At Category, select a category for this event - OR - Select None if this event is not associated with any category. See "Adding Event Categories"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment.html
index fe9af8fab97..9cd36ff942b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment
@@ -11,13 +10,13 @@ Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment
- Add a new event (See "Adding an Event") - OR - Go to the event details page of the required event. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)", See "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or See "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" and then click the Edit link to edit either one time events or to edit only this instance of a recurring event, or click the Edit Series link to edit all instances of this recurring event.
- At Allow Enrollment, select from these options:
-
- to allow enrollment.
- to disable enrollment. Skip to Step 7.
+ - Mark the check box to allow enrollment.
- Unmark the check box to disable enrollment. Skip to Step 7.
- At Type of Enrollment, select from these options:
- Free: Select if there is no fee associated with this event.
- Paid Fee:
Select to configure the cost of this event.
- In the Paid Fee text box, enter the fee amount. Note: The currency type is set by the Administrator.
- In the PayPal Account text box, edit the PayPal account email address if required.
- Optional. In the Max. Enrollment text box, enter the maximum number of enrollments that can be accepted for this event. If an unlimited number of enrollments can be accepted, enter 0. The default setting is 0 (unlimited enrollments).
- - Optional. At Enroll List on Detail View, to display the list of enrolled users on the detailed event view - OR - to disable and display on the Edit Event page only displayed at the Enrolled Users field.
+ - Optional. At Enroll List on Detail View, to display the list of enrolled users on the detailed event view - OR - to disable and display on the Edit Event page only displayed at the Enrolled Users field.
- Optional. At Enrollee Role, select one of the following:
- Select None to permit all registered users to enroll for the event. This is the default setting.
- Select a role to limit enrollment to members of that role. Note: This restriction also applies to the Admin role.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events.html
index 94edc8a07f4..2029ab96796 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events
@@ -11,8 +10,7 @@ Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events
- Go to the Recurring Event section.
- At Recurring Event, select from these options:
- -
- to set the event as recurring.
+
- Mark the check box to set the event as recurring.
- At Recurrence End Date, click the Calendar button and select the last date when the event will reoccur. (See "Working with the Calendar"). Note: Event Start Date must occur before the recurrence end date in order for the event to occur at least once
- Select and set one of the following reoccurrence schedules:
- To set the event to reoccur periodically:
- Select Periodic Event.
- At the Repeated every field, enter the frequency of the reoccurrence into the text box, and then select either Day(s), Weeks(s), Month(s), or Year(s) to set the period of the recurrence. The default setting is every 1 day.
- To set the event to reoccur weekly:
@@ -20,8 +18,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events
- Select Monthly Event.
- At Repeated on select the week in which the event reoccurs in the month. Options are First, Second, Third, Fourth and Last. The default setting is First.
- Select the day of the month when the event reoccurs. The default setting is Sunday.
- To set the event to reoccur on a specific date of each month:
- Select Monthly Event.
- At Repeated On Day, select the date of the month when the event is repeated. The default setting is 1st.
- In the Repetition Frequency (Months) text box, enter the number of months that the event reoccurs for. E.g. Enter 1 for an event which reoccur each month, or 2 for an event which reoccur every second month.
- To set the event to reoccur annually:
- Select Annual Event.
- At Repeat On Date, click the Calendar button and select the date. See "Working with the Calendar"
- -
- to set the event as a one time event. Note: Saved settings are retained for future use.
+ - Unmark the check box to set the event as a one time event. Note: Saved settings are retained for future use.
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Image.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Image.html
index 949b273d0ab..f3a7b2be77a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Image.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Image.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Image
@@ -11,8 +10,8 @@ Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Image
- Commence adding a new event (See "Adding an Event") but don't click the Update button until completing the below steps - OR - Edit an existing event (See "Editing an Event").
- Go to the Display Image section below the Editor.
- At Display Image, select from these options:
-
- to display an image for this event.
-
- At Image URL select or enter the link to the image. See "About the Link Control"
- Optional. In the Width text box, enter the pixel width for this image - OR - Leave this field blank for the original image size.
- Optional. In the Height text box, enter the pixel height for this image - OR - Leave this field blank for the original image size.
- for no image. Note: This removes the image from the event listing; however any saved image settings are retained for future use.
+ - Mark the check box to display an image for this event.
+
- At Image URL select or enter the link to the image. See "About the Link Control"
- Optional. In the Width text box, enter the pixel width for this image - OR - Leave this field blank for the original image size.
- Optional. In the Height text box, enter the pixel height for this image - OR - Leave this field blank for the original image size.
- Unmark the check box for no image. Note: This removes the image from the event listing; however any saved image settings are retained for future use.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder.html
index 5ff6bd19e15..b97e34e009e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder
@@ -13,8 +12,8 @@ Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder
- Select the Advanced Setting tab.
- Go to the Send Reminder section below the Notes Editor.
- At Send Reminder, select from these options:
-
- to enable reminders. This displays the associated settings.
-
- In the Time Before Event text box, enter and select the number of Days, Minutes or Hours before the event start time to send the notification.
- Optional. In the Email From text box, modify the email address to be displayed in the From field of in message.
- In the Email Subject text box, modify the email subject including any of the available replacement tokens. (See the list of allowed tokens below)
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, modify the email message including any of the available replacement tokens. Some of the allowed tokens are listed below.
- to disable reminders. Note: This disables the reminder but any saved reminder settings are retained for future use.
+ - Mark the check box to enable reminders. This displays the associated settings.
+
- In the Time Before Event text box, enter and select the number of Days, Minutes or Hours before the event start time to send the notification.
- Optional. In the Email From text box, modify the email address to be displayed in the From field of in message.
- In the Email Subject text box, modify the email subject including any of the available replacement tokens. (See the list of allowed tokens below)
- Optional. In the Email Message text box, modify the email message including any of the available replacement tokens. Some of the allowed tokens are listed below.
- Unmark the check box to disable reminders. Note: This disables the reminder but any saved reminder settings are retained for future use.
-
Click the OK button to confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enrolling User to an Event.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enrolling User to an Event.html
index 243d7337579..7763b29a3c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enrolling User to an Event.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Enrolling User to an Event.html
@@ -1,11 +1,10 @@
-
+
-
Enrolling User to an Event
How to enroll one or more users to an event on the Events module.
-Prerequisite. Event enrollment must be enabled for the module (See "Configuring the Enrollment Settings") and the event must allow enrollment (See "Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment").
- Go to the event details page of the required event. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)", See "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or See "Viewing Event Details (Week View)"
- Click the Edit link.
- Select the Advanced Settings tab.
- Go to the Allow Enrollment section.
- At Enroll User To Event, the names of all users who are authorized to enroll to this event are displayed.
- Optional. Search for user(s) by choosing to search by either their Username or Last Name, entering the first letter of the name into the Starts With text box and then clicking the Refresh List link to view the corresponding users. In the below example, a search has been made for all usernames beginning with G.
- Check the check box beside each user to be enrolled.
- Click the Enroll Selected Users link.
- The user(s) are now added to the Enrolled Users list.
- Optional. To email details of the enrollment and event to one or more enrolled users:
-
- Check the check box beside each user to be emailed.
- Edit the Email Details if required.
- Click the Email Selected Enrolled Users link.
- The message "Are You Sure You Wish To Send an Email to SELECTED Enrolled Users?" is now displayed. Click the OK button to confirm.
- Click the Cancel button to return to the module.
Tip: If the list of enrolled users is set to display on the event detail page, you can view the full list of enrolled users there. Otherwise you must edit the event to view the enrolled users list.
+Prerequisite. Event enrollment must be enabled for the module (See "Configuring the Enrollment Settings") and the event must allow enrollment (See "Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment").
- Go to the event details page of the required event. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)", See "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or See "Viewing Event Details (Week View)"
- Click the Edit link.
- Select the Advanced Settings tab.
- Go to the Allow Enrollment section.
- At Enroll User To Event, the names of all users who are authorized to enroll to this event are displayed.
- Optional. Search for user(s) by choosing to search by either their Username or Last Name, entering the first letter of the name into the Starts With text box and then clicking the Refresh List link to view the corresponding users. In the below example, a search has been made for all usernames beginning with G.
- Mark the check box beside each user to be enrolled.
- Click the Enroll Selected Users link.
- The user(s) are now added to the Enrolled Users list.
- Optional. To email details of the enrollment and event to one or more enrolled users:
+
- Check the check box beside each user to be emailed.
- Edit the Email Details if required.
- Click the Email Selected Enrolled Users link.
- The message "Are You Sure You Wish To Send an Email to SELECTED Enrolled Users?" is now displayed. Click the OK button to confirm.
- Click the Cancel button to return to the module.
Tip: If the list of enrolled users is set to display on the event detail page, you can view the full list of enrolled users there. Otherwise you must edit the event to view the enrolled users list.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Managing Existing User Enrollments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Managing Existing User Enrollments.html
index 40cf964d777..8bf04c01597 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Managing Existing User Enrollments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Module Editors/Managing Existing User Enrollments.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Managing Existing User Enrollments
@@ -12,7 +11,7 @@ Managing Existing User Enrollments
- Click the Edit link.
- Select the Advanced Settings tab.
- Details of any users who are currently enrolled are listed at Enrolled Users.
- - In the Select column, check the check box beside one or more users and perform one of the following tasks:
+
- In the Select column, mark the check box beside one or more users and perform one of the following tasks:
- Click the Email Selected Enrolled Users link to email these users. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Send an Email to SELECTED Enrolled Users?"
- Click the OK button.
- Click the Delete Selected Enrolled Users link to delete these users. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete the SELECTED Enrolled Users?"
- Click the OK button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Custom Field Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Custom Field Settings.html
index 110f51ba026..336fc062186 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Custom Field Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Custom Field Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Custom Field Settings
@@ -11,10 +10,9 @@ Configuring Custom Field Settings
- Select the Display tab.
- Expand the Custom Fields section.
- At Display Custom Field 1, select from the following options:
-
- Check the
- check box to enable Custom Field 1 to be displayed.
- to disable this custom field.
+ - Mark the check box to enable Custom Field 1 to be displayed.
- Unmark the check box to disable this custom field.
- At Display Custom Field 2, select from the following options:
-
- Check the check box to enable Custom Field 2 to be displayed.
- to disable this custom field.
+ - Mark the check box to enable Custom Field 2 to be displayed.
- Unmark the check box to disable this custom field.
@@ -27,7 +25,7 @@
Configuring Custom Field Settings
- Navigate to Admin > Languages.
- - Go to the Culture grid and click on the Edit button in the Static Resources - Site column.
+ - Go to the Culture grid and click on the Edit button in the Static Resources - Site column.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Detail View Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Detail View Settings.html
index 48ceb98d3fa..fe9a442eee3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Detail View Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Detail View Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Detail View Settings
@@ -11,11 +10,11 @@ Configuring Detail View Settings
- Select the Display tab.
- Expand the Detail View Settings section.
- At Event Detail New Page, select from the following options:
-
- Check the check box to display event detail on a new page.
- to display event details on the same page. This is the default setting.
+ - Mark the check box to display event detail on a new page.
- Unmark the check box to display event details on the same page. This is the default setting.
- At Set Event Detail Page Allowed, select from the following options:
-
- Check the check box to allow event editors to set a specific page as event detail page.
- to disable. This is the default setting.
+ - Mark the check box to allow event editors to set a specific page as event detail page.
- Unmark the check box to disable. This is the default setting.
- At Enable Enroll Validation Popup, select from the following options:
-
- Check the check box to enable a message box which required the user to confirm they want to enroll. This is the default setting.
- to disable popup box.
+ - Mark the check box to enable a message box which required the user to confirm they want to enroll. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box to disable popup box.
- Click the Update Settings link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Event Month View Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Event Month View Settings.html
index 2c67b842623..adbc7f2eda4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Event Month View Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Event Month View Settings.html
@@ -1,23 +1,22 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Event Month View Settings
How to configure the month view settings of the Events module.
- - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the Display tab.
- Expand the Month View Settings section.
- - At Enable Month View Cell Events, check the check box to display event details in the monthly calendar - OR - to hide event details in the monthly calendar. To view event details users must click on the date in the calendar.
+ - At Enable Month View Cell Events, to display event details in the monthly calendar - OR - to hide event details in the monthly calendar. To view event details users must click on the date in the calendar.
- At Show Events in Next/Prev Month, select from the following options:
-
- to hide events which fall on the previous or the next month from being displayed in the selected month view.
- Check the check box to display events which occur in the month before or after the displayed month in the monthly calendar. E.g. If the displayed month is July and July 31st falls on a Monday, any events which occur at the start of August will be displayed in the cells for August.
- - At Weekend Starts Friday, check the check box to use Fri/Sat as the weekend - OR - to use Sat/Sun as the weekend.
- - At Show Events Start Time in Title, check the check box display the event start time to be displayed on the link to the event - OR - to hide the event start time.
- - At Event Day New Page, check the check box to enable Event Day to be shown in new Page (not embedded) when Enable Month View Cell Events unchecked - OR - to disable.
- - At Enable Selectable Day, check the check box to enable a day to always be selectable when Enable Month View Cell Events is enabled - OR - to disable.
- - At Show Event Icons, check the check box beside each event icon (Priority, Recurring, Reminder and Enrollment) to enable it to be displayed beside the event title in the month view. All icons are shown by default.
+ - Unmark the check box to hide events which fall on the previous or the next month from being displayed in the selected month view.
- Mark the check box to display events which occur in the month before or after the displayed month in the monthly calendar. E.g. If the displayed month is July and July 31st falls on a Monday, any events which occur at the start of August will be displayed in the cells for August.
+ - At Weekend Starts Friday, to use Fri/Sat as the weekend - OR - to use Sat/Sun as the weekend.
+ - At Show Events Start Time in Title, mark the check box display the event start time to be displayed on the link to the event - OR - to hide the event start time.
+ - At Event Day New Page, to enable Event Day to be shown in new Page (not embedded) when Enable Month View Cell Events unchecked - OR - to disable.
+ - At Enable Selectable Day, to enable a day to always be selectable when Enable Month View Cell Events is enabled - OR - to disable.
+ - At Show Event Icons, beside each event icon (Priority, Recurring, Reminder and Enrollment) to enable it to be displayed beside the event title in the month view. All icons are shown by default.
- Click the Update Settings link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Tooltip Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Tooltip Settings.html
index ec05f5e7c0c..da6a9473b26 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Tooltip Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Tooltip Settings.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Tooltip Settings
How to configure the Tooltip settings of the Events module. Tool tip show when hovering over whole row in list and day views, and the event cell in week view.
- - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the Display tab.
- Expand the Tooltip Settings section.
- - At Display Month View Tooltip, check the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the month view - OR - to hide tool tip.
- - At Display Week View Tooltip, check the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the week view - OR - to hide tool tip.
- - At Display Day View Tooltip, check the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the day view - OR - to hide tool tip.
+ - At Display Month View Tooltip, mark the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the month view - OR - to hide tool tip.
+ - At Display Week View Tooltip, mark the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the week view - OR - to hide tool tip.
+ - At Display Day View Tooltip, mark the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the day view - OR - to hide tool tip.
- In the Tooltip Length text box, enter the maximum number of characters included in the tool tip. The default setting is 10000.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Week View Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Week View Settings.html
index 50cbbe2e688..6e63f37a511 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Week View Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring Week View Settings.html
@@ -1,20 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Week View Settings
How to configure the information that is displayed on the Week view of the Events module.
- - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the Display tab.
- Expand the Week View Settings section.
- - At Full Time Scale, check the check box to display the full time scale in the week view - OR - to disable.
- - At Include End Value, check the check box to display the end time of the event in the week view - OR - to hide the end time.
+ - At Full Time Scale, to display the full time scale in the week view - OR - to disable.
+ - At Include End Value, to display the end time of the event in the week view - OR - to hide the end time.
- At Show Value Marks, select from these options:
-
- Check the check box to display the grid lines against each time in the week view when the above field is unchecked. Note: The Include End Value field above must be unchecked to enable this option.
- to hide grid lines.
- - At Show Event Icons, check the check box beside each event icon (Priority, Recurring, Reminder and Enrollment) to enable it to be displayed beside the event title in the month view. All icons are shown by default.
+ - Mark the check box to display the grid lines against each time in the week view when the above field is unchecked. Note: The Include End Value field above must be unchecked to enable this option.
- Unmark the check box to hide grid lines.
+ - At Show Event Icons, beside each event icon (Priority, Recurring, Reminder and Enrollment) to enable it to be displayed beside the event title in the month view. All icons are shown by default.
- Click the Update Settings link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring the Event List Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring the Event List Settings.html
index ca7936d15d0..69c797d0616 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring the Event List Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Display Settings/Configuring the Event List Settings.html
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
-
+
-
Configuring the Event List Settings
How to configure the list view of the Events module. To use the list view, you must place two Events modules on the page. Note, you should not enable List mode on the first module, only in the second Events module.
- - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the General tab.
- Expand the Event List Settings section.
- At Grid or Repeater, select from the following options:
@@ -16,12 +15,12 @@
Configuring the Event List Settings
- To display the number of events displayed by the number of days:
- Select Select Events By Days.
- Enter the [number of] days before current date to be displayed.
- Enter the [number of] days after current date to be displayed.
- To display the number of events displayed by the number of events:
- Select Select Events By Number.
- Enter the Next [number of] events to be displayed from the current date.
- Enter the within the next [number of] days. E.g. Entering Next 10 events from current date within the next 14 days will display a maximum of 10 events and will not display events more than 2 weeks in advance.
- At Event Fields to Display, set the fields to be displayed on each event:
-
- To Add a Field, click on the name of the field in the Available box and then click the Add > link.
- To Add All Fields, click the Add All >> link.
- To Remove a Field, click on the field name in the Selected box and then click the Remove < link.
- To Remove All Field, click the Remove All<< link.
- At Page Size, select the number of events to be displayed on each page of the Event List.
- At Default Sorting, select to sort events either Ascending or Descending by their start date. The default settings is Ascending.
- At Default Sort Column, select the column by which events in list view will be sorted by default.
- At Collapse Recurring, check the check box to collapse recurring events to one row - OR - disable.
- At Show Event Icons, check the check box beside each icon to be displayed beside the event title in list view. All icons are checked by default.
- Repeater: If you choose to use the Repeater option, you will need to update the template applied to the module.
+
- To Add a Field, click on the name of the field in the Available box and then click the Add > link.
- To Add All Fields, click the Add All >> link.
- To Remove a Field, click on the field name in the Selected box and then click the Remove < link.
- To Remove All Field, click the Remove All<< link.
- At Page Size, select the number of events to be displayed on each page of the Event List.
- At Default Sorting, select to sort events either Ascending or Descending by their start date. The default settings is Ascending.
- At Default Sort Column, select the column by which events in list view will be sorted by default.
- At Collapse Recurring, mark the check box to collapse recurring events to one row - OR - to disable.
- At Show Event Icons, mark the check box beside each icon to be displayed beside the event title in list view. All icons are checked by default.
- Repeater: If you choose to use the Repeater option, you will need to update the template applied to the module.
- To set the number of events displayed in the list, select from the following options:
- To display the number of events displayed by the number of days:
- Select Select Events By Days.
- Enter the [number of] days before current date to be displayed.
- Enter the [number of] days after current date to be displayed.
- To display the number of events displayed by the number of events:
-
- Select Select Events By Number.
- Enter the Next [number of] events to be displayed from the current date.
- Enter the within the next [number of] days. E.g. Entering Next 10 events from current date within the next 14 days will display a maximum of 10 events and will not display events more than 2 weeks in advance.
- At Default Sorting, select to sort events either Ascending or Descending by their start date. The default settings is Ascending.
- At Default Sort Column, select the column by which events in list view will be sorted by default.
- At Collapse Recurring, check the check box to collapse recurring events to one row - OR - disable.
- At Show Event Icons, check the check box beside each icon to be displayed beside the event title in list view. All icons are checked by default.
- At Repeater as Table, choose from these options:
-
- Check the check box to use traditional Table based layout.
- to configure the templates to use a div based layout. Recommended for advanced users only.
- In Repeater Columns text box, enter the number of repeater columns. If row is not completely filled then, extra columns are populated with blank <td></td> pairs. Rows are bracketed by <tr></tr> pair.
- At Repeater Rows, text box, enter the number of repeater rows. If row is not completely filled then, extra columns are populated with blank <td></td> pairs. Rows are bracketed by <tr></tr> pair.
- At Use Time in Filter, check to use the time when selecting events - OR - use the start of the range begins at midnight on the first day.
+ - Select Select Events By Number.
- Enter the Next [number of] events to be displayed from the current date.
- Enter the within the next [number of] days. E.g. Entering Next 10 events from current date within the next 14 days will display a maximum of 10 events and will not display events more than 2 weeks in advance.
- At Default Sorting, select to sort events either Ascending or Descending by their start date. The default settings is Ascending.
- At Default Sort Column, select the column by which events in list view will be sorted by default.
- At Collapse Recurring, mark the check box to collapse recurring events to one row - OR - disable.
- At Show Event Icons, mark the check box beside each icon to be displayed beside the event title in list view. All icons are checked by default.
- At Repeater as Table, choose from these options:
+
- Mark the check box to use traditional Table based layout.
- Unmark the check box to configure the templates to use a div based layout. Recommended for advanced users only.
- In Repeater Columns text box, enter the number of repeater columns. If row is not completely filled then, extra columns are populated with blank <td></td> pairs. Rows are bracketed by <tr></tr> pair.
- At Repeater Rows, text box, enter the number of repeater rows. If row is not completely filled then, extra columns are populated with blank <td></td> pairs. Rows are bracketed by <tr></tr> pair.
- At Use Time in Filter, mark the check box to use the time when selecting events - OR - use the start of the range begins at midnight on the first day.
- Click the Update Settings link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring Moderation Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring Moderation Settings.html
index 04fdfde76d7..f721e6f7b1f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring Moderation Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring Moderation Settings.html
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Moderation Settings
How to enable or disable the moderation of events and enrollments and configure the related settings on the Events module.
- - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the Enrollment & Moderation Settings tab.
- Expand the Moderation Settings section.
- At Moderate Event/Enrollment Changes, select from these option:
-
- to enable moderation of all changes to events and enrollments.
- disable moderation. Newly added events and event changes will be automatically displayed on the module.
+ - Mark the check box to enable moderation of all changes to events and enrollments.
- Unmark the check box disable moderation. Newly added events and event changes will be automatically displayed on the module.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring the Enrollment Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring the Enrollment Settings.html
index b1fe3bd9d3b..01b59c2d25a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring the Enrollment Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Enrollment & Moderation Setting/Configuring the Enrollment Settings.html
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Configuring the Enrollment Settings
How to configure enrollment settings including PayPal account details for paid events on the Events module.
- - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the Enrollment & Moderation Settings tab.
- Expand the Enrollment Settings section.
- - At Permit Event Enrollment, to enable authorized users to sign up for events - OR - to disable event enrollment and then skip to the final step of this tutorial.
+ - At Permit Event Enrollment, to enable authorized users to sign up for events - OR - to disable event enrollment and then skip to the final step of this tutorial.
- At Allow Paid Events, select from these options:
-
- to allow editors to create events that have an enrollment fee that is processed using PayPal.
-
- Optional. In the PayPal Account text box, enter the PayPal Account details (this will be an email address) to be used for collecting fees for paid events. The Host email address is entered by default.
- Optional. At PayPal URL, enter https://www.paypal.com - OR - enter https://www.sandbox.paypal.com to test this setting. The default setting is https://www.paypal.com
- and skip to the last step.
- - At Display Enroll List by Default, to display the enrollment list on the Event Detail Page by default. This can be modified for individual events when adding or editing events - OR - if it isn't displayed by default.
- - At Hide Full Enrolled Events, to hide an event once the maximum number of enrollees is reached. Note: The event owner and moderators always can see the event - OR - to keep displaying the event.
+ - Mark the check box to allow editors to create events that have an enrollment fee that is processed using PayPal.
+
- Optional. In the PayPal Account text box, enter the PayPal Account details (this will be an email address) to be used for collecting fees for paid events. The Host email address is entered by default.
- Optional. At PayPal URL, enter https://www.paypal.com - OR - enter https://www.sandbox.paypal.com to test this setting. The default setting is https://www.paypal.com
- Unmark the check box and skip to the last step.
+ - At Display Enroll List by Default, to display the enrollment list on the Event Detail Page by default. This can be modified for individual events when adding or editing events - OR - if it isn't displayed by default.
+ - At Hide Full Enrolled Events, to hide an event once the maximum number of enrollees is reached. Note: The event owner and moderators always can see the event - OR - to keep displaying the event.
- In the Allow Multiple Enrollees text box, enter the number of people that a single user can enroll for an event. The default value is one ( 1 ) enrollment per user.
- In the Cancel Before Days text box, enter the number of days before an event a user is able to cancel their enrollment. Note: Cancellations are only allowed for unpaid events.
- At Select the User Fields to Display, select each of the user fields to be displayed on the Event Detail Page and who is able to view these fields.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event General Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event General Settings.html
index 8fa81d108ad..8200e853167 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event General Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event General Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Event General Settings
@@ -12,19 +11,19 @@ Configuring Event General Settings
- Expand the General Settings section.
- At Edit Time Interval, select the time interval in minutes at which events can be scheduled. E.g. Select 15 to set 15 minute intervals. The default setting is 30. Important: This setting must be set before any events are added. If events exist in the module you will be unable to edit this field.
- At Permit Recurring Events, select from the following options:
-
- to enable the adding of recurring events. If checked, the Recurring Settings section is displayed on the Edit Events page.
- to disable recurring events from being added.
+ - Mark the check box to enable the adding of recurring events. If checked, the Recurring Settings section is displayed on the Edit Events page.
- Unmark the check box to disable recurring events from being added.
- In the Max Generated Occurrences, edit the Maximum number of occurrences of an event generated on save. Leave blank for unlimited. Until date is set to last occurrence if limit reached.
- - At Prevent Schedule Conflict, to check for a location conflict when checking date conflicts. If this option is selected, a "Conflict with existing Event! Change Date/Time" message is displayed to users when they attempt to add a conflicting event - OR - to disable.
- - At Check for Location Conflict, to prevent the adding of events within the same date and time period. If this option is selected, a "Conflict with existing Event! Change Date/Time or Location" message is displayed to users when they attempt to add a conflicting event, as shown in the below image - OR - to enable events to be scheduled at the same time.
+
- At Prevent Schedule Conflict, to check for a location conflict when checking date conflicts. If this option is selected, a "Conflict with existing Event! Change Date/Time" message is displayed to users when they attempt to add a conflicting event - OR - to disable.
+ - At Check for Location Conflict, to prevent the adding of events within the same date and time period. If this option is selected, a "Conflict with existing Event! Change Date/Time or Location" message is displayed to users when they attempt to add a conflicting event, as shown in the below image - OR - to enable events to be scheduled at the same time.
- - At Enable DNN Search, to enable site wide searches conducted using the Search modules and the Search skin token to search events - OR - to exclude events from DNN searches.
- - At Allow Subscriptions, to enable users to subscribe to receive notification of new events - OR - to disable.
- - At Owner Change Allowed, to enable moderators to change the event owner. Note: Administrators can always change the event owner - OR - to disable.
+ - At Enable DNN Search, to enable site wide searches conducted using the Search modules and the Search skin token to search events - OR - to exclude events from DNN searches.
+ - At Allow Subscriptions, to enable users to subscribe to receive notification of new events - OR - to disable.
+ - At Owner Change Allowed, to enable moderators to change the event owner. Note: Administrators can always change the event owner - OR - to disable.
- In the Delete Events Older Than text box, enter the number of Days to set expiration of old events. Leave this field blank for no expiration.
- In the Private Calendar Message text box, enter a message to be displayed to anonymous users instead of event title/details (as shown in the below image). Authenticated event editors can only see event title/details of their own events. Moderators/Administrators can see all event details.
@@ -32,7 +31,7 @@ Configuring Event General Settings
- - At Filter Events by Category, select All to display events from all categories in this module - OR - Select the category to only display events within that category.
+ - At Filter Events by Category, select All to display events from all categories in this module - OR - Select the category to only display events within that category.
- Click the Update Settings link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings.html
index 802be358639..ce312458949 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings
@@ -13,18 +12,18 @@ Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings
- At Theme/Skin, select a Standard Theme (also called skin) for this events module from the drop down list - OR - Select a Custom Theme. Note: To enable custom theme's, place stylesheet files into the Portals\[portalid]\DNNEvents\Themes folder. This enables the Custom Theme setting, allowing you to select your custom theme.
- At Default Module View, select either List, Month, Week as the default view for the module. This automatically checks the related check box on the next field, and disables if from being unchecked.
- At Module Views Allowed, select one or more of the following options:
-
- Month: to enable the month view.
- Week: to enable the week view.
- List: to enable the list view.
- - At Use Module Container & Skin, to use the module container and page skin for views that would normally default to the default site container and skin - OR - to enable users to switch between the different views.
+ - Month: to enable the month view.
- Week: to enable the week view.
- List: to enable the list view.
+ - At Use Module Container & Skin, to use the module container and page skin for views that would normally default to the default site container and skin - OR - to enable users to switch between the different views.
- At Enable Category Select, select from these option to control the Category selection drop down list for all forms:
- Do Not Display: Select to hide the Category Selection field all forms.
- Single Selection: Select to allow users to view events for a single category only.
- Multiple Selection: Select to allow users to view events for one or more categories. This is the default setting.
- - At Restrict Categories, to restricts the categories that can be displayed to those set in the Filter Events by Category setting. See the Filter Events by Category setting on "Configuring Event General Settings"
- - At Enable Date Navigation Controls, to enable the date navigation controls (links).
- - At Enable Event Image, to enable images to be displayed on events. If checked, the Image Settings section is displayed on the Edit Events page - OR - to disable images on events.
- - At Display TimeZone, to enable the TimeZone to be displayed on the Detail Event - OR - to hide the TimeZone.
+ - At Restrict Categories, to restricts the categories that can be displayed to those set in the Filter Events by Category setting. See the Filter Events by Category setting on "Configuring Event General Settings"
+ - At Enable Date Navigation Controls, to enable the date navigation controls (links).
+ - At Enable Event Image, to enable images to be displayed on events. If checked, the Image Settings section is displayed on the Edit Events page - OR - to disable images on events.
+ - At Display TimeZone, to enable the TimeZone to be displayed on the Detail Event - OR - to hide the TimeZone.
- At Icon Bar, select from these options:
- Select Top Right to display the icon bar above events.
- Select Bottom Center to display the icon bar below events.
- Select None to hide the icon bar.
- At HTML Email, select the format that emails will be sent as from these options:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring TimeZone Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring TimeZone Settings.html
index a95b26cd5e0..f91d8150be5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring TimeZone Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/General Settings/Configuring TimeZone Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring TimeZone Settings
@@ -11,7 +10,7 @@ Configuring TimeZone Settings
- Select the General tab.
- Expand the General Settings section.
- At Event Time Zone, select the default time zone to be used for all events.
- - At Display Time Zone, to display the time zone on the event detail page.
+ - At Display Time Zone, to display the time zone on the event detail page.
- Click the Update Settings link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring Event Reminder Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring Event Reminder Settings.html
index ecd8a1dde2f..42515a5021d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring Event Reminder Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring Event Reminder Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Event Reminder Settings
@@ -10,9 +9,9 @@ Configuring Event Reminder Settings
- Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the Notification tab.
- Expand the Reminder Settings section.
- - At Allow Event Reminder, to enable automated event reminders to be send to enrolled users - OR - to disable reminders.
- - At Reminder Anonymous, to enable anonymous users (i.e. unauthenticated users) to request event reminders - OR - to disable reminders.
- - At Send Reminder Default Value, to set the Send Reminder field on the Edit Event page as checked by default - OR - to set as unchecked by default.
+ - At Allow Event Reminder, to enable automated event reminders to be send to enrolled users - OR - to disable reminders.
+ - At Reminder Anonymous, to enable anonymous users (i.e. unauthenticated users) to request event reminders - OR - to disable reminders.
+ - At Send Reminder Default Value, to set the Send Reminder field on the Edit Event page as checked by default - OR - to set as unchecked by default.
- In the Remind Email From text box, enter the default email address to be displayed in the From field for reminders. This email address can be modified for each event on the Edit Event page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring the Event Email Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring the Event Email Settings.html
index 2f90b30ad41..fe3212a22a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring the Event Email Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Notification Settings/Configuring the Event Email Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring the Event Email Settings
@@ -12,14 +11,14 @@ Configuring the Event Email Settings
- Expand the Event Email Settings section.
- At Send New Event Emails, select if and to whom email messages are sent when a new event is added:
- Never: Select to disable email messages.
- Subscribers: Select to enable users to subscribe for notification through the check box in the icon bar.
- Role: Select and then choose the required role. Users within the selected role will receive email notification when a new event is created.
- - At Allow Email Send by Event Editor, to allow editors to send an event email to a role - OR - to disallow.
+ - At Allow Email Send by Event Editor, to allow editors to send an event email to a role - OR - to disallow.
- Click the Update Settings link.
-
+
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring Calendar Export Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring Calendar Export Settings.html
index d2e36a62422..d326dba9bdc 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring Calendar Export Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring Calendar Export Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Calendar Export Settings
@@ -10,18 +9,18 @@ Configuring Calendar Export Settings
- Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the RSS, iCal & Social tab.
- Expand the Calendar Export Settings section.
- - At Owner Email Address Export, to include the email address of the event owner when a user exports an event - OR - for no email.
- - At Owner Email For Unregistered User, to include the email address of the event owner when an unregistered user exports an event - OR - for no email.
- - At Show iCal icon on icon bar, to display the iCal icon in the Events module tool bar - OR - to hide the iCal icon.
- - At Enable Event .ics Emailing, to enable users to email the iCal file for an event to themselves - OR - disable emailing.
- - At Show URL in Location, to include the URL of the event location in the iCal Location attribute - OR - to disable.
- - At Include Calname in .ics, to include the calendar name (X-WR-CALNAME attribute) to be included in the generated .ics file. In MS Outlook this will cause events to open as a separate calendar - OR - to disable. In MS Outlook, events will be included in your usual calendar.
+ - At Owner Email Address Export, to include the email address of the event owner when a user exports an event - OR - for no email.
+ - At Owner Email For Unregistered User, to include the email address of the event owner when an unregistered user exports an event - OR - for no email.
+ - At Show iCal icon on icon bar, to display the iCal icon in the Events module tool bar - OR - to hide the iCal icon.
+ - At Enable Event .ics Emailing, to enable users to email the iCal file for an event to themselves - OR - disable emailing.
+ - At Show URL in Location, to include the URL of the event location in the iCal Location attribute - OR - to disable.
+ - At Include Calname in .ics, to include the calendar name (X-WR-CALNAME attribute) to be included in the generated .ics file. In MS Outlook this will cause events to open as a separate calendar - OR - to disable. In MS Outlook, events will be included in your usual calendar.
- In the Days Before text box, enter the number of days before the current date to be included in the iCal. The default setting is 365 days.
- In the Days After text box, enter the number of days after the current date to be included in the iCal. The default setting is 365 days.
- In the URL To Append text box, enter the string to append to end of URL attribute generated in the iCal file. Useful if you use the iCal as a feed to another site, and want to be able to use Google Analytics parameters.
- - At Enable Default Image, to set a default image included in the ATTACH attribute of the iCal file. A URL to the image is placed in the ATTACH attribute - OR - for no image. See
+ - At Enable Default Image, to set a default image included in the ATTACH attribute of the iCal file. A URL to the image is placed in the ATTACH attribute - OR - for no image. See
- In the iCal URL text box,
- - Click the Update Settings link.
+ - Click the Update Settings button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring RSS Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring RSS Settings.html
index b90f06c870f..ad3a5efaff4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring RSS Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/RSS, iCal & Social Setting/Configuring RSS Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring RSS Settings
@@ -11,8 +10,8 @@ Configuring RSS Settings
- Select the RSS, iCal & Social tab.
- Expand the RSS Settings section.
- At Enable RSS, select from these options:
-
- to enable RSS.
-
- At Date To Use, select which date to use as the Publish Date in the RSS feed.
- In the Days To Include text box, enter the number of Days to include in the RSS from today.
- In the Feed Title text box, edit the title to be displayed in the RSS feed if desired.
- In the Feed Description text box, edit the title to be displayed in the RSS feed if desired.
- to disable RSS.
+ - Mark the check box to enable RSS.
+
- At Date To Use, select which date to use as the Publish Date in the RSS feed.
- In the Days To Include text box, enter the number of Days to include in the RSS from today.
- In the Feed Title text box, edit the title to be displayed in the RSS feed if desired.
- In the Feed Description text box, edit the title to be displayed in the RSS feed if desired.
- Unmark the check box to disable RSS.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/SEO and Sitemap Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/SEO and Sitemap Settings.html
index 05cc4641faf..f5c42adf563 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/SEO and Sitemap Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/SEO and Sitemap Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
SEO and Sitemap Settings
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ SEO and Sitemap Settings
- Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Expand the SEO & Sitemap Settings section.
- - At Enable SEO, to enable SEO. Page Title and Description are set using the relevant templates in the Template Settings. If the original content of Title or Description is required, then include this using {0}.
+
- At Enable SEO, to enable SEO. Page Title and Description are set using the relevant templates in the Template Settings. If the original content of Title or Description is required, then include this using {0}.
- In the Description Length text box, enter the maximum characters for the description.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Setting Unique Event Permissions.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Setting Unique Event Permissions.html
index 2dd2b4e9ea5..d14e9a00635 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Setting Unique Event Permissions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Setting Unique Event Permissions.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting Event Permissions
How to assign role members and users as Event Moderators, Global Category Editors (users who can manage categories) or/and Global Location Editors (users who can manage locations) on the Events module. These permissions are in addition to the usual module permissions.
-
-
+
- Select the Permissions tab.
- At Permissions, set these unique Event module permissions:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Sub-Calendar Settings/Configuring the SubCalendar Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Sub-Calendar Settings/Configuring the SubCalendar Settings.html
index 4395988745b..7e152cf96d8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Sub-Calendar Settings/Configuring the SubCalendar Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Events/Settings/Sub-Calendar Settings/Configuring the SubCalendar Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring the SubCalendar Settings
@@ -10,9 +9,9 @@ Configuring the SubCalendar Settings
- Select Edit > Edit Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Edit Settings button (only visible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.
- Select the SubCalendars Settings tab.
- At Include Other Site Event Modules?, select from these options:
-
- to include events from other Events modules on this Events module
-
- At Add Sub-Calendar Name, to include the name of the other Events modules (SubCalendars) in the title of an event when it displays in this Events module - OR - to hide the name of other Events modules in the title of events.
- At Enforce Permissions, to set the View permissions applied to the SubCalendar to be observed in the master calendar - OR - to disable.
- At Add/Remove Sub-Calendars, in the Available list, select one or more of the other event modules to be included in this module.
-
- To Add a Calendar, click on the name of the calendar in the Available box and then click the Add > link.
- To Add all Calendars, click the Add All >> link.
- To Remove a Calendar, click on the calendar name in the Selected box and then click the Remove < link.
- To Remove all Calendars, click the Remove All << link.
- to only display events added using this Events module.
+ - Mark the check box to include events from other Events modules on this Events module
+
- At Add Sub-Calendar Name, to include the name of the other Events modules (SubCalendars) in the title of an event when it displays in this Events module - OR - to hide the name of other Events modules in the title of events.
- At Enforce Permissions, to set the View permissions applied to the SubCalendar to be observed in the master calendar - OR - to disable.
- At Add/Remove Sub-Calendars, in the Available list, select one or more of the other event modules to be included in this module.
+
- To Add a Calendar, click on the name of the calendar in the Available box and then click the Add > link.
- To Add all Calendars, click the Add All >> link.
- To Remove a Calendar, click on the calendar name in the Selected box and then click the Remove < link.
- To Remove all Calendars, click the Remove All << link.
- Unmark the check box to only display events added using this Events module.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/About the FAQs Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/About the FAQs Module.htm
index 244a57aff1b..4279c347065 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/About the FAQs Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/About the FAQs Module.htm
@@ -1,13 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the FAQs Module
The FAQs module enables authorized users to manage a list of questions and corresponding answers. The question is displayed as a link, requiring the user to click on a question to view the corresponding answer. FAQ's can be assigned to categories and authorized users can set the default sorting order. The layout is managed using editing templates allowing you to choose the fields to be displayed on the module (question, answer, first and last name of the user who last updated the question, number of times viewed, category name, category description, date created, date modified and the question number).
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 05.01.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 06.01.00
Features: IPortable, ISearchable
@@ -15,10 +13,11 @@
About the FAQs Module
The FAQs Modules
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Editing the FAQ Templates.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Editing the FAQ Templates.html
index df71723749d..420ad40b4af 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Editing the FAQ Templates.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Editing the FAQ Templates.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Editing the FAQ Templates
How to edit the templates which control the layout of FAQ's in the FAQs module. A template is provided for the answer, the question, as well as a loading template to be display while AJAX is loading the question. Nine different tokens can be added to these templates to display information such as the related category, the date the FAQ was created, number of times an item has been viewed, etc. A full list of tokens is listed below this topic and on the Settings page.
-
+
-
-
+
- Select the FAQs Module Settings tab.
- At Question Template, edit the default template for the question.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Managing Category Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Managing Category Settings.html
index 679fd0df510..aeb178910e8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Managing Category Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Managing Category Settings.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -7,13 +7,13 @@ Managing Category Settings
How to optionally display categories on the FAQs module and choose the way categories are displayed.
-
-
+
- Select the FAQs Module Settings tab.
- At Show Question Categories, select from these options:
-
- to display categories on the module. This will reveal these additional fields:
-
- Optional. At Show Tooltips, check the check box to display the category description as a tooltip when a user hovers their mouse over the category name.
- At Show Categories As, select the layout for categories. See examples below.
- - Optional. At Show Empty Categories, check the check box to display categories that have been created but don't have any FAQs.
+ - Mark the check box to display categories on the module. This will reveal these additional fields:
+
- Optional. At Show Tooltips, to display the category description as a tooltip when a user hovers their mouse over the category name.
- At Show Categories As, select the layout for categories. See examples below.
- Unmark the check box to hide.
+ - Optional. At Show Empty Categories, to display categories that have been created but don't have any FAQs.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Setting the Default Sorting Order of FAQs.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Setting the Default Sorting Order of FAQs.html
index 35b1b3a87ab..9df3e5deab1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Setting the Default Sorting Order of FAQs.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/FAQs/Settings/Setting the Default Sorting Order of FAQs.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -7,12 +7,12 @@ Setting the Default Sorting Order of FAQ's
How to set the default sort order for FAQ's in the FAQs module.
-
-
+
- Select the FAQs Module Settings tab.
- At Default Sorting, select from the following sorting options:
- Predefined Order: Select to sort FAQ's according to the order predefined by an Administrator or Page Editor. These users can set the order of FAQs using up and down arrows that are visible in edit mode.
- Modified Date (newest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were last modified from newest to oldest.
- Modified Date (oldest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were last modified from oldest to newest.
- Popularity (highest first): Sorts FAQ's from the most popular to least popular. Popularity is rated by the number of times the FAQ has been clicked.
- Popularity (lowest first): Sorts FAQ's from the least popular to the most popular. Popularity is rated by the number of times the FAQ has been clicked.
- Creation Date (newest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were first created from newest to oldest.
- Creation Date (oldest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were first created from oldest to newest.
- - At User Can Sort, to display the "Select Sort Order" field that allows users to change the default sort order - OR - to disable.
+ - At User Can Sort, to display the "Select Sort Order" field that allows users to change the default sort order - OR - to disable.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/About the Feedback Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/About the Feedback Module.htm
index b9ee355a7e8..fb4ca887956 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/About the Feedback Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/About the Feedback Module.htm
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Feedback Module
The Feedback module allows users to send messages to the site Administrator. The Feedback Comments module is a companion module that is added to the page whenever the Feedback module is added to a page. See "About the Feedback Comments Module"
- Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 06.02.01 / Minimum DNN Version: 06.02.00
Features: ISearchable
Optional Settings:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/All Users/Sending Feedback.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/All Users/Sending Feedback.html
index f0776c4e83f..aa6a656cde4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/All Users/Sending Feedback.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/All Users/Sending Feedback.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Sending Feedback
- Go to the Your Feedback section.
- The following optional fields may also be available:
- At Subject, enter or select the subject of your message.
- At Category, select a category from the drop down list.
- In the Message text box, enter your message.
- - The following optional fields may also be available:
- At Send Copy To Yourself?, select from the following options:
- x to have a copy of the message emailed to you.
- if you do not wish to receive a copy of your message.
- In the Security Code text box, enter the code displayed on the picture above. Note: If the image is difficult to read, click the Refresh button to be presented with an alternative image.
+ - The following optional fields may also be available:
- At Send Copy To Yourself?, select from the following options:
- Mark the check box x to have a copy of the message emailed to you.
- Unmark the check box if you do not wish to receive a copy of your message.
- In the Security Code text box, enter the code displayed on the picture above. Note: If the image is difficult to read, click the Refresh button to be presented with an alternative image.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Configuring Comments View Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Configuring Comments View Settings.html
index 85aaeab3ffd..a1d1f4bbc71 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Configuring Comments View Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Configuring Comments View Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Comments View Settings
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Configuring Comments View Settings
- Go to the Feedback Comments module.
-
-
+
- Select the Comments View Settings tab.
- In the Header Template text box, edit the template as required. This template specifies what is displayed at the top of the comments.
@@ -23,7 +22,7 @@ Configuring Comments View Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Tip: You can reset any of the default templates by clicking the Load Default button to the right of each template field.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying Feedback for all Categories.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying Feedback for all Categories.html
index f3c50e8ee3a..b400a104717 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying Feedback for all Categories.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying Feedback for all Categories.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Displaying Feedback for all Categories
- Go to the Comment View Settings section.
- At Category, select the None Selected.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Email.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Email.html
index e97983deb01..f475856e04f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Email.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Email.html
@@ -1,24 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Displaying/Hiding Feedback Email
-
-
-
How to hide or display a person’s email address on feedback comments that are published on the Feedback Comments module.
- -
-
Go to the Feedback Comments module.
+ - Go to the Feedback Comments module.
+ -
+
- - Select Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Settings button.
- Go to the Comment View Settings section.
- - At Hide Email, to hide names - OR - to display names.
-
-
- - Click the Update link.
+ - At Hide Email, to hide names - OR - to display names.
+ -
+
+
@@ -27,9 +23,5 @@
Displaying/Hiding Feedback Email
Email Addresses are Hidden on this Feedback Comments Module
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Name.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Name.html
index e44feba7a7c..7cf23b8c124 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Name.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Name.html
@@ -1,18 +1,14 @@
-
+
-
Displaying/Hiding Feedback Name
-
-
-
How to hide or display a person’s name on feedback comments that are published on the Feedback Comments module.
- Select Settings from the Feedback Comments module actions menu.
- Go to the Comment View Settings section.
- - At Hide Name, to hide names - OR - to display names.
+ - At Hide Name, to hide names - OR - to display names.
- Click the Update link.
@@ -24,9 +20,5 @@ Displaying/Hiding Feedback Name
Names are hidden on this Feedback Comments module
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Subject.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Subject.html
index a80b102a264..4f061588c89 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Subject.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Displaying-Hiding Feedback Subject.html
@@ -1,33 +1,27 @@
-
+
-
Displaying/Hiding Feedback Subject
-
-
-
- How to hide or display the subject list value beside feedback comments that are published on the Feedback Comments module.
+ How to hide or display the subject list value beside feedback comments that are published on the Feedback Comments module.
- Go to the Feedback Comments module.
- - Select Settings from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Settings button.
- - Go to the Comment View Settings section.
- - At Hide Subject, to hide names - OR - to display names.
-
-
- - Click the Update link.
+ -
+
+
+ - Go to the Comment View Settings section.
+ - At Hide Subject, to hide names - OR - to display names.
+ -
+
+
-
The Feedback Subject List Value is Hidden on this Feedback Comments Module
+
The Feedback Subject List Value is Hidden on this Feedback Comments Module
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Setting Categories to be Displayed.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Setting Categories to be Displayed.html
index 167c7d7d6fb..bac32d3319f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Setting Categories to be Displayed.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Feedback Comments/Settings/Setting Categories to be Displayed.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Setting Visible Categories
@@ -10,13 +9,13 @@ Setting Visible Categories
- Go to the Feedback Comments module.
-
-
+
- Go to the Comment View Settings section.
- - At Scope, select from these options:
- Selected Modules Only: Select to view a list of all Feedback modules you want to display feedback from.
- beside each module to be included.
- Portal (from all Feedback Modules): Select the categories that display feedback from all modules.
+ - At Scope, select from these options:
- Selected Modules Only: Select to view a list of all Feedback modules you want to display feedback from.
- Mark the check box beside each module to be included.
- Portal (from all Feedback Modules): Select the categories that display feedback from all modules.
- At Category, select each categories that feedback will be displayed from.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Categories.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Categories.html
index 7be714f572e..9d97983f98e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Categories.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Categories.html
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Activating/Deactivating Feedback Categories
How to activate or deactivate a category on the Feedback module. Active categories are listed on the Settings page, whereas deactivated categories are not listed on the settings page and are only visible to Administrators on the Feedback Lists page.
- - Select Edit > Edit Category/Subject Lists from the module actions menu. This opens the Edit Lists page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Category/Subject Lists from the module actions menu. This opens the Edit Lists page.
- At List Type, select Categories.
- - Click the Edit button beside the category to be activated or deactivated.
- - At Is Active, to activate the category - OR - to deactivate it.
- - At Is Portal Wide, if this category is available to all Feedback modules across this site. Note: This setting can only be checked using the module used to create the category - OR - if this category is currently inactive. Note: This setting cannot be unchecked if the category is in use on another module.
+ - Click the Edit button beside the category to be activated or deactivated.
+ - At Is Active, to activate the category - OR - to deactivate it.
+ - At Is Portal Wide, if this category is available to all Feedback modules across this site. Note: This setting can only be checked using the module used to create the category - OR - if this category is currently inactive. Note: This setting cannot be unchecked if the category is in use on another module.
- Click the Save link.
-
+
- Repeat Steps 3-6 to modify additional categories.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Subjects.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Subjects.html
index 0710f364656..e286b1bff4d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Subjects.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Activating-Deactivating Feedback Subjects.html
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Activating/Deactivating Feedback Subjects
Feedback subjects can be set as active or inactive. Active subjects are listed on the Settings page, whereas deactivated subjects are not listed on the settings page and are only visible to Administrators on the Feedback Lists page.
- - Select Edit > Edit Category/Subject Lists from the module actions menu. This opens the Edit Lists page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Category/Subject Lists from the module actions menu. This opens the Edit Lists page.
- At List Type, select Subjects.
- - Click the Edit button beside the subject to be activated or deactivated.
- - At Is Active, to activate the subject - OR - to deactivate the subject.
- - At Is Portal Wide, if this subject is available to all Feedback modules across this site. Note: This setting can only be checked using the module used to create the subject - OR - if this subject is currently inactive. Note: This setting cannot be unchecked if the subject is in use on another module.
+ - Click the Edit button beside the subject to be activated or deactivated.
+ - At Is Active, to activate the subject - OR - to deactivate the subject.
+ - At Is Portal Wide, if this subject is available to all Feedback modules across this site. Note: This setting can only be checked using the module used to create the subject - OR - if this subject is currently inactive. Note: This setting cannot be unchecked if the subject is in use on another module.
- Click the Save link.
-
+
- Repeat Steps 3-6 to activate or deactivate additional subjects.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values.html
index 84671e80914..d9d12f09bf4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values.html
@@ -1,32 +1,24 @@
-
+
-
Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values
-
-
-
- How to add feedback categories that are associated with one or more email addresses using the Feedback module. This sends a notification message to those email addresses whenever feedback is submitted to that category.
+ How to add feedback categories that are associated with one or more email addresses using the Feedback module. This sends a notification message to those email addresses whenever feedback is submitted to that category.
- Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu.
- At List Type, select Categories.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this category. E.g. Marketing
- - In the Value text box, enter one or more email values for this category separated by a semi-colon (;). E.g. salesmanager@domain.com;sales@domain.com. This value will be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback within this category.
- - At Is Active, if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
+ - In the Value text box, enter one or more email values for this category separated by a semi-colon (;). E.g. salesmanager@domain.com;sales@domain.com. This value will be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback within this category.
+ - At Is Active, if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
- Click the Save link. The category is now displayed to the left.
-
+
- Repeat Steps 3-6 to add additional categories.
- Click the Return to Module link to return to the module.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories.html
index b7767cac280..c75ca056f5c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Categories.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Adding Feedback Categories
@@ -14,8 +13,8 @@ Adding Feedback Categories
- At List Type, select Categories.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this category. E.g. Marketing
- In the Value text box, enter a value for this category (E.g. Marketing) to be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback within this category - OR - Enter one or more email addresses separated by a semi-colon (;) (E.g. sales@domain.com;admin@domain.com) that will be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback within this category.
- - At Is Active, if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
- - At Is Portal Wide, if this category is available to all Feedback modules across this site - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
+ - At Is Active, if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
+ - At Is Portal Wide, if this category is available to all Feedback modules across this site - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
- Click the Save button. The category is now displayed to the left.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Subjects.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Subjects.html
index 93137626019..40493ba046e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Subjects.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Manage Feedback Lists/Adding Feedback Subjects.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Adding Feedback Subjects
How to add subjects to a Feedback module. Once you have created subjects they can either be associated with one or more instances of a Feedback module, or users can be enabled to select a subject from a list when sending their feedback.
- - Select Edit > Edit Category/Subject Lists from the module actions menu. This opens the Edit Lists page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Category/Subject Lists from the module actions menu. This opens the Edit Lists page.
- At List Type, select Subjects.
- In the Name text box, enter the subject name. E.g. Feedback
- In the Value text box, enter a value for this subject. E.g. Feedback. This value can optionally be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback associated with this subject.
- - At Is Active, if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
- - At Is Portal Wide, if this subject can be viewed and selected using all Feedback modules across this site - OR - if this subject is only displayed on this module.
+ - At Is Active, if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module - OR - if this category is currently inactive.
+ - At Is Portal Wide, if this subject can be viewed and selected using all Feedback modules across this site - OR - if this subject is only displayed on this module.
- Click the Save button. The saved subject will be displayed to the left.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Moderate Feedback Posts/Reclassifying Moderated Feedback.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Moderate Feedback Posts/Reclassifying Moderated Feedback.html
index 1b48c6364db..b527e598b24 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Moderate Feedback Posts/Reclassifying Moderated Feedback.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Moderate Feedback Posts/Reclassifying Moderated Feedback.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -7,8 +7,7 @@ Reclassifying Moderated Feedback
How to reclassify feedback submitted using the Feedback module. This enables you to set any feedback comments that have already been moderated as visible or not visible in the Feedback Comments module.
- Select Feedback Moderation from the Feedback module actions menu.
- - Optional.
- at Show feedback only in unmoderated categories to limit feedback displayed to unmoderated categories only. This is useful if you wish to check the integrity of unmoderated categories.
+ - Optional. Mark the Show feedback only in unmoderated categories check box to limit feedback displayed to unmoderated categories only. This is useful if you wish to check the integrity of unmoderated categories.
- Locate the feedback post to be reclassified and click one of these links:
- Click the Publish link to publish the feedback on the Feedback Comments module.
- Click the Set Private link to set feedback as private. Private feedback is not published on the Feedback Comments module and is only viewable in the Private Feedback section of this page.
- Click the Archive link to archive feedback. Archived feedback is not published on the Feedback Comments module and is only viewable in the Archived Feedback section of this page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Cleanup Settings.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Cleanup Settings.htm
index f084a460217..8ae666e1260 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Cleanup Settings.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Cleanup Settings.htm
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -7,12 +7,12 @@ Configuring Cleanup Settings
How to automate the clean up of old comments from the Feedback Comments module.
-
-
+
- Select the Feedback Settings tab.
- - At Pending , to clean up pending feedback, or to take no action for pending comments.
- - At Private, to clean up private feedback, or to take no action for private comments.
- - At Archived, to clean up archived feedback, or to take no action for archived comments.
+ - At Pending , to clean up pending feedback, or to take no action for pending comments.
+ - At Private, to clean up private feedback, or to take no action for private comments.
+ - At Archived, to clean up archived feedback, or to take no action for archived comments.
- In the Days Before text box, enter the number of days history comments to be stored for before clean up. The default is 365 days
- In the Max Feedback text box, enter the maximum number comments to be stored for each feedback group (e.g. pending, private published and archived) before clean up. The default is 1000 days.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Email Addresses and Options Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Email Addresses and Options Settings.html
index b5993abc144..ce48964e727 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Email Addresses and Options Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Email Addresses and Options Settings.html
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-
-
+
Configuring Email Addresses and Options Settings
How to configure the optional email addresses and user roles who will receive feedback, as well as other email options using the Feedback module.
-
-
+
- Select the Feedback Settings tab.
- Go to the Email Addresses and Options Settings section.
- In the Send To text box, enter the email address of the recipient of feedback sent from this module.
- - At Send To User Roles, beside each security roles whose users are to be recipients of the feedback.
+ - At Send To User Roles, beside each security roles whose users are to be recipients of the feedback.
- In the Send From text box, enter the email address to be used as the default From email address. The email address set at this field overrides the one entered by the user in the Email field on the feedback form. This value is not displayed to users. This setting is useful if you find feedback is being blocked by Spam filters.
- - At Send Copy, to send a copy of the message to the sender - OR - to disable this feature. If this option is unchecked, skip to Step 9.
- - At Can Opt Out, to display the Send Copy? check box on the Feedback module that enables users to opt out of receiving a copy of their message by email - OR - to remove the opt out option and automatically send a copy to the sender.
- - At Send Email Asynchronously, select from these options:
- to send email asynchronously. Emails are sent as a background task. This can be useful it feedback is emailed to a large number of recipients.
- to send emails immediately.
+ - At Send Copy, to send a copy of the message to the sender - OR - to disable this feature. If this option is unchecked, skip to Step 9.
+ - At Can Opt Out, to display the Send Copy? check box on the Feedback module that enables users to opt out of receiving a copy of their message by email - OR - to remove the opt out option and automatically send a copy to the sender.
+ - At Send Email Asynchronously, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to send email asynchronously. Emails are sent as a background task. This can be useful it feedback is emailed to a large number of recipients.
- Unmark the check box to send emails immediately.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Feedback Category Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Feedback Category Settings.html
index cdacf97dc9f..73f9752962e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Feedback Category Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Feedback Category Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Feedback Category Settings
@@ -9,14 +8,14 @@ Configuring Feedback Category Settings
Tip: One or more categories must be created prior to configuring these settings. See "Adding Feedback Categories"
-
-
+
- Select the Feedback Settings tab.
- Expand the Feedback Category Settings section.
- At Category, select the category associated with this module. This displays the selected category name on the module.
- - At Category List Visible, to enable users to select an alternative category - OR - to disable category selection.
- - At Category Required, if it is mandatory to select a category to submit feedback - OR - if selecting a category is optional.
- - At Use Category Value as Send To, to use the category value as the email address of the recipient of this message. Where no email address exists in the category value, then the "Send To" value is used - OR - to disable.
+ - At Category List Visible, to enable users to select an alternative category - OR - to disable category selection.
+ - At Category Required, if it is mandatory to select a category to submit feedback - OR - if selecting a category is optional.
+ - At Use Category Value as Send To, to use the category value as the email address of the recipient of this message. Where no email address exists in the category value, then the "Send To" value is used - OR - to disable.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Form and Fields Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Form and Fields Settings.html
index dd509192d48..d01c6c006b3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Form and Fields Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Form and Fields Settings.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Form and Fields Settings
How to configure the form and field settings for the Feedback module. Tip: You can reset default value for any of the validation fields by clicking the Reset Default button.
-
-
+
- Select the Feedback Settings tab.
- - Maximize the Form and Fields Settings section.
- - At Field Label Position, select the position of field names on the form from these options
- Same Line As Field
- Above Field: This option is useful when the Feedback module is located in a narrow pane on the page.
+ - Maximize the Form and Fields Settings section.
+ - At Field Label Position, select the position of field names on the form from these options
- Same Line As Field
- Above Field: This option is useful when the Feedback module is located in a narrow pane on the page.
- In the Form Width text box, enter a value to set the width of the message window. The default setting is 100%. Note: You can enter either a pixel value (E.g. 100) or you can set a percentage value by including the percentage sign (E.g. 100%).
- At Subject, select the subject to be associated with feedback sent from this module - OR - Select None Selected if you don't want to associate this module with a subject. Select one of the following options:
- At Subject Field Type, select from these options:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings.html
index 5b4a4ce5a1c..fa6e489b868 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings.html
@@ -1,19 +1,18 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings
How to configure the moderation and feedback management settings of the Feedback module.
-
-
+
- Select the Feedback Settings tab.
- Expand the Moderation and Feedback Management Settings section.
- - At Scope, select the scope of moderation from these options:
- Instance (for this Feedback module only): Feedback moderators can only view and manage feedback associated with this instance of the Feedback module.
- Portal (across all Feedback modules of portal): Feedback moderators can view and manage feedback for all instances of the Feedback module on this site. This option should be used with caution.
- - At Moderated, select from these options:
- to enable moderation. This displays Moderation Categories List for this module with all categories pre-selected.
- At Send Emails to Admins, to send moderation emails to Administrators - OR - if Administrators don't need to receive moderation emails.
- Optional. At Moderation Categories, beside any category that will not be moderated. If no categories are selected, then all categories are moderated.
- At Unmoderated Category Status, select the status for unmoderated posts when not all categories are moderated. The available options are: Archived, Pending, Private, Published, or Deleted.
+ - At Scope, select the scope of moderation from these options:
- Instance (for this Feedback module only): Feedback moderators can only view and manage feedback associated with this instance of the Feedback module.
- Portal (across all Feedback modules of portal): Feedback moderators can view and manage feedback for all instances of the Feedback module on this site. This option should be used with caution.
+ - At Moderated, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to enable moderation. This displays Moderation Categories List for this module with all categories pre-selected.
- At Send Emails to Admins, to send moderation emails to Administrators - OR - if Administrators don't need to receive moderation emails.
- Optional. At Moderation Categories, beside any category that will not be moderated. If no categories are selected, then all categories are moderated.
- At Unmoderated Category Status, select the status for unmoderated posts when not all categories are moderated. The available options are: Archived, Pending, Private, Published, or Deleted.
- Unmark the check box to disable moderation.
- In the Print Template text box, view and/or edit the HTML template used for printing a single feedback item from the moderation/management control. You may use the same field value tokens as those available in the guest book settings. For example, the token [Feedback:Subject] will be replaced with the feedback Subject field value. Note: You can reset the default template by clicking the Reset Default button.
- At Print Action, select to display print results either In-Line (Existing Page) or in a Popup (New Window). This setting relates to the Print button which can be selected when moderating feedback.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Submission and Security Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Submission and Security Settings.html
index ae1de9b1f71..edd8fbe0d81 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Submission and Security Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Configuring Submission and Security Settings.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Submission and Security Settings
How to submission settings and optionally enable CAPTCHA security on the Feedback module. CAPTCHA is disabled by default.
-
-
+
- Select the Feedback Settings tab.
- Expand the Submission and Security Settings section.
@@ -27,6 +26,7 @@ Configuring Submission and Security Settings
-
CAPTCHA enabled on the Feedback Mode
+
CAPTCHA enabled on the Feedback Mode
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Setting Feedback Permissions.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Setting Feedback Permissions.html
index c642cb19638..23909d89ea0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Setting Feedback Permissions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Feedback/Settings/Setting Feedback Permissions.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Setting Feedback Permissions
How to set the roles and users who are able to manage subject and category lists, and or moderate post for the Feedback module.
-
-
+
- Select the Permissions tab.
- - In the Moderate Feedback Posts column, set the check boxes in this column to Grant or Deny a role/user permission to moderate feedback.
- - In the Manage Feedback Lists column, set the check boxes in this column to Grant or Deny a role/user permission to moderate feedback lists. I.e. Subjects and categories
+ - In the Moderate Feedback Posts column, set the check boxes in this column to Grant or Deny a role/user permission to moderate feedback.
+ - In the Manage Feedback Lists column, set the check boxes in this column to Grant or Deny a role/user permission to moderate feedback lists. I.e. Subjects and categories
@@ -21,7 +20,7 @@
Setting Feedback Permissions
- Click the Update link.
-
+
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/About the Form and List Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/About the Form and List Module.htm
index 9c76ddda859..6405b1180aa 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/About the Form and List Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/About the Form and List Module.htm
@@ -1,13 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Form and List Module
The Form and List module enables the creation of a simple list of repetitive data or a form that can be populated with data and submitted. The module can also display a form with results displayed in a list on the same page. Data types are: Text, Rich Text (HTML), Integer, Decimal, Date and Time, Date, Look-Up, Time, True/False, Email, Currency, URL, Image, Download, Calculated Column, and User Profile Link. List columns can be set as required (must be completed to save the row), as visible to all users or visible to Administrators only, and as searchable.
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 06.00.04 / Minimum DNN Version: 06.01.00
Features: IPortable, ISearchable
@@ -19,11 +17,11 @@
About the Form and List Module
The Form & List Module configured to display as a List
-
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Calculated Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Calculated Column Options.html
index 6479a232c63..7558d4bd637 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Calculated Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Calculated Column Options.html
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Advanced Calculated Column Options
How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for calculated columns for a form or list in the Form and List module. This topic assumes you are currently adding or editing a calculated column. See "Creating a List", "Creating a Form" or "Editing List or Form Columns"
- Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields:
- - At Data Type select the result type from one of the following options:
- Date and Time
- Decimal
- Integer
- Text (This is the default setting)
- True/False
+ - At Data Type select the result type from one of the following options: Date and Time, Decimal, Integer, Text (This is the default setting), or True/False
- In the Output Format text box, enter an output format string suitable for this data type. E.g. "###.###".
- In the Expression text box, enter an expression formula (appropriate for the data type) which will be evaluated at runtime. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- - At Show on Edit Form?, to display to all users when editing - OR - disable.
+ - At Show on Edit Form?, to display to all users when editing - OR - disable.
@@ -25,7 +24,6 @@
Advanced Calculated Column Options
The Calculated Column Displayed in a List
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Date and Time Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Date and Time Column Options.html
index 9722ea3e54e..e8fd844081c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Date and Time Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Date and Time Column Options.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Advanced Date and Time Column Options
- Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields:
- In the Output Format text box, enter the format to set how the column data will be displayed in the table - OR - Leave blank to use default format. The following options are available:
- f: Enter to display long date and short time. E.g. Thursday, February 21, 2011 8:00 AM
- F: Enter to display long date and long time. E.g. Thursday, February 21, 2011 8:00:00 AM
- g: Enter to display short date and short time. E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00 AM
- G: Enter to display short date and long time. E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00:00 AM
- Y: Enter to display year and month. E.g. February, 2011
- - At Convert TimeZone?, select one of the following options:
- to display date/time according to the users' time zone as set in their user profile.
- to use default site time zone.
+ - At Convert TimeZone?, select one of the following options:
- Mark the check box to display date/time according to the users' time zone as set in their user profile.
- Unmark the check box to use default site time zone.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default value for this field. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field, however it can be changed.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Download Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Download Column Options.html
index 805adf4568b..946138329a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Download Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Download Column Options.html
@@ -1,24 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Advanced Download Column Options
- How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for download columns for a form or list in the Form and List module. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a date column. See "Creating a List", "Creating a Form" or "Editing List or Form Columns"
- Error: An error occurs when a List Of Values is entered for download columns. It is recommended that Advanced Options are not used.
+ How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for download columns for a form or list in the Form and List module. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a date column. See "Creating a List", "Creating a Form" or "Editing List or Form Columns". Important. An error occurs when a List Of Values is entered for download columns. It is recommended that Advanced Options are not used.
- Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields:
- - At List of Values set the following:
- In the List of Values text box, enter a list of URL's separated by a semi-colon ( ; ). E.g. http://www.ecozany.com/toys.pdf;http://www.ecozany.com/dolls.pdf - OR - Leave this field blank to display the Link Control to enable users to select a file (and uploaded if permissions allow) from the site's Digital Asset Management module (Admin > File Management).
- Select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
+ - At List of Values set the following:
- In the List of Values text box, enter a list of URL's separated by a semi-colon ( ; ). E.g. http://www.ecozany.com/toys.pdf;http://www.ecozany.com/dolls.pdf - OR - Leave this field blank to display the Link Control to enable users to select a file (and uploaded if permissions allow) from the site's Digital Asset Management module (Admin > File Management).
- Select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Link Caption text box, enter the text that you want to display instead of the Download URL in the table. E.g. Download this brochure. This text will display and be a link to the download.
- - At Abbreviated URL, select from these options:
- to display only the file or page name. E.g. http://www.domain.com/brochures/toys.pdf would then display as toys.pdf.
- if to display the complete URL. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field.
-
-
+ - At Abbreviated URL, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display only the file or page name. E.g. http://www.domain.com/brochures/toys.pdf would then display as toys.pdf.
- Unmark the check box if to display the complete URL. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default value for this field. When creating a new record this value will automatically be selected or entered.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column.
-
+
Setting the Advanced Options for a Download column
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Email Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Email Column Options.html
index 0ca876911d9..222aef40156 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Email Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Email Column Options.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Advanced Email Column Options
- At List of Values set the following:
- In the List of Values text box, enter one or more values for this field separated by a semi-colon ( ; ). E.g. admin@domain.com;sales@domain.com;marketing@domain.com - OR - Leave this field blank to display a text box into which any email address can be entered.
- Select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Link Caption text box, enter the text that you want to display instead of the email address in the Table. E.g. Contact this person. This text displays as a mailto link.
- - At Disable Hyperlink?, to disable the mailto hyperlink and display the email address as static text - OR - to enable the mailto hyperlink. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field and the hyperlink will be enabled.
+ - At Disable Hyperlink?, to disable the mailto hyperlink and display the email address as static text - OR - to enable the mailto hyperlink. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field and the hyperlink will be enabled.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default value for this field. This email is pre-selected/entered when a new record is created.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Image Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Image Column Options.html
index fdae267abc6..06de92c0ea1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Image Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Image Column Options.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Advanced Image Column Options
@@ -12,12 +11,12 @@ Advanced Image Column Options
- In the List of Values text box, enter a list of image URL's separated by a semi-colon ( ; ). E.g. http://www.domain.com/massage.gif;http://www.domain.com/acupuncture.gif - OR - Leave this field blank to display the Link Control that will enable the user to select an image from a folder of the site's Digital Asset Management module (Admin > File Management).
- Select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the ALT Tag text box, enter the text that displays when the user places their mouse over this text.
- - At Hyperlink, to display a thumbnail of the image. The user can then click on the thumbnail to view the full sized image - OR - to display the full sized image in the table.
+ - At Hyperlink, to display a thumbnail of the image. The user can then click on the thumbnail to view the full sized image - OR - to display the full sized image in the table.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default value for this field. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column.
-
+
- See (linked document is not in XML format)
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Look-Up Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Look-Up Column Options.html
index 4924d617515..c5450166aa5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Look-Up Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Look-Up Column Options.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Advanced Look-Up Column Options
@@ -10,11 +9,11 @@ Advanced Look-Up Column Options
- Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields:
- At Source Column, enter the name of the column containing a ref to a user or local file.
- In the Token Value text box, enter the token text to query the User or File object.
- - At Show on Edit Form?, if this value will be displayed to all users when editing - OR - Un to hide the field on the Edit Form.
+ - At Show on Edit Form?, if this value will be displayed to all users when editing - OR - to hide the field on the Edit Form.
Tip: In the below example, the Look-Up column is set to display the size of the file selected in the Brochure column.
-
+
Setting the Advanced Options for a Look-Up column
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Rich Text Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Rich Text Column Options.html
index 0b397eb2aec..418a453ef2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Rich Text Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Rich Text Column Options.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Advanced Rich Text Column Options
How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for Rich Text (Html) columns for a form or list in the Form and List module. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a Rich Text (Html) column. See "Creating a List", "Creating a Form" or "Editing List or Form Columns"
- Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields:
- - At Plain Text Box select from the following options:
- to display the plain text box only. The Plain text box will still be multiple lines deep.
- to display the RTE as well as the option to switch to the Basic Text Box.
+ - At Plain Text Box select from the following options:
- Mark the check box to display the plain text box only. The Plain text box will still be multiple lines deep.
- Unmark the check box to display the RTE as well as the option to switch to the Basic Text Box.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default value for this field. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field, however it can be edited.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Separator Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Separator Column Options.html
index 50d1d4362e9..9945bdbd876 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Separator Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced Separator Column Options.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Advanced Separator Column Options
How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for Separators on a form or list in the Form and List module. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a separator column. See "Creating a List", "Creating a Form" or "Editing List or Form Columns"
- Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields:
- - At Acts as Fieldset (applies only to CSS based layout select from the following options:
- for greater page accessibility. This creates a fieldset element around the form and uses the title of the field as the fieldset legend.
- to disable.
+ - At Acts as Fieldset (applies only to CSS based layout select from the following options:
- Mark the check box for greater page accessibility. This creates a fieldset element around the form and uses the title of the field as the fieldset legend.
- Unmark the check box to disable.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced URL Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced URL Column Options.html
index 2e96b529dfe..7390ea8a054 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced URL Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced URL Column Options.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Advanced URL Column Options
- List of Values text box, enter a list of URL's separated by a semi-colon ( ; ). E.g. http://www.domain.com/home.htm; http://www.domain.com/services.htm. Alternatively, leave this field blank to display the Link Control which enables any URL, Page or File to be selected.
- Select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Link Caption text box, enter the text that you want to display instead of the URL in the table. E.g. Visit this website. This text will then display as a mailto link.
- - At Abbreviated URL, to display only the file or page name. E.g. http://www.domain.com/home.htm would then display as home.htm - OR - to display the complete URL. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field.
+ - At Abbreviated URL, to display only the file or page name. E.g. http://www.domain.com/home.htm would then display as home.htm - OR - to display the complete URL. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default URL value for this field. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. See "Configuring URL Column Settings" to configure additional settings for this column type.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced User Profile Link Column Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced User Profile Link Column Options.html
index afc9ca3a7c4..27fbd16c0d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced User Profile Link Column Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Advanced Column Options/Advanced User Profile Link Column Options.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@ Advanced User Profile Link Column Options
- In the List of Values text box, enter one or more usernames separated by a semi-colon ( ; ). E.g. Admin;Jack:Julie;. Where a non-existent username is entered it will not be displayed as an option. Leave this field blank to display a text box into which any username can be entered.
- Select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when you have a lot of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Caption Options text box, enter the text to be displayed as the link for this user on the UDT. HTML formatting is permitted. Leave this field blank to display the user's name. Tip: Click the Available Tokens Help link for more.
- - At Show User's Username Instead of his Displayname, to display username - OR - to display the user's display name.
+ - At Show User's Username Instead of his Displayname, to display username - OR - to display the user's display name.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default value for this field. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users when they add and manage data for this column.
-
+
See "Settings for User Profile Links" to configure additional settings for this column type.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Configuring URL Column Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Configuring URL Column Settings.html
index db896d86ec9..1a49ed17400 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Configuring URL Column Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Configuring URL Column Settings.html
@@ -1,18 +1,15 @@
-
+
-
Configuring URL Column Settings
How to set URL columns in the Form and Lists module to display in the same or a new Web browser window.
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
- Maximize the Schema Definition section.
- -
-
Maximize the More Column Settings section.
-
- - At Settings for URL Columns, set the following:
- At Show "Open Link in new Browser Window"? open URL links in a new Web browser window - OR - to display in the same window.
- At Force Download, to force the download of the resource - OR - for optional download.
- At Url Optimization, select from these options:
- Track Number Of Times URL's Are Clicked: Select to enable the Link Click log for URL's. Note: Tracking numbers only apply for new or updated URL's.
- Search Engine Friendly: Select to use search engine friendly URL's. This is the default option.
+ - Maximize the More Column Settings section.
+ - At Settings for URL Columns, set the following:
- At Show "Open Link in new Browser Window"? open URL links in a new Web browser window - OR - to display in the same window.
- At Force Download, to force the download of the resource - OR - for optional download.
- At Url Optimization, select from these options:
- Track Number Of Times URL's Are Clicked: Select to enable the Link Click log for URL's. Note: Tracking numbers only apply for new or updated URL's.
- Search Engine Friendly: Select to use search engine friendly URL's. This is the default option.
- Click the Save Settings and Return link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Image Columns.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Image Columns.html
index 425cbd4a40c..97c1e114151 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Image Columns.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Image Columns.html
@@ -1,34 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Settings for Image Columns
-
-
-
- How to set the width or height of images displayed in the image columns of a list created using the Form and List module.
-
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
- - Maximize the Schema Definition section.
- - Maximize the More Column Settings section.
- - At Settings for Image Columns set one of the following options:
-
-
- - In the Image Width text box, enter the width that images are displayed in image column. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly.
- - In the Image Height text box, enter the height that images are displayed in image column. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly. If the Image Width field is set it will override this field rather than both dimensions being used.
-
-
- - Click the Save Configuration and Return link.
+ How to set the width or height of images displayed in the image columns of a list created using the Form and List module.
+
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
+ - Maximize the Schema Definition section.
+ - Maximize the More Column Settings section.
+ - At Settings for Image Columns set one of the following options:
- In the Image Width text box, enter the width that images are displayed in image column. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly.
- In the Image Height text box, enter the height that images are displayed in image column. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly. If the Image Width field is set it will override this field rather than both dimensions being used.
+ - Click the Save Configuration and Return button.
-
+
Configuring Image Column Settings
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for User Profile Links.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for User Profile Links.html
index f30739ac721..4fdb4de2399 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for User Profile Links.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for User Profile Links.html
@@ -1,23 +1,15 @@
-
+
-
- Settings for User Profile Links
+ Settings for User Profile Links
How to configure the optional setting for user profile links in a list on the Form and List module.
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
- Maximize the Schema Definition section.
- - Maximize the More Column Settings section.
- - At Settings for User Profile Links set the following options:
-
-
- - At Open in New Window, to open the profile in a new Web browser window - OR - to open the profile in the same window.
- - At User Link Caption select from the following options to set which name to display as the link to User Profile:
- - At Add to CreatedBy/UpdatedBy?, to add a link to the user's profile on both the Created By and Updated By columns - OR - for no link.
-
-
+ - Maximize the More Column Settings section.
+ - At Settings for User Profile Links set the following options:
- At Open in New Window, to open the profile in a new Web browser window - OR - to open the profile in the same window.
- At User Link Caption select from the following options to set which name to display as the link to User Profile:
- At Add to CreatedBy/UpdatedBy?, to add a link to the user's profile on both the Created By and Updated By columns - OR - for no link.
- Click the Save Configuration and Return link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Calculated Columns.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Calculated Columns.html
index 2707db65e78..152fe0701d0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Calculated Columns.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Settings/Settings for Calculated Columns.html
@@ -1,25 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Settings for Calculated Columns
-
-
-
How to set the data within a calculated column to be displayed on the Edit Form page of the Form and List module.
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
- - Maximize the Schema Definition section.
- - Maximize the More Column Settings section.
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
+ - Maximize the Schema Definition section.
+ - Maximize the More Column Settings section.
- Go to the Settings for Calculated Columns field.
- - At Render In Form, render on the Edit Form page - OR - to disable.
- - Click the Save Configuration and Return link.
+ - At Render In Form, render on the Edit Form page - OR - to disable.
+ - Click the Save Configuration and Return link.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Calculated Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Calculated Fields.html
index b5357be51ae..50f7a954fb5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Calculated Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Calculated Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,11 +8,11 @@ Adding a Calculated Column Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Expression text box, enter an expression formula (appropriate for the data type) which will be evaluated at runtime. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- - Go to the Form Settings section.
- At Data Type select the result type from one of the following options:
- Date and Time: Displays the results as a date/time value.
- Decimal: Displays the results as a decimal value.
- Integer: Displays the results as a integer value.
- Text: Displays the results as a text value. This is the default setting
- True/False: Displays the results as a true or false value.
- At Show on Edit Form?, to display this field on the edit form - OR - to hide this field on the edit form. This prevents the data that was originally added to the field from being edited.
- At Render In Form, render the result of the calculated data in the form - OR - render the full expression in the form.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field is optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - Go to the Form Settings section.
- At Data Type select the result type from one of the following options:
- Date and Time: Displays the results as a date/time value.
- Decimal: Displays the results as a decimal value.
- Integer: Displays the results as a integer value.
- Text: Displays the results as a text value. This is the default setting
- True/False: Displays the results as a true or false value.
- At Show on Edit Form?, to display this field on the edit form - OR - to hide this field on the edit form. This prevents the data that was originally added to the field from being edited.
- At Render In Form, render the result of the calculated data in the form - OR - render the full expression in the form.
- Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Output Format text box, enter an output format string suitable for this data type. E.g. 00.00
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Currency Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Currency Fields.html
index 66316cc6f30..69ff0e5abd8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Currency Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Currency Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,10 +10,10 @@ Adding a Currency Field
- In the Title text box, enter the title to be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default currency value for this field - OR - Leave blank to enable users to enter any currency value or to use the first value entered in the "List of Values" field.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values select from the following:
- Leave this field blank to display a text box that allows any value to be entered.
- Enter one or more values separated by a semi-colon ( ; ) (E.g. 10;15;20;25;30;35;40;45;50) and then select how the list options are displayed
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the style that is applied to the text box or list control in form.
- Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Currency Symbol text box, enter the currency symbol that you want to display in the Table. E.g. EUR - OR - Leave this field blank to display the currency set for this site. See "Setting the Payment Processor"
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date Fields.html
index de5268245db..dbbdf8abbe5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -18,10 +18,10 @@ Adding a Date Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default date to be displayed for this field. E.g. 2013-01-01 - OR - Leave blank to display the date field as empty. Note: The Date Picker control will be displayed for both these options, allowing any date to be selected.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, check the check if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, check the check if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values choose one of the following options:
- Leave the field blank to display the Date Picker control. The Date Picker will open on the month/day set in the "Default Value" field or if that field is blank it will open to the current month/day. This is the default option for this setting.
- Enter a list of dates that can be selected from a drop down list (E.g. 2012-01-01;2012-02-01;2012-03-01) and then select how the list options are displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the style to be applied on the text box or list control in the form or list.
- Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Output Format text box, leave blank to display short dates (E.g. 2/21/2013) - OR - Enter one of the following options to set the date format:
- d: Enter to display a short date. E.g. 2/21/2013
- D: Enter to display a long date. E.g. Thursday, February 21, 2013
- M: Enter to display the month and day. E.g. February 21
- Y: Enter to display year and month. E.g. February, 2013
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date and Time Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date and Time Fields.html
index 4399e80d2b0..91910a24d5f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date and Time Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Date and Time Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -23,12 +23,12 @@ Adding a Date and Time Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default date and time to be displayed for this field (E.g. 2012-01-01T12:00:00) - OR - Leave blank to display the date and time fields as empty.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the style to be applied on the text box or list control in the form or list.
- - Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Output Format text box, leave blank to display the short date and short time format (E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00 AM) - OR - Enter one of the following options to set the date format:
- f: Enter to display long date and short time. E.g. Thursday, February 21, 2011 8:00 AM
- F: Enter to display long date and long time. E.g. Thursday, February 21, 2011 8:00:00 AM
- g: Enter to display short date and short time. E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00 AM
- G: Enter to display short date and long time. E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00:00 AM
- Y: Enter to display year and month. E.g. February, 2011
- At Convert to user's timezone?, to display date/time according to the users' time zone as set in their user profile - OR - to use default site time zone.
+ - Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Output Format text box, leave blank to display the short date and short time format (E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00 AM) - OR - Enter one of the following options to set the date format:
- f: Enter to display long date and short time. E.g. Thursday, February 21, 2011 8:00 AM
- F: Enter to display long date and long time. E.g. Thursday, February 21, 2011 8:00:00 AM
- g: Enter to display short date and short time. E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00 AM
- G: Enter to display short date and long time. E.g. 2/21/2011 8:00:00 AM
- Y: Enter to display year and month. E.g. February, 2011
- At Convert to user's timezone?, to display date/time according to the users' time zone as set in their user profile - OR - to use default site time zone.
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Decimal Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Decimal Fields.html
index ed4924bd132..5bff0b2f7bc 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Decimal Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Decimal Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,10 +10,10 @@ Adding a Decimal Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default date to be displayed for this field. E.g. 10 - OR - Leave blank to display an empty field.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values choose one of the following options:
- Leave the field blank to allow users to enter any decimal value.
- Enter a list of decimal values that can be selected (E.g. 10;15.50;20.99;25.7;2;29.333) and then select how the list is displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the style to be applied on the text box or list control in the form or list.
- Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Output Format text box, enter the format that the decimal value will be displayed. E.g. 0.00 or 0.0
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Download Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Download Fields.html
index 631a9350b6b..857267155b8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Download Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Download Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -9,15 +9,15 @@ Adding a Download Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the URL where the file to be set as the default download is located - OR - Leave blank to display all downloadable files in a drop down list.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values text box, leave this field blank to display the Link Control that allows users to select a file (and uploaded if permissions allow) from the site's Digital Asset Management module (Admin > File Management).
- Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Link Caption text box, enter the text to be displayed instead of the Download URL. E.g. Download this brochure. This text will be a link to the download the associated file.
- At Abbreviate Caption, select from the below options (Note: If the "Link Caption" field is used then it will override this field):
-
- to display only the file name in the form/list. E.g. The file "http://awesomecycles.biz/bikes.pdf" will be displayed as "bikes.pdf"
- to display the full URL. Note: If the "Link Caption" field is used then it will override this field.
- At Enable "Open in new window", to open the file in a new web browser window - OR - to open the file in the current web browser window. This is the default setting.
- At Enforce Download, to automatically download the file. This option is recommended when a list of files is entered in the "List of Values" column above - OR - if file download is optional. This is the default setting.
+ - Mark the check box to display only the file name in the form/list. E.g. The file "http://awesomecycles.biz/bikes.pdf" will be displayed as "bikes.pdf"
- Unmark the check box to display the full URL. Note: If the "Link Caption" field is used then it will override this field.
- At Enable "Open in new window", to open the file in a new web browser window - OR - to open the file in the current web browser window. This is the default setting.
- At Enforce Download, to automatically download the file. This option is recommended when a list of files is entered in the "List of Values" column above - OR - if file download is optional. This is the default setting.
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Email Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Email Fields.html
index 86859855bb2..39644f3275f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Email Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Email Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,13 +10,13 @@ Adding an Email Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default email address to be displayed for this field. E.g. sales@awesomecycles.biz - OR - Leave blank to enable users to enter any email address.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values text box, leave this field blank to display a text box into which any email address can be entered - OR - Enter one or more values for this field separated by a semi-colon ( ; ) E.g. admin@domain.com;sales@domain.com;marketing@domain.com and then select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Select to display values in a drop down list. This is useful for when there are lots of list values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. E.g. width:300px
- In the List Settings section.
- In the Link Caption text box, enter the text to be displayed instead of the email address. E.g. Contact this person. This text displays as a "mailto" link.
-
- At No Link, to disable the mailto hyperlink and display the email address as static text - OR - to enable the mailto hyperlink. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field and the hyperlink will be enabled.
+- At No Link, to disable the mailto hyperlink and display the email address as static text - OR - to enable the mailto hyperlink. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field and the hyperlink will be enabled.
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Image Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Image Fields.html
index 38aaccce8c9..2deca91c0b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Image Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Image Fields.html
@@ -1,24 +1,22 @@
-
+
Adding an Image Field
- How to add an image field to a form or list using the Form and List module. This column type allows form or list editors to either choose an image from a predetermined list or select (and optionally upload depending on user permission) an image from the site's Digital Asset Management module that is located on the Admin > File Management page using the Link Control. The chosen image is displayed on the list. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding an image column to a form or list (See "Creating a Form or List") or editing an existing image record. See "Editing List or Form Columns"
- Note: Both the "Default Value" and "List of Values" fields must be left blank to enable the Link Control that enables users to enter any URL or upload and/or select images from the site's Digital Asset Management module, located on the Admin > File Management page.
+ How to add an image field to a form or list using the Form and List module. This column type allows form or list editors to either choose an image from a predetermined list or select (and optionally upload depending on user permission) an image from the site's Digital Asset Management module that is located on the Admin > File Management page using the Link Control. The chosen image is displayed on the list. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding an image column to a form or list (See "Creating a Form or List") or editing an existing image record. See "Editing List or Form Columns". Note: Both the "Default Value" and "List of Values" fields must be left blank to enable the Link Control that enables users to enter any URL or upload and/or select images from the site's Digital Asset Management module, located on the Admin > File Management page.
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the URL to the image that will be selected as the default for this field - OR - Leave this field blank to either display the first image entered into the "List of Values" below or, if the "List of Value" is blank, to display the Link Control which enables users to enter any image URL or select/upload an image from the Digital Asset Management module (located on the Admin > File Management page) depending on the user's permissions.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.>
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.>
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values text box, leave this field blank to display the Link Control and allow users to select a file (and uploaded if permissions allow) from the Digital Asset Management module that is located on the Admin > File Management page. Skip to Step 9 - OR - Enter a definitive list of URL's separated by a semi-colon ( ; ) to set the images that can be selected. (E.g. http://www.awesomecycles.biz/bike-performance.png;http://www.awesomecycles.biz/bike-vintage.png) and then select how the list is displayed from these options:
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons
- Go to the List Settings section.
-
- In the Alt Caption text box, enter the alterative text for this image. Token replacement is enabled for this field.
- At Thumbnail as Link,
- to display a thumbnail of the image in the list that links to the original file. This field only applies to images uploaded and/or selected using the Link Control. Images listed in the "List of Values" will display as their original size.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the width for the thumbnail. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly.
- In the Thumbnail Height text box, enter the height for the thumbnail. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly. If the Image Width field is also set it will override this field rather than using both dimensions.
- to display the original image in the list.
+ - In the Alt Caption text box, enter the alterative text for this image. Token replacement is enabled for this field.
- At Thumbnail as Link,
- Mark the check box to display a thumbnail of the image in the list that links to the original file. This field only applies to images uploaded and/or selected using the Link Control. Images listed in the "List of Values" will display as their original size.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the width for the thumbnail. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly.
- In the Thumbnail Height text box, enter the height for the thumbnail. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly. If the Image Width field is also set it will override this field rather than using both dimensions.
- Unmark the check box to display the original image in the list.
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Integer Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Integer Fields.html
index d768f7d82fa..ab004e3dc39 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Integer Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Integer Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,10 +10,10 @@ Adding an Integer Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default date to be displayed for this field. E.g. 10 - OR - Leave blank to display an empty field.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values choose one of the following options:
- Leave the field blank to allow users to enter any integer value.
- Enter a list of number that can be selected (E.g. 5;10;15;20;25;30) and then select how the list is displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the style to be applied on the text box or list control in the form or list.
- Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Output Format text box, enter the format that the decimal value will be displayed. E.g. 0.00 or 0.0
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Look-Up Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Look-Up Fields.html
index 8ab7f50fe8b..58e79f74c07 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Look-Up Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Look-Up Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,11 +8,11 @@ Adding a Look-Up Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Token Text text box, enter the token text to query the User or File object.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- - Go to the Form Settings section.
- At Source Column, enter the name of the column containing a ref to a user or local file.
- At LookUp_HideOnEdit?, if this value will be displayed to all users when editing - OR - to hide the field on the Edit Form.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - Go to the Form Settings section.
- At Source Column, enter the name of the column containing a ref to a user or local file.
- At LookUp_HideOnEdit?, if this value will be displayed to all users when editing - OR - to hide the field on the Edit Form.
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
Tip: In the below example, the Look-Up column is set to display the size of the file selected in the Brochure column.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Rich Text Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Rich Text Fields.html
index 75a07a6314a..6c1ec527c65 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Rich Text Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Rich Text Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ Adding a Rich Text Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default text to be displayed for this field - OR - Leave blank to display an empty text box.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- - Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- At Plain Text Box, to display a multi-line plain text box - OR - to display a multi-line rich text box with rich text editing capabilities.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- At Plain Text Box, to display a multi-line plain text box - OR - to display a multi-line rich text box with rich text editing capabilities.
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Separator Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Separator Fields.html
index 03a51078d04..819f73b50cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Separator Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Separator Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -7,11 +7,11 @@ Adding a Separator Field
How to add a separator field to a form or list using the Form and List module. This column type displays a separator (line break) on the form or list which is useful for grouping similar fields and providing visual cues to users. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding a separator column to a form or list (See "Creating a Form or List") or editing the settings of an existing separator field. See "Editing List or Form Columns"
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed above the separator.
- - At Required, to set the field as mandatory - OR - to set the field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is visible to all users - OR - if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. This is the default setting. See "Setting Form Permissions"
+ - At Required, to set the field as mandatory - OR - to set the field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is visible to all users - OR - if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. This is the default setting. See "Setting Form Permissions"
- Go to the List Settings section.
- - At Collapsible Area, if the fields belonging this separator are collapsible. This creates a collapse/expand section that continues to either the next Separator or the end of the form or list - OR - for no collapsible area. This is the default setting.
+ - At Collapsible Area, if the fields belonging this separator are collapsible. This creates a collapse/expand section that continues to either the next Separator or the end of the form or list - OR - for no collapsible area. This is the default setting.
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Text Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Text Fields.html
index 02d1124fc3b..313fb630dd7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Text Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Text Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,10 +10,10 @@ Adding a Text Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default text to be displayed for this field. E.g. Ms - OR - Leave blank to display an empty text box.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the List of Values choose one of the following options:
- Leave the field blank to allow users to enter any text.
- Enter a definitive text list that can be selected from (E.g.: Mr;Ms;Miss;Mrs;Dr) and then select how the list is displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a large number of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the style to be applied to the text box or list control in the form or list.
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Time Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Time Fields.html
index 41a838529f9..5115cecd710 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Time Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/Time Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -15,12 +15,12 @@ Adding a Time Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default date and time to be displayed for this field (E.g.12:00:00) - OR - Leave blank to display an empty time field.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- - In the List of Values text box choose one of the following options:
- Leave the field blank to allow users to select any time using the Time Picker control.
- Enter a definitive list of times that can be selected from (E.g. 12:00;12:01;12:02 ) and then select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful if there is a large number of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
+ - In the List of Values text box choose one of the following options:
- Leave the field blank to allow users to select any time using the Time Picker control.
- Enter a definitive list of times that can be selected from (E.g. 12:00;12:01;12:02 ) and then select how the list options are displayed:
- Drop Down List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful if there is a large number of values.
- Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- In the Validation Rule text box, enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.
- In the Validation Message text box, enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. E.g. width:300px
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/True-False Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/True-False Fields.html
index b5d0cb446ee..977ffe2bde6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/True-False Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/True-False Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -9,9 +9,9 @@ Adding a True-False Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter "True" or "False" to set the default value for this field - OR - Leave this field blank to use the default value of "False"
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
- In the CSS Style text box, enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. E.g. width:300px
- Go to the List Settings section.
- Optional. In the Right Label Text text box, enter the text you want to appear to the right of the true/false check box. This text appears on both the edit page and in the form or list.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/URL Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/URL Fields.html
index 82a1cf100b7..d68b1685763 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/URL Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/URL Fields.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -9,16 +9,16 @@ Adding a URL Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default URL to be displayed for this field - OR - Leave blank to display an empty field.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
-
- In the List of Values text box, leave this field blank to allow any URL to be entered - OR - Enter a definitive list of URL's that can be selected (E.g. www.domain.com;www.awesomecycles.biz) and then select and then select how the list is displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
+ - In the List of Values text box, leave this field blank to allow any URL to be entered - OR - Enter a definitive list of URL's that can be selected (E.g. www.domain.com;www.awesomecycles.biz) and then select and then select how the list is displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- Go to the List Settings section.
- In the Link Caption text box, enter the text to be displayed instead of the Download URL. E.g. Download this brochure. This text will be a link to the download the associated file.
- At Abbreviate Caption, select from the below options (Note: If the "Link Caption" field is used then it will override this field):
-
- to display only the file name in the form/list. E.g. The file "http://awesomecycles.biz/bikes.pdf" will be displayed as "bikes.pdf"
- to display the full URL. Note: If the "Link Caption" field is used then it will override this field.
- At Enable "Open in new window", to open the file in a new web browser window - OR - to open the file in the current web browser window. This is the default setting.
- At Enforce Download, to automatically download the file. This option is recommended when a list of files is entered in the "List of Values" column above - OR - if file download is optional. This is the default setting.
- At Track Number of Downloads, to enable the Link Tracker. See "Enabling/Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks" - OR - for no link tracking. This is the default setting.
+ - Mark the check box to display only the file name in the form/list. E.g. The file "http://awesomecycles.biz/bikes.pdf" will be displayed as "bikes.pdf"
- to display the full URL. Note: If the "Link Caption" field is used then it will override this field.
- At Enable "Open in new window", to open the file in a new web browser window - OR - to open the file in the current web browser window. This is the default setting.
- At Enforce Download, to automatically download the file. This option is recommended when a list of files is entered in the "List of Values" column above - OR - if file download is optional. This is the default setting.
- At Track Number of Downloads, to enable the Link Tracker. See "Enabling/Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks" - OR - for no link tracking. This is the default setting.
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/User Profile Link Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/User Profile Link Fields.html
index 4902f8f7a88..d97cbae1c2f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/User Profile Link Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Column Types/User Profile Link Fields.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Adding a Link to User's Profile Field
@@ -10,15 +9,15 @@ Adding a Link to User's Profile Field
- In the Title text box, enter a title that will be displayed on the form or list for this field.
- In the Help Text text box, enter a help message to assist users who are adding or editing the data for this field.
- In the Default Value text box, enter the default username to be displayed for this field - OR - Leave blank to display an empty field.
- - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
- - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
+ - At Required, if this field must be completed to submit the form or add a record to a list - OR - if this field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - At Display on List, if this column is visible on the list in the normal grid view. This is the default setting. - OR - to set the field as visible to Administrators only.
+ - At Restricted Form Field, if this column is only visible to users/roles who have been added to the "Edit Also Restricted Columns" permission (See "Setting Form Permissions") - OR - if the column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
+ - At Searchable, if this column searchable using the Search Options configured for this module. This setting has no influence whether the field gets indexed for the side wide search - OR - if the column is not included in the module search. This is the default setting.
- Go to the Form Settings section.
-
- In the List of Values text box, leave this field blank to allow any username to be entered - OR - Enter a definitive list of usernames (separated by a semi-colon ( ;) ) that can be selected (E.g. joan;jack;johnny) and then select how the list is displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
+ - In the List of Values text box, leave this field blank to allow any username to be entered - OR - Enter a definitive list of usernames (separated by a semi-colon ( ;) ) that can be selected (E.g. joan;jack;johnny) and then select how the list is displayed. Note: This setting removes the user's ability to enter other values.
- Dropdown-List: Display values in a drop down selection list. This is useful when there are a lot of values.
- Radio Buttons (Vert.: Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons.
- Radio Buttons (Hor.): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.
- Go to the List Settings section.
-
- At Show Username, to display username - OR - to display the user's display name.
- In the Expression text box, enter an expression including tokens to change the details rendered for this field. Note: Click the Available Tokens Help button below for a list of the available tokens - OR - Leave this field blank to use the username or displayname as set in the above field.
- At Open in new window, to open the file in a new web browser window - OR - to open the file in the current web browser window. This is the default setting.
+ - At Show Username, to display username - OR - to display the user's display name.
- In the Expression text box, enter an expression including tokens to change the details rendered for this field. Note: Click the Available Tokens Help button below for a list of the available tokens - OR - Leave this field blank to use the username or displayname as set in the above field.
- At Open in new window, to open the file in a new web browser window - OR - to open the file in the current web browser window. This is the default setting.
- Click the Save button to save the field and return to the Form & List Configuration page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a Form.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a Form.html
index df7b5a3c7f3..8b3fd202e4c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a Form.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a Form.html
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
-
+
-
Configuring a Form
How to configure the Form and List module as a form. Note: Before configuration, the module displays the "Start with a new Configuration" message.
- - Click the Configuration button - OR - Select Edit > Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
+ - Click the Configuration button - OR - Select Edit > Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
@@ -16,7 +15,7 @@
Configuring a Form
- Select the Page Related Settings tab.
- Expand the Current View Options section.
- At Appearance, select from these options:
-
- Form: Select to display a form. Records entered into the form can be viewed using the Show Records option. See "Viewing Form Records"
This displays the following messages: "Please apply also "Create Record/Submit Form" permissions in Module Settings!", and "If the module is collecting confidential data, you should also exclude its data from system wide search." Skip to Step 2C. - Form Above List: Select to display a form with a list below. Records created using the form are displayed as a list below the form.
- Form Below List: Select to display a form with a list below. Records created using the form are displayed as a list above the form.
- At Actions as Buttons, to use buttons as well as the module action menu for actions such as "Add New Record" and "Show Records". This is the default setting for this field and is the recommended setting as it allows users who may not have access to view the module action menu, such as registered users, to add records and submit forms - OR - to only use the module action menu. In this case, you should test that the users you want to submit forms/add records are able to view the module action menu.
+ - Form: Select to display a form. Records entered into the form can be viewed using the Show Records option. See "Viewing Form Records"
This displays the following messages: "Please apply also "Create Record/Submit Form" permissions in Module Settings!", and "If the module is collecting confidential data, you should also exclude its data from system wide search." Skip to Step 2C. - Form Above List: Select to display a form with a list below. Records created using the form are displayed as a list below the form.
- Form Below List: Select to display a form with a list below. Records created using the form are displayed as a list above the form.
- At Actions as Buttons, to use buttons as well as the module action menu for actions such as "Add New Record" and "Show Records". This is the default setting for this field and is the recommended setting as it allows users who may not have access to view the module action menu, such as registered users, to add records and submit forms - OR - to only use the module action menu. In this case, you should test that the users you want to submit forms/add records are able to view the module action menu.
@@ -35,7 +34,7 @@
Configuring a Form
- Tip: You can return to the Form and List Configuration page via the module actions menu and modify the Form Settings as desired, however the Appearance field should not be changed from a Form to a List.
+ Tip: You can return to the Form and List Configuration page via the module actions menu and modify the Form Settings as desired, however the Appearance field should not be changed from a Form to a List.
You must now complete the following:
- Set the roles/users that can submit the form and view form results. See "Setting Form Permissions"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a List.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a List.html
index 90861d71bbb..a15cecf63c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a List.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Configuring a List.html
@@ -1,20 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Configuring a List
How to configure the Form and List module as a list. Note: Before the Form and List module is configured it displays message: "Create a new Form or List based on a template from the list above, or design your own in Form and List Configuration."
- - Click the Configuration button - OR - Select Edit > Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
+ - Click the Configuration button - OR - Select Edit > Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
- Select the Page Related Settings tab.
- - Expand the Current View Options section.
- At Appearance, select List. This will be pre-selected.
- At Actions as Buttons, to use buttons as well as the module action menu for actions such as "Show Records" (the default setting) - OR - to only use the action menu.
+ - Expand the Current View Options section.
- At Appearance, select List. This will be pre-selected.
- At Actions as Buttons, to use buttons as well as the module action menu for actions such as "Show Records" (the default setting) - OR - to only use the action menu.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form or List.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form or List.html
index 40c57844645..d8afdeb97bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form or List.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form or List.html
@@ -1,22 +1,21 @@
-
+
Creating a Form or List
How to add one or more fields to either a form or a list using the Form and List module.
-
- The module must be configured as either a form or a list. See "Configuring a List" or See "Configuring a Form"
+ The module must be configured as either a form or a list. See "Configuring a List" or See "Configuring a Form"
- Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
- Select the Schema Definition tab.
- Expand the Data Table Setup section.
- Four default columns (Created by, Created at, Changed by, and Changed at) are pre-existing to the form/list. These fields record the name and provide a date stamp each time the form or list is submitted or changed. These fields cannot be deleted however they won't be displayed on the form or list unless you choose to check the "Display on List" check box.
- Optional. To modify one or more of these pre-existing fields, click the Edit button to the left of the required column and then edit one or more of these settings:
- Optional. At Display on List, select from the following options:
-
- if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting.
- if the column is only visible to Administrators.
- Optional. At Restricted Form Field, select from the following options:
-
- if this column is visible to all users.
- if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. This is the default setting. See "Setting Form Permissions"
- Optional. At Searchable, select from the following options: (Note: This option is only available for some data types)
-
- if this column searchable.
- if the column is not searchable. This is the default setting.
+ - Mark the check box if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box if the column is only visible to Administrators.
- Optional. At Restricted Form Field, select from the following options:
+
- Mark the check box if this column is visible to all users.
- Unmark the check box if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. This is the default setting. See "Setting Form Permissions"
- Optional. At Searchable, select from the following options: (Note: This option is only available for some data types)
+
- Mark the check box if this column searchable.
- Unmark the check box if the column is not searchable. This is the default setting.
@@ -35,7 +34,7 @@
Creating a Form or List
- Image: Displays an image that has been uploaded to the website or is located on an external URL. See "Adding an Image Field"
- Integer: Enter and display a whole number. Only whole numbers can be entered into an integer field. Numbers can be positive, negative or zero amounts. E.g. 8, -8, 0. E.g. 8. See "Adding an Integer Field"
- Link to User's Profile: Enter a username of a member of the site to display their name and a link to their user profile. See "Adding a Link to User's Profile Field"
- - Look-Up See "Adding a Look-Up Field"
+ - Look-Up See "Adding a Look-Up Field"
- Rich Text (Html): Enter and display any keyboard characters into the RTE. This field was not working at the time of writing. See "Adding a Rich Text Field"
- Separator: Displays a separator line. See "Adding a Look-Up Field"
- Text: Enter and display any keyboard characters. This is the default option. See "Adding a Text Field"
@@ -44,7 +43,7 @@ Creating a Form or List
- URL: Enter and display a valid URL. E.g. http://www.domain.com. See "Adding a URL Field"
- Repeat Steps 4-5 to add additional columns.
- - At Exclude module content form search, to include the content within this module in DNN site global searches - OR - to include module content in DNN site search. This setting is checked by default. Note: You can include or exclude the data for individual fields when adding them to the module at Step 4 above.
+ - At Exclude module content form search, to include the content within this module in DNN site global searches - OR - to include module content in DNN site search. This setting is checked by default. Note: You can include or exclude the data for individual fields when adding them to the module at Step 4 above.
- Click the Save Configuration and Return button to return to the module.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form.html
index faa45ae2eab..29e39ebf5e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a Form.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Creating a Form
@@ -33,16 +32,16 @@ Creating a Form
- URL: Enter and display a valid URL. E.g. http://www.domain.com
- Optional. At Required, select from the following options:
-
- to set the field as mandatory.
- to set the field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - Mark the check box to set the field as mandatory.
- Unmark the check box to set the field as optional. This is the default setting.
- Optional. At Display on List, select from the following options:
-
- if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting.
- if the column is only visible to Administrators.
+ - Mark the check box if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box if the column is only visible to Administrators.
- Optional. At Restricted Form Field, select from the following options:
-
- if this column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. See "Setting Form Permissions"
+ - Mark the check box if this column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. See "Setting Form Permissions"
- Optional. At Searchable, select from the following options: (Note: This option is only available for some data types)
-
- if this column searchable. This is the default setting.
- if the column is not searchable.
+ - Mark the check box if this column searchable. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box if the column is not searchable.
- Click the Save button to the left of these details.
- Repeat Steps 3-10 to add additional columns.
- - Optional. At Privacy, to include the content within this module in DNN site searches. This setting is selected by default.
+ - Optional. At Privacy, to include the content within this module in DNN site searches. This setting is selected by default.
- Click the Save Settings and Return button to return to the module.
Tip: See the Advanced Column Options section for this module for more column options.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a List.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a List.html
index 339b100c0a1..47d46c497a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a List.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Creating a List.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Creating a List
@@ -12,13 +11,13 @@ Creating a List
- Click the Add New Column link to add a new column.
- In the Title text box, enter a title for the column. Note: Column titles are listed across the top of the table.
- At Type, select the type of data that can be entered into and displayed for the field. The following options are available:
- Calculated Column: Requires an expression to be entered. See "Advanced Calculated Column Options"
- Currency: Enter and display a currency amount. E.g. 9.00 GBP. See "Setting the Payment Processor for Site Hosting"
- Date: Display a selected date. E.g. 6/30/2006
- Date and Time: Displays a selected date and an entered time. E.g. 6/30/2006 9:00 AM
- Decimal: Enter and display a decimal number. E.g. 8.50
- Download: Select and display a file for download. Note: Link tracking for Download links can be enabled on the Edit Record page.
- Email: Enter and display a valid email address. E.g. john.doe@domain.com
- Image: Displays an image that has been uploaded to the website.
- Integer: Enter and display a whole number. E.g. 8
- Link to User's Profile: Enter a username of a member of the site to display their name and a link to their user profile.
- Look-Up:
- Rich Text (Html): Enter and display any keyboard characters into the RTE. This field was not working at the time of writing.
- Separator: This is a read only field which display the title above a horizontal line. Use this type to separate data and format the layout of your list.
- Text: Enter and display any keyboard characters. This is the default option.
- Time: Display an entered time. E.g. 12:30 PM
- True/False: Enter and display a true or false statement. E.g. False.
- URL: Enter and display a valid URL. E.g. http://www.domain.com. Note: Link tracking for URL's can be enabled on the Edit Record page.
- - At Required, select from the following options:
- to set the field as mandatory.
- to set the field as optional. This is the default setting.
- - Optional. At Display on List, select from the following options:
- if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting.
- if the column is only visible to Administrators.
- - Optional. At Restricted Form Field, select from the following options:
- if this column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. See "Setting List Permissions"
- - Optional. At Searchable, select from the following options: (Note: This option is only available for some data types)
- if this column searchable. This is the default setting.
- if the column is not searchable.
+ - At Required, select from the following options:
- Mark the check box to set the field as mandatory.
- Unmark the check box to set the field as optional. This is the default setting.
+ - Optional. At Display on List, select from the following options:
- Mark the check box if this column is visible on the list. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box if the column is only visible to Administrators.
+ - Optional. At Restricted Form Field, select from the following options:
- Mark the check box if this column is visible to all users. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. See "Setting List Permissions"
+ - Optional. At Searchable, select from the following options: (Note: This option is only available for some data types)
- Mark the check box if this column searchable. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box if the column is not searchable.
- Click the Save button to the left of these details.
- Repeat Steps 3-10 to add additional columns.
- - Optional. At Privacy, to include the content within this module in DNN site searches. This option is selected by default.
+ - Optional. At Privacy, to include the content within this module in DNN site searches. This option is selected by default.
- Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module.
Tip: See the Advanced Column Options section for this module for more column options.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Deleting List or Form Columns .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Deleting List or Form Columns .html
index 009c5df9eb9..f4cbdf7c3fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Deleting List or Form Columns .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Deleting List or Form Columns .html
@@ -1,25 +1,21 @@
-
+
-
Deleting List or Form Columns
How to delete one or more columns in a list or form created using the Form and List module. When this module is configured as a list, deleting a column permanently deletes both the column and any data entered for that column.
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
- - Click the Delete button beside the column to be deleted. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Column?"
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
+ - Click the Delete button beside the column to be deleted. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Column?"
-
+
- Click the OK button to confirm deletion.
- Repeat Steps 2-3 to delete additional columns.
- Click the Save Configuration and Return button to return to the module.
-
-
Deleting a column
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Email Settings/Setting Email Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Email Settings/Setting Email Settings.html
index b816bef4f06..642d556a3de 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Email Settings/Setting Email Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/Email Settings/Setting Email Settings.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -9,9 +9,9 @@ Setting Email Settings
- Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
- Select the Page Related Settings tab.
- Expand the Email Settings section.
- - Optional. At Trigger, select one or more of the following options to set which actions will trigger a notification email.
- On New, if you want to send a notification email when a new record is created.
- Optional. In the On New Text text box, enter the message to display in the body of the notification email.
-Note: This field is displayed near the bottom of this section.
- On Update, if you want to send a notification email when an existing record is updated.
- Optional. In the On Update Text text box, enter the message to display in the body of the notification email.
-Note: This field is displayed near the bottom of this section.
- On Deleteif you want to send a notification email when an existing record is deleted.
- Optional. In the On Delete Text text box, enter the message to display in the body of the notification email. Note: This field is displayed near the bottom of this section.
+ - Optional. At Trigger, select one or more of the following options to set which actions will trigger a notification email.
- On New, if you want to send a notification email when a new record is created.
- Optional. In the On New Text text box, enter the message to display in the body of the notification email.
+Note: This field is displayed near the bottom of this section.
- On Update, if you want to send a notification email when an existing record is updated.
- Optional. In the On Update Text text box, enter the message to display in the body of the notification email.
+Note: This field is displayed near the bottom of this section.
- On Delete, if you want to send a notification email when an existing record is deleted.
- Optional. In the On Delete Text text box, enter the message to display in the body of the notification email. Note: This field is displayed near the bottom of this section.
- In the To text box, enter one or more email addresses, separated by semicolon ";" or enclosed in [brackets]. You may enter the column Title name for column types Email, Created By, Changed By, or User Link. E.g. admin@domain.com;[Created By];[Secondary Email].
- In the CC text box, enter each email address to be sent a 'carbon copy' of this message. See To field for more details.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing Current XSL Script.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing Current XSL Script.html
index f820362b23e..053a1649359 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing Current XSL Script.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing Current XSL Script.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Editing Current XSL Script
How to edit the XSL Transformation file of a self-made stylesheet for a list on the Form and List module. This tutorial assumes you have created a stylesheet and set it for this module. See "Rendering a List using Self Made Stylesheets"
- Select Edit Current XSL Script from the Form and List module actions menu. This opens the Token Based XSLT Generator and Editor page.
- - Optional. Maximize the 1. Edit HTML Template section to edit the HTML template for this XSL file.
- Maximize > the List View section to view the HTML of the XSL file you are editing. Complete the following to edit the file:
- At List Type, select the layout for the content. The following options are available:
- Table: Renders all records inside a single table.
- Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag.
- Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag.
- Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below.)
- To restore the default Detail View template:
- Click the Rebuild link to the left.
- In the Delimiter text box, view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. The default value is a semi-colon ( ; ). This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type.
- At Available Fields and Context, insert one or more fields or columns as follows:
- To insert a field:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert link.
- To insert a column:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert Column link. This option is only enabled when Table is selected as the List Type.
- Maximize the Options section, complete the following optional settings:
- Optional. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet, to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet, to add a pager for the displayed list. Page size is specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Detail View, to add a link to an additional Detail View, showing the columns of the current record only. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. You can manually edit the information or perform the following edit tasks:
- Click the Generate from HTML Template button.
+ - Optional. Maximize the 1. Edit HTML Template section to edit the HTML template for this XSL file.
- Maximize > the List View section to view the HTML of the XSL file you are editing. Complete the following to edit the file:
- At List Type, select the layout for the content. The following options are available:
- Table: Renders all records inside a single table.
- Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag.
- Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag.
- Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below.)
- To restore the default Detail View template:
- Click the Rebuild link to the left.
- In the Delimiter text box, view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. The default value is a semi-colon ( ; ). This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type.
- At Available Fields and Context, insert one or more fields or columns as follows:
- To insert a field:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert link.
- To insert a column:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert Column link. This option is only enabled when Table is selected as the List Type.
- Maximize the Options section, complete the following optional settings:
- Optional. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet, to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet, to add a pager for the displayed list. Page size is specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Detail View, to add a link to an additional Detail View, showing the columns of the current record only. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. You can manually edit the information or perform the following edit tasks:
- Click the Generate from HTML Template button.
- Optional. In the 2. Edit XSLT Script section, view and edit the XSLT script that is now displayed if required.
- Go to the 3. Save File section.
- Optional. In the File Name text box, enter a new file name if you want to create a new file rather than editing this one.
- Click the Save File and Return link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet.html
index ae6daf283fb..a888cec035f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet
@@ -12,7 +11,7 @@ Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet
- Go to the List Settings section.
- At XSL Script, click the Edit link. This displays the Token Based XSLT Generator and Editor page.
- Optional. Maximize
- the 1. Edit HTML Template section to edit the HTML template for this XSL file.
- Maximize the List View section to view the HTML of the XSL file you are editing. Complete the following to edit the file:
- At List Type, select the layout for the content. The following options are available:
- Table: Renders all records inside a single table.
- Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag.
- Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag.
- Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below.)
- In the Delimiter text box, view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. The default value is a semi-colon ( ; ). This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type.
- At Available Fields and Context, insert one or more fields or columns as follows:
- To insert a field:
- click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert link.
- To insert a column:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert Column link. This option is only enabled when Table is selected as the List Type.
- Maximize the Options section, complete the following optional settings:
- Click the Generate from HTML Template button.
- Optional. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet, to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet, to add a pager for the displayed list. Page size is specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Search Box to the Style Sheet, to add a text box above the displayed list, where users can enter a text to search for in the records.
- Optional. At Add Detail View, to add a link to an additional Detail View, showing the columns of the current record only. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. You can manually edit the information or perform the following edit tasks:
- To insert a new field:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- At Available Fields and Content, select the field you wish to insert.
- Click the Insert link.
- To restore the default Detail View template:
- Click the Rebuild link to the left.
+ the 1. Edit HTML Template section to edit the HTML template for this XSL file. - Maximize the List View section to view the HTML of the XSL file you are editing. Complete the following to edit the file:
- At List Type, select the layout for the content. The following options are available:
- Table: Renders all records inside a single table.
- Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag.
- Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag.
- Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag.
- Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below.)
- In the Delimiter text box, view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. The default value is a semi-colon ( ; ). This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type.
- At Available Fields and Context, insert one or more fields or columns as follows:
- To insert a field:
- click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert link.
- To insert a column:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert Column link. This option is only enabled when Table is selected as the List Type.
- Maximize the Options section, complete the following optional settings:
- Click the Generate from HTML Template button.
- Optional. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet, to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet, to add a pager for the displayed list. Page size is specified on the Form and List Configuration page.
- Optional. At Add Search Box to the Style Sheet, to add a text box above the displayed list, where users can enter a text to search for in the records.
- Optional. At Add Detail View, to add a link to an additional Detail View, showing the columns of the current record only. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. You can manually edit the information or perform the following edit tasks:
- To insert a new field:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- At Available Fields and Content, select the field you wish to insert.
- Click the Insert link.
- To restore the default Detail View template:
- Click the Rebuild link to the left.
- Optional. In the 2. Edit XSLT Script section, view and edit the XSLT script if required.
- Go to the 3. Save File section.
- Optional. In the File Name text box, enter a new file name if you want to create a new file rather than editing this one.
- Click the Save File and Return link.
- If you didn't change the File Name you will be asked to confirm that you want to override the existing file. Select from these options:
- Yes: Select to override the existing file.
- No: Select to return to the page to create a new file as follows:
- In the File Name text box, enter a new file name.
- Click the Save Configuration and Return link to continue.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Generating a New XSL Transformation for a self made stylesheet.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Generating a New XSL Transformation for a self made stylesheet.html
index c97d25b5cfb..1b87eca5662 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Generating a New XSL Transformation for a self made stylesheet.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Generating a New XSL Transformation for a self made stylesheet.html
@@ -1,63 +1,62 @@
-
+
-
Generating a New XSL Transformation
How to generate a new User Defined XSL Transformation file for a self made stylesheet for the Form and List module. In the below example, a column that displays the name of the user who created the record will be added to the right of this existing list design by inserting the DisplayName of the user who is currently logged in.
Here is the module prior to generating the new XSL transformation:
-
+
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu.
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu.
- Select the Page Related Settings tab.
- Go to the List Settings section.
- At Rendering Method, select XSLT.
- At XSL Script, click the Generate New button to open the Token Based XSLT Generator and Editor page.
-
+
- Go to the 1. Edit HTML Template section. The text box displays the HTML for a table which includes an Edit Link and each of the columns which have added to the table.
-
+
- In the List View section, complete the following to edit the displayed HTML to create your custom XSL transformation:
- At List Type, select the layout for the content. The following options are available:
- Table: Renders all records inside a single table.
- Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag. E.g. div
- Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag. E.g. p
- Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. E.g. li
- Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. E.g. li
- Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below.)
- In the Delimiter text box, view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. The default value is a semi-colon ( ; ). This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type.
- At Available Fields and Context, insert one or more fields or columns as follows:
- To insert a field:
- Click inside the text box.
- Select a field from the drop down list.
- Click the Insert link.
- To insert a column:
- Click inside the text box in the location where you want to insert the column.
- Select a field from the drop down list. E.g. Context:DisplayName
- Click the Insert Column link. This option is only enabled when Table is set as the List Type.
-
+
- Optional. Maximize
- the Options section, complete the following optional settings:
- Optional. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet, to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified in Manage User Defined Table.
- Optional. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet, to add a pager for the displayed list. Page size is specified in Manage User Defined Table.
- Optional. At Add Detail View, to add a link to an additional Detail View, showing the columns of the current record only. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. You can manually edit the information or perform the following:
- To insert a new field:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- At Available Fields and Content, select the field you wish to insert.
- Click the Insert link.
- To restore the default Detail View template:
- Click the Rebuild link to the left.
+ the Options section, complete the following optional settings: - Optional. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet, to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified in Manage User Defined Table.
- Optional. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet, to add a pager for the displayed list. Page size is specified in Manage User Defined Table.
- Optional. At Add Detail View, to add a link to an additional Detail View, showing the columns of the current record only. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. You can manually edit the information or perform the following:
- To insert a new field:
- Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.
- At Available Fields and Content, select the field you wish to insert.
- Click the Insert link.
- To restore the default Detail View template:
- Click the Rebuild link to the left.
- Click the Generate from HTML Template button.
-
+
- Optional. In the 2. Edit XSLT Script section, view and edit the XSLT script that is now displayed if required.
-
+
- Go to the 3. Save File section.
- In the File Name text box, enter a file name.
- Click the Save File and Return link.
-
+
- Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module.
Here is the module after generating the new XSL transformation:
-
+
Tip: Click the Rebuilt link in the "1. Edit HTML Template" section to rebuild the HTML template if required. Note: All changes will be lost.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Rendering a List using the Default Grid Table.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Rendering a List using the Default Grid Table.html
index 1c773fbd42e..3a815a6347d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Rendering a List using the Default Grid Table.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Rendering a List using the Default Grid Table.html
@@ -1,39 +1,21 @@
-
+
-
Rendering a List using the Default Grid Table
-
-
-
- How to set the layout and design of a list using one of the included designs on the Forms and Lists module
+ How to set the layout and design of a list using one of the included designs on the Forms and Lists module
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
- - Maximize the List Settings section.
- - At Rendering Method, select Default Grid Table. This displays the CSS Classes field.
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu - OR - Click the Form and List Configuration button.
+ - Maximize the List Settings section.
+ - At Rendering Method, select Default Grid Table. This displays the CSS Classes field.
- Optional. Maximize
- the Grid Table Settings section and set any of these optional settings:
-
-
- - At CSS Classes, select the CSS classes to be used. Two options are provided:
-
-
- - "Normal UDT_Table*": This is the default table layout.
- - "DataGrid_*": This table uses a smaller font and row color alternates from black to red.
- - YUI DataTable Styled: This table displays borders.
-
-
+ the Grid Table Settings section and set any of these optional settings: - At CSS Classes, select the CSS classes to be used. Two options are provided:
- "Normal UDT_Table*": This is the default table layout.
- "DataGrid_*": This table uses a smaller font and row color alternates from black to red.
- YUI DataTable Styled: This table displays borders.
- Click the Save Configuration and Return link.
Setting the List Design using Default Grids
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Setting List Search and Filter Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Setting List Search and Filter Options.html
index 67049587d0d..807f6a98393 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Setting List Search and Filter Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Configuration/List Settings/Setting List Search and Filter Options.html
@@ -1,29 +1,28 @@
-
+
-
Setting List Search and Filter Options
How to set the list searching and filtering options for the Forms and Lists module.
- - Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu.
- Expand the List Settings section.
- Go to the Search and Filter Options section.
- In the Filter Statement text box, enter a Boolean filter expression which a record must match to be displayed. Use SQL syntax with WHERE clauses. If your column name has spaces or special characters in it, surround the field name with [brackets]. Tip: Click the Available Tokens Help or Hidden Columns Help buttons for a list of available tokens or hidden column details.
- - At Show Search Box, select from these options:
- display a search box which enables users to search the data within any searchable column. Searches can be made on all or one column and can be set to Contain, Start With, End With, or Equal the search criteria. Checking this option enables the following optional settings:
- Optional. At Simple Search, to use a simple search box - OR - to use the standard Search Box.
- Optional. At Show No Records Until Search, to hide all records until a successful search has been made - OR - to display records by default.
- Optional. At Search URL Paths, to include URL paths in search results - OR - to disable.
+ - At Show Search Box, select from these options:
- Mark the check box display a search box which enables users to search the data within any searchable column. Searches can be made on all or one column and can be set to Contain, Start With, End With, or Equal the search criteria. Checking this option enables the following optional settings:
- Optional. At Simple Search, to use a simple search box - OR - to use the standard Search Box.
- Optional. At Show No Records Until Search, to hide all records until a successful search has been made - OR - to display records by default.
- Optional. At Search URL Paths, to include URL paths in search results - OR - to disable.
- - to disable the search box.
+ - Unmark the check box to disable the search box.
- In the Records Returned text box, enter a number between 1 and 1000 to set the maximum number of records displayed according to the sorting applied. Leave this field blank to return an unlimited number of records.
- Click the Save Configuration and Return link.
-
+
Enabling the list search box
-
+
List displaying the results of a Simple Search
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/List Editors/Overview of Data Types .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/List Editors/Overview of Data Types .html
index b98678c8dd3..1ce817a849a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/List Editors/Overview of Data Types .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/List Editors/Overview of Data Types .html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Overview of Data Types
@@ -9,13 +8,13 @@ Overview of Data Types
- Calculated Column: This field permits an ASP.NET developer to write code to display data that is calculated.
- Currency: Enter an amount into the text box. The currency type is displayed to the right of the text box. The currency type is set under Admin > Site Settings.
- - Date and Time, Date, or Time: The Date fields displays a Calendar link allowing users to select a date. The Time provides a text box to enter the time. Any of the below date formats are also acceptable, however I recommend using the Calendar link to avoid confusion:
- 12 February 2004
- 12 Feb 2004
- Feb 12 2004
- Feb 12, 2004
- 2/12/2004
- Any of the below time formats are acceptable and will display as 11:00 PM:
+ - Date and Time, Date, or Time: The Date fields displays a Calendar link allowing users to select a date. The Time provides a text box to enter the time. Any of the following date formats are also acceptable, however using the Calendar link is recommend to avoid confusion:
- 12 February 2004
- 12 Feb 2004
- Feb 12 2004
- Feb 12, 2004
- 2/12/2004
- Any of the below time formats are acceptable and will display as 11:00 PM:
- Decimal: Whole numbers and numbers with a decimal point can be entered. Numbers containing a decimal point will be rounded up to the nearest two decimal point value. Numbers can be positive, negative or zero. E.g. 8.458 will be displayed as 8.46 on the module however it will display as 8.458 in edit mode.
- Email: Any a valid email address can be entered.
- Image: Select or upload an image using the Link tool for files.
- Integer: Only whole numbers can be entered into an integer field. Numbers can be positive, negative or zero amounts. E.g. 8, -8, 0
- Text: Any keyboard characters can be entered into a text field.
- - True/False: to display the True icon - OR - to display the False icon.
+ - True/False: to display the True icon - OR - to display the False icon.
- URL: Select or enter a URL using the Link tool. Any valid URL can be entered or a Page or File selected. Use the settings on the Manage User Defined Table page to set whether http:// is displayed for URL's.
- User Profile: Enter the username of a registered user. E.g. Admin
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling CAPTCHA for Anonymous Users.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling CAPTCHA for Anonymous Users.html
index 497dd8e74a3..15836bff8d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling CAPTCHA for Anonymous Users.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling CAPTCHA for Anonymous Users.html
@@ -1,20 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling CAPTCHA for Anonymous Users
How to enable the CAPTCHA security field for unauthenticated user who have been granted permission to manage list records or submit a form using the Form & List module.
-
-
+
- Select the Form and List Settings tab.
- - At Force CAPTCHA control during edit for Anonymous users, select from the following options:
- to enable CAPTCHA.
- to remove CAPTCHA. This is the default option.
+ - At Force CAPTCHA control during edit for Anonymous users, select from the following options:
- to enable CAPTCHA.
- to remove CAPTCHA. This is the default option.
-
+
- Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Entry of Markup Code Scripts.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Entry of Markup Code Scripts.html
index fd5c6a88838..ea1c2f56e3c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Entry of Markup Code Scripts.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Entry of Markup Code Scripts.html
@@ -1,21 +1,22 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling Entry of Markup Code Scripts
How to enable filtering of data that contains markup code or scripts that is entered into a form or list on the Forms and Lists module. Note: Filtering is always enabled for Anonymous users.
-
-
+
- Select the Form and List Settings tab.
- - At Filter entry for markup code or script input. Note: filtering is always enabled for Anonymous users., to enable filtering - OR - to remove filtering. This field is unchecked by default.
-
+ - At Filter entry for markup code or script input. Note: filtering is always enabled for Anonymous users., to enable filtering - OR - to remove filtering. This field is unchecked by default.
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
-
+
Enabling data filtering for lists and forms
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records.html
index f12004f1918..23c1c42d319 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records.html
@@ -1,20 +1,22 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records
How to limit users to only managing their own records in lists on the Forms and Lists module.
-
-
+
+
- Select the Form and List Settings tab.
- - At Users are only allowed to manipulate their own items, select from these options:
- if users can only manipulate their own items.
- to allow users to manipulate all items as set under permission. See "Setting Form Permissions" and See "Setting List Permissions"
-
+ - At Users are only allowed to manipulate their own items, select from these options:
- Mark the check box if users can only manipulate their own items.
- Unmark the check box to allow users to manipulate all items as set under permission. See "Setting Form Permissions" and See "Setting List Permissions"
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
-
+
Users can only modifying their own list records
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Hiding-Displaying System Fields.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Hiding-Displaying System Fields.html
index bea8426fc0d..1979048ee24 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Hiding-Displaying System Fields.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Hiding-Displaying System Fields.html
@@ -1,19 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Hiding/Displaying System Fields
How to hide or display system fields even if "Display All Columns" permissions are set for a form or list created using the Forms and Lists module.
-
-
+
- Select the Form and List Settings tab.
- At Hide System Fields even if "Display All Columns" permission is set, select from these options:
-
- to hide system fields. This is the default option.
- to display system fields.
-
+- Mark the check box to hide system fields. This is the default option.
- Unmark the check box to display system fields.
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators.html
index 38483c78dc7..242c058d8d4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators.html
@@ -1,24 +1,26 @@
-
+
-
Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators
How to negate the "Display All Columns" and "Edit Private Columns" permission settings for a list created using the Form and List module.
-
-
+
+
- Select the Form and List Settings tab.
- At Negate permission/feature "Display All Columns" for Administrators, select from these options:
- - if to negate "Display All Columns" settings for Administrators.
- - to apply "Display All Columns" as set.
+ - Mark the check box if to negate "Display All Columns" settings for Administrators.
+ - Unmark the check box to apply "Display All Columns" as set.
- At Negate permission/feature "Edit Also Restricted Columns" for Administrators, select from these options:
-
- if to negate "Edit Also Restricted Columns" settings for Administrators.
- to apply "Edit Also Restricted Columns" as set.
-
+- Mark the check box if to negate "Edit Also Restricted Columns" settings for Administrators.
- Unmark the check box to apply "Edit Also Restricted Columns" as set.
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
For more on setting and modifying these permissions. See "Setting List Permissions" and See "Setting Form Permissions"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Form Permissions.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Form Permissions.html
index 533aabda9b9..289bb015e19 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Form Permissions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Form Permissions.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Setting Form Permissions
How to set permissions to manage form columns and submit a form created using the Form and List module. This setting is in addition to the usual module editing permissions for all modules. See "Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators" and See "Enabling/Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records"
-
-
+
- Select the Permissions tab.
- Set the typical DNN module permissions. See "Setting Module Permissions"
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Setting Form Permissions
-
Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames are unable to delete form records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission.
-
- Permission Granted: Permission to delete form records is granted to role members/username.
+ Permission Granted: Permission to delete form records is granted to role members/username.
-
Permission Denied: Permission to delete form records is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Setting Form Permissions
Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames are unable to submit the form unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission.
- Permission Granted: Permission to submit the form is granted to role members/username.
+ Permission Granted: Permission to submit the form is granted to role members/username.
Permission Denied: Permission to submit the form is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.
@@ -45,16 +45,16 @@ Setting Form Permissions
Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames cannot view all columns (including those not checked as Visible) unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission.
- Permission Granted: Permission to view all columns (including those not checked as Display On List) is granted to role members/username.
+ Permission Granted: Permission to view all columns (including those not checked as Display On List) is granted to role members/username.
Permission Denied: Permission to view all columns (including those not checked as Display On List) is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.
Edit Also Restricted Columns, set the following for each role/username:
-
- Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames cannot edit restricted columns unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission. Private columns is an Advanced Column Option for most column types.
+ Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames cannot edit restricted columns unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission. Private columns is an Advanced Column Option for most column types.
-
- Permission Granted: Permission to edit restricted columns is granted to role members/username.
+ Permission Granted: Permission to edit restricted columns is granted to role members/username.
-
Permission Denied: Permission to edit restricted columns is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.
@@ -63,13 +63,13 @@ Setting Form Permissions
Not Specified: Permission to view the submitted forms (Show Records) is unspecified and will be controlled based on the form configuration.
- Permission Granted: Permission to view the submitted forms (Show Records) is granted to role members/username.
+ Permission Granted: Permission to view the submitted forms (Show Records) is granted to role members/username.
Permission Denied: Permission to view the submitted forms (Show Records) is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting List Permissions.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting List Permissions.html
index 6ade71aad8b..d8724bd3a2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting List Permissions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting List Permissions.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Setting List Permissions
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Setting List Permissions
Tip: You may need to select at Filter By Group to view the correct permissions.
-
-
+
- Select the Permissions tab.
- At Permissions, set the typical DNN module permissions as usual. See "Setting Module Permissions"
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Setting List Permissions
- Edit Record, set the following for each role/username:
-
- Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames are unable to edit list records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission.
+ Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames are unable to edit list records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission.
- Permission Granted: Permission to edit all list record is granted to role members/username.
-
Permission Denied: Permission to edit all list records is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.
@@ -34,7 +33,7 @@ Setting List Permissions
- Delete Record, set the following for each role/username:
-
- Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames are unable to delete list records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission.
+ Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Role members/usernames are unable to delete list records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission, or if their username has been granted permission.
- Permission Granted: Permission to delete list records is granted to role members/username.
-
Permission Denied: Permission to delete list records is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.
@@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ Setting List Permissions
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Maximum Records Per User.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Maximum Records Per User.html
index 6bb16e28483..e38a631f220 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Maximum Records Per User.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Form And List/Settings/Setting Maximum Records Per User.html
@@ -1,18 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Setting Maximum Records Per User
How to set the maximum records each user can create on a list using the Forms and Lists module.
-
-
+
- Select the Form and List Settings tab.
- In the Max. Records per User text box, enter the maximum number of records each user can add to the list. Leave the field blank if no limit is set.
-
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Deleting a Filtered Word.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Deleting a Filtered Word.html
index 9592eb122a8..416b7a49d73 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Deleting a Filtered Word.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Deleting a Filtered Word.html
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
Deleting a Filtered Word
In the Filter column, locate the word to be deleted. See "Filtering Filter Words"
Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Enabling-Disabling Word Filtering.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Enabling-Disabling Word Filtering.html
index a4b400f995c..ad477ca49fa 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Enabling-Disabling Word Filtering.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Enabling-Disabling Word Filtering.html
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling Word Filtering
At Enable Word Filter, to enable word filtering in post body - OR - to disable. If this option is unchecked, skip to Step 5.
At Filter Subjects, to enable word filtering in the subject of posts - OR - to disable.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Forum User Ranking.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Forum User Ranking.html
index 16c17dc6696..1973e8721e8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Forum User Ranking.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Forum User Ranking.html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Managing Forum User Ranking
Repeat Steps 5 to manage 2nd-10th ranking fields.
Optional. In the No Ranking text box, enter a title to be displayed for users without any ranking. Note: If the Enable Images check box above is checked, then this option is not used.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Popular Thread Status.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Popular Thread Status.html
index 49c34ba15b0..1fd1afb3582 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Popular Thread Status.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Popular Thread Status.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Managing Popular Thread Status
In the Reply Count text box, enter the number of replies required before a thread is marked as popular - OR - leave blank if the number of replies not taken into account. The default setting is 10.
In the Active Within text box, enter the number of days since the last post for a thread to be marked as popular. The default setting is 7.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Rating of Threads.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Rating of Threads.html
index d6b6b5f9c95..07adc2dec8a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Rating of Threads.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Content/Managing Rating of Threads.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Managing Rating of Threads
In the left-hand panel, select Content > Rating. This displays the Rating Management window.
At Enable, to enable users to rate a thread - OR - to disable.
In the Rating Scale text box, enter a number that represents the highest rating for a thread. This sets the maximum number of stars. The default is 5. Note: Changing this will not update existing post ratings.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring General Forum Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring General Forum Settings.html
index 0bb3173cc83..732cde0bea6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring General Forum Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring General Forum Settings.html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Configuring General Forum Settings
At Disable HTML Posting, to use a plain text box to enter posts - OR - to use the Rich Text Editor and enable HTML posts.
At Date Last Indexed, the date and time when the Forum content was last indexed (added to DNN search) is displayed. To re-index forum content click the Reset link. This will re-index all forum content again and the new date will be displayed. Depending on how busy your Forum is you may like to make this a weekly, fortnightly or monthly task.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Community Management Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Community Management Settings.html
index 019ff1c29db..bea68d6a6a1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Community Management Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Community Management Settings.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
Configuring the Forum Community Management Settings
In the Profile Parameter Value text box, enter a value to be passed in combination with Parameter Name for the non-core module.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization .html
index ff948a8735f..6888276819a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization .html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization
At Override Keywords, to override the page keywords with ones pulled from within the module – OR - to disable.
At Latest Threads No Follow, to indicate that the destination hyperlinks in the initial group view SHOULD NOT be afforded any additional weight or ranking by user agents which perform link analysis upon web pages (E.g. search engines). Note: This applies to the links in initial group view (6,12,24,48, view latest threads) typically seen when first viewing a page with the forum module placed on it - OR - to disable.
In the Sitemap Priority text box, enter the SEO Sitemap priority per thread (this number must be between 0.0 and 1.0). The default is 0.5. Note: This will only be enabled if the Forum SEO Sitemap provider is installed.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Enabling-Disabling Attachments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Enabling-Disabling Attachments.html
index 8ba57fec648..841d08a3015 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Enabling-Disabling Attachments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Enabling-Disabling Attachments.html
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling Attachments
In the Attachments Path text box, edit the location where attachments are stored in the root directory of this site's Digital Asset Management module which is located on the Admin > File Management page. I.e. domain.com../../../../../Resources/
In the Max Attachment Size text box, edit the maximum size for attachments in KB. Note: Additionally, the size set here should be no larger than what is permitted in the web.config.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Managing RSS Feeds.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Managing RSS Feeds.html
index 0af0667bc8e..78f9583389a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Managing RSS Feeds.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Control Panel/Managing RSS Feeds.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Managing RSS Feeds
In the Threads Per Feed text box, enter the number of post threads to be displayed in the feed. The default value is 20 threads.
In the Time To Live text box, enter the frequency in minutes that the RSS is cached before refreshing. The default value is 30 minutes.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Settings.html
index ba7e921cddb..2576b60b5fb 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Settings.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Managing Email Settings
At Enable Edit Emails, to send a notification email to users when posts are edited - OR - to disable.
At Enable Email Queue, to send notifications using the schedule - OR - this feature is disabled.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Templates.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Templates.html
index ebf9a6a0844..064aff0d7c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Templates.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Email/Managing Email Templates.html
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
Managing Email Templates
In the HTML Email Body text box, edit the HTML version of the email.
In the Text Email Body text box, edit the text version of the email.
-
+ Click the Update button.
Note: The following replacement tokens are available to use in the subject and body of emails:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Deleting a Forum.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Deleting a Forum.html
index 7f08566a62f..706db39653f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Deleting a Forum.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Deleting a Forum.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Deleting a Forum
the Forum Group associated with the forum to be deleted.
Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Editing a Forum.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Editing a Forum.html
index b9ac598d118..609776a28db 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Editing a Forum.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Editing a Forum.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Editing a Forum
Click the Edit Forum button beside the required forum.
Edit any general settings (See "Adding a Forum"), forum options (See "Setting Forum Options" and See "Setting Forum Permissions") or forum email settings (See "Setting Forum Email") as required.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Enabling-Disabling a Forum.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Enabling-Disabling a Forum.html
index 970c2ed1060..0076e295553 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Enabling-Disabling a Forum.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Enabling-Disabling a Forum.html
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling a Forum
Complete Steps 1-4 of See "Editing a Forum" tutorial to access the Edit Forum page.
At Forum is Enabled, to enable this forum - OR - to disable it.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Loading Existing Forum Permissions.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Loading Existing Forum Permissions.html
index 466a06b3650..f3b023a40b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Loading Existing Forum Permissions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Loading Existing Forum Permissions.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
Loading Existing Forum Permissions
For each permission type (listed below), beside each role to grant that permission - OR - to deny that permission. Note: Some options may be disabled depending Forum Type of this forum.
- View: Select all roles that can view this forum.
- Start: Select all roles that can begin a new thread in this forum.
- Reply: Select all roles that can reply to a post in this forum.
- Moderate: Select all roles that can moderate on this forum. Administrators are enabled by default.
- Attach: Select all roles that can add an attachment to their posts for this forum. Administrators are enabled by default.
- Pin: Select all roles that can pin a thread on this forum. Pinned threads will appear at above other threads. Administrators are enabled by default.
- Lock: Select all roles that can lock a thread on this forum. Replies cannot be made to locked threads.
- Notify: Select all roles that to receive moderator notification from this forum.
- Unmoderated: Select all roles that do not require moderation.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Email.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Email.html
index ff1c29ae4e0..7b5e29ceb63 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Email.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Email.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Setting Forum Email
On the Edit Forum page, click on the Email link and complete these optional settings:
In the Forum "From" Email Address text box, edit the email address that will be displayed for all outgoing emails for this particular forum.
In the Email Display Name text box, enter the friendly display name used on outgoing emails sent from this forum.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Options.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Options.html
index 2f2514f82be..adf4e35174b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Options.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Forums/Setting Forum Options.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
Setting Forum Options
At Enable RSS Feed, to enable users to view an RSS feed for the specified forum (as long as it isn't Private) - OR - to disable.
At Enable Sitemap, to enable threads created within this forum will be exposed to the SEO Sitemap provider (as long as it isn't Private) - OR - to disable.
In the Site Map Priority text box, enter a number between 0.1- 1.0 that is used to determine the SEO Sitemap priority. This requires changes to your web.config, where you can add the forum SEO Sitemap provider manually.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring System Avatars.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring System Avatars.html
index 6b1474dc48c..0258bbcf6df 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring System Avatars.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring System Avatars.html
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
Configuring System Avatars
At Enable Role Avatars, select from these options:- to assign avatar images based on roles.
- In the Role Avatar Path text box, modify the folder where the Role Avatars are stored if required.
- to disable.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring the Default Forum User Interface.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring the Default Forum User Interface.html
index cff7bbc4da9..eaca9a04a37 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring the Default Forum User Interface.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Configuring the Default Forum User Interface.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
Configuring the Default Forum User Interface
At Display Region, to display the posters region - OR - to hide.
At Enable Quick Reply, to enable users to post replies directly in posts view. This uses a normal text box and not a Rich Text Editor and is only visible to those with proper posting permissions - OR - to disable.
At Enable User Tagging, to enable authenticated users to tag threads in public forums - OR - to disable.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing Global User Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing Global User Settings.html
index b30c821b56b..f2c92a7cb18 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing Global User Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing Global User Settings.html
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
Editing Global User Settings
At HTML Signatures, if users can use HTML code in their signatures - OR - to disable.
At User Banning, to ban user - to remove ban.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing any Forum Users Signature.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing any Forum Users Signature.html
index 0db3c2ab645..3c9b81c623c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing any Forum Users Signature.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Editing any Forum Users Signature.html
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Editing any Forum User's Signature
In the Signature text box, add/edit the user's signature. Basic HTML formatting may be disabled. See "Editing Global User Settings"
Optional. Click the Preview link to preview the signature. This displays a preview of the signature on this page.- Click the Edit link to edit this signature.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Enabling User Avatars.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Enabling User Avatars.html
index 3c4caead483..b92542e809c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Enabling User Avatars.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Administrators/Users/Enabling User Avatars.html
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
Enabling User Avatars
At Enable Role Avatars, select from these options:- to assign avatar images based on roles.
- In the Role Avatar Path text box, modify the folder where the Role Avatars are stored if required.
- to disable.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Settings.html
index a317fdf8c29..ca6ff966dcb 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Settings.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Editing your Forum Settings
At Moderator Emails, if the users will receive email notification of new posts awaiting moderation - OR - disable.
At Clear All Read Status, click the Clear Read Status link to clear all read status for all forums and threads for this user.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Signature.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Signature.html
index be2815c0302..5e2a34d145b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Signature.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Forum Members/Editing your Forum Signature.html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Editing your Forum Signature
- In the Signature text box, add/edit your signature. Basic HTML formatting may be disabled.
- Optional. Click the Preview link to preview the signature. This displays a preview of the signature on this page.
- Click the Edit link to edit this signature.
-
+ - Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Default Forum.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Default Forum.html
index 93638890408..483e9cbe350 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Default Forum.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Default Forum.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Default Forum
Go to the Forum Settings section.
At Default Forum, perform the following:- Maximize the forum group where the required forum resides.
- Check the required forum.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting Additional Forum Permissions.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting Additional Forum Permissions.html
index 336e471b668..4180e4d5825 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting Additional Forum Permissions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting Additional Forum Permissions.html
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
Setting Additional Forum Permissions
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting a Single or Aggregated Forum Group.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting a Single or Aggregated Forum Group.html
index 71a7503d360..3f11d577f4c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting a Single or Aggregated Forum Group.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Forum/Settings/Setting a Single or Aggregated Forum Group.html
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Setting a Single or Aggregated Forum Group
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/About the Gallery Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/About the Gallery Module.htm
index 1d491846aea..43c67bda3ab 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/About the Gallery Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/About the Gallery Module.htm
@@ -1,13 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Gallery Module
The Gallery module manages multiple media formats. Media files can be categorized into albums and displayed in different views including a slideshow. The Gallery module can be added to a page and registered users can being adding media to the default album without any configuration.
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 04.04.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 05.06.02
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Adminstrators/Configuring Admin Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Adminstrators/Configuring Admin Settings.html
index 03056ca5c1f..d59f0c8213e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Adminstrators/Configuring Admin Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Adminstrators/Configuring Admin Settings.html
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
-
+
Configuring Admin Settings
How to configure the administrative settings of the Gallery module including file upload size, available categories, themes and auto approval.
- - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu. This displays the Gallery Configuration page with the Admin Settings section expanded.
+ - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu. This displays the Gallery Configuration page with the Admin Settings section expanded.
- In the Root URL text box, edit the location where files are stored. Note: the specified Root URL will always be relative to the current site home directory. E.g. Portals/site/. Therefore, it is not possible to share media across multiple sites.
- At Created On, you can view the date this gallery was created.
- In the Quota text box, enter the maximum number of space available in kilobytes (kb) for all files in this gallery. The default is set to 0 which is no limit, however it is recommended that a limit be set.
- In the Max File Size text box, enter the maximum size in kilobytes (kb) for individual files being uploaded to the gallery. If files exceed this limit the user will be warned and the upload will fail. The default setting is 1000.
- In the Maximum Pending Uploads Size text box, enter the maximum size in kilobytes (kb) that files pending upload can grow to before they are committed to storage. The default setting is 0 (zero) which means no limitation. A maximum of 20000 kb or about 20 Mb is permitted.
- - At Auto Approval, to automatically approve uploaded files - OR - to require files to be approved by a module administrator.
- - At Build Cache On Start, to cache file and module configuration data and enhance performance (recommended) - OR - to remove caching.
+ - At Auto Approval, to automatically approve uploaded files - OR - to require files to be approved by a module administrator.
+ - At Build Cache On Start, to cache file and module configuration data and enhance performance (recommended) - OR - to remove caching.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Parent Album .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Parent Album .html
index baa74c026e4..c270f1b37c5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Parent Album .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Parent Album .html
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
Adding a Parent Album
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Sub-Album .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Sub-Album .html
index 40322dd818e..f0a3c1b0ba2 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Sub-Album .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Adding a Sub-Album .html
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
Adding a Sub-Album
-
- The child album is now in the Sub-Albums and Files Currently Contained In This Album section at the base of this page.
+ Click the Update button. The child album is now in the Sub-Albums and Files Currently Contained In This Album section at the base of this page.
- Click the Cancel button to return to the page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing Albums.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing Albums.html
index 45a84d981eb..a0fd0398a8b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing Albums.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing Albums.html
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
Editing Albums
- Edit any of the title, author, notes, location, description or categories fields as required.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing File Details .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing File Details .html
index ef215032c8e..a222483ac1c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing File Details .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Module Editors/Editing File Details .html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Editing File Details
In Standard View or Card View, mouse over the required image and the select Edit This Album - OR - In List View click the Edit button. This opens the File Edit page.
Edit one or more fields as required.
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Display Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Display Settings.html
index 47c7547c576..c89d5afac07 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Display Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Display Settings.html
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
-
+
Configuring Display Settings
- Page Editors can configure the display settings that define the design and layout of the Gallery. SuperUsers can modify the image and media extensions that can be uploaded to the Gallery. See "Managing Allowable File Extensions".
+ Page Editors can configure the display settings that define the design and layout of the Gallery. SuperUsers can modify the image and media extensions that can be uploaded to the Gallery. See "Managing Allowable File Extensions".
Important. The fields marked with an asterisk ( * ) below must be configured before adding albums and images to the gallery. They cannot be modified once albums and images have been added to the gallery unless all of the albums and images are deleted.
- - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu - OR - Click the Configuration button (typically located at the bottom right corner of the module). This displays the Gallery Configuration page.
+ - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu - OR - Click the Configuration button (typically located at the bottom right corner of the module). This displays the Gallery Configuration page.
- Maximize
the Display Settings section and edit any of the following default settings.
- At Theme, select the theme to change the layout and design for this module. The default theme is DNNSimple.See "Overview of Gallery Themes"
@@ -21,13 +21,13 @@ Configuring Display Settings
- In the Max Thumb Width* text box, enter the maximum pixel width thumbnails will be displayed in the gallery. The default is set to 100.
- In the Max Thumb Height* text box, enter the maximum pixel height thumbnails will be displayed in the gallery. The default is set to 100.
- In the Encoder Quality text box, enter the compression level (encoder quality) that JPEG images will be saved as. E.g.: Enter 10 for a higher rate of compression which will result in poor quality images; or enter 100 for no compression. The default setting is 80.
- - At Display Info, beside the information to be displayed for the media. Options are: Title, name, size, notes, author, location, description, created date, and approved date.
+ - At Display Info, beside the information to be displayed for the media. Options are: Title, name, size, notes, author, location, description, created date, and approved date.
- In the Category Values text box, add/edit the available file categories.
- At Sort Properties, beside the information to be available in the Sort field. Options are: Name, size, title, author, location, score, ownerID, created date, and approved date.
- - At Default Sort, select the default field which items are sorted by from the drop down list.
- At Descending, to set default sort order of files to descending order - OR - to use ascending order.
- - At Default View, select the default view (Card, List or Standard) that files will be displayed as when a user enters the gallery.
- At Visitors can change view, if users change views - OR - to only use the default view.
+ - At Default Sort, select the default field which items are sorted by from the drop down list.
- At Descending, to set default sort order of files to descending order - OR - to use ascending order.
+ - At Default View, select the default view (Card, List or Standard) that files will be displayed as when a user enters the gallery.
- At Visitors can change view, if users change views - OR - to only use the default view.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Feature Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Feature Settings.html
index 08693d4dfa4..c8b680930c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Feature Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Feature Settings.html
@@ -1,22 +1,22 @@
-
+
Configuring Feature Settings
Page Editors can to configure the feature settings of the Gallery module such as slideshow speed, watermarking, voting, downloading, etc.
- - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu - OR - Click the Configuration button which is typically located at the bottom right corner of the module. This displays the Gallery Configuration page.
+ - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu - OR - Click the Configuration button which is typically located at the bottom right corner of the module. This displays the Gallery Configuration page.
- Maximize
the Feature Settings section and edit any of the following settings:
- In the Slideshow Speed text box, enter the speed in milliseconds which the slideshow will move. The default setting is 3000.
- - At Enable Slideshow?, to enable the slideshow option - OR - to disable.
- - At Enable Popup?, to enable the gallery popup viewer - OR - to display images in the page.
- - At Multi Level Navigation Menu?, to enable breadcrumbs of menu levels. (E.g. Gallery > Parent Album > Child Album) - OR - to only display the current level. E.g. Child Album
- - At Enable Watermark?, to enable watermarking of images. See "Adding a Watermark" - OR - to disable watermarks.
- - At Enable Exif?, to enable users to view Exif metadata information - OR - to hide this data.
- - At Enable Voting?, to enable users to add votes and comments to images - OR - to disable.
- - At Enable Download?, to enable users to download files- OR - to prevent downloading.
+ - At Enable Slideshow?, to enable the slideshow option - OR - to disable.
+ - At Enable Popup?, to enable the gallery popup viewer - OR - to display images in the page.
+ - At Multi Level Navigation Menu?, to enable breadcrumbs of menu levels. (E.g. Gallery > Parent Album > Child Album) - OR - to only display the current level. E.g. Child Album
+ - At Enable Watermark?, to enable watermarking of images. See "Adding a Watermark" - OR - to disable watermarks.
+ - At Enable Exif?, to enable users to view Exif metadata information - OR - to hide this data.
+ - At Enable Voting?, to enable users to add votes and comments to images - OR - to disable.
+ - At Enable Download?, to enable users to download files- OR - to prevent downloading.
- At Download Roles, select from these options:
- If all authorized users can download files, skip to Step 4.
- Select which roles can download files as follows:
- Click the Search button.
- In the Find text box, enter the role name - OR - just the first letter(s) of the role name - OR - Leave blank to view all roles.
- Click the Go button. This displays the matching roles is the Name list below.
- Select the required role.
- Click the Add button to add the role.
- Repeat the above 5 steps to add additional roles.
- Click OK to save roles.
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
Configuring Feature Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Private Gallery.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Private Gallery.html
index 276224c576a..adfcadb3d10 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Private Gallery.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Gallery/Page Editors/Configuring Private Gallery.html
@@ -1,29 +1,29 @@
-
+
Configuring Private Gallery
Page Editors can create a private gallery using the Gallery module. This restricts the adding of files and sub albums to the selected gallery owner. Users who are authorized to view the gallery can view all approved files.
- - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu - OR - Click the Configuration button which is typically located at the bottom right corner of the module. This displays the Gallery Configuration page.
+ - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu - OR - Click the Configuration button which is typically located at the bottom right corner of the module. This displays the Gallery Configuration page.
- Maximize
the Private Gallery section.
- - At Is Private?, select from these options:
- to set the gallery as private.
- to set the gallery as public. Skip to Step 5.
+ - At Is Private?, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to set the gallery as private.
- Unmark the check box to set the gallery as public. Skip to Step 5.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
- - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu to return to the Private Gallery.
+ - Select Edit > Configuration from the Gallery module actions menu to return to the Private Gallery.
- Maximize
the Private Gallery section.
- - At Owner the name of the user who created the Private Gallery is displayed as the owner. You can select a different the gallery owner as follows:
- Click the Search button.
- In the Find text box, enter the username - OR - just the first letter(s) of the username - OR - Leave blank to view all users.
- Click the Go button. This displays the matching users in the Name/Display Name list.
- Select the required user.
- Click the OK button to confirm.
+ - At Owner the name of the user who created the Private Gallery is displayed as the owner. You can select a different the gallery owner as follows:
- Click the Search button.
- In the Find text box, enter the username - OR - just the first letter(s) of the username - OR - Leave blank to view all users.
- Click the Go button. This displays the matching users in the Name/Display Name list.
- Select the required user.
- Click the OK button to confirm.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/About the IFrame Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/About the IFrame Module.htm
index 51729dd61c9..1f2a2dfaaf8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/About the IFrame Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/About the IFrame Module.htm
@@ -1,13 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the IFrame Module
The IFrame module displays content from your website or another website within a frame inside a page. The IFrame can be used to frame content such as documents, PDF files, images or website pages. Optional settings include displaying a frame border or adding a scroll bar. The width and height of the IFrame can be set as required. A number of querystring parameters can also be set to customize the contents of the IFrame.
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 04.04.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 04.03.05
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying a Site Page in an IFrame.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying a Site Page in an IFrame.html
index fa4e8f6e6e2..5c0ed803ff4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying a Site Page in an IFrame.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying a Site Page in an IFrame.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Displaying a Site Page in an IFrame
How to display an internal file such as an image or document in the IFrame module.
- - Select Edit > Edit IFrame Options from the module actions menu to opens the Edit IFrame page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit IFrame Options from the module actions menu to opens the Edit IFrame page.
- Go to the Options section.
- At Source, select Page ( A Page On Your Site ).
- In the Select A Web Page From Your Site: select the required page name.
- The following optional settings are recommended:
-
- In the Width text box, enter the width for the IFrame in either pixels (E.g. 700) or as a percentage (E.g. 100%). If no width is entered a default height of 280 pixels is used.
- In the Height text box, enter a height for the IFrame in pixels. If no width is entered a default height of 130px will be used.
- At Auto Height, to automatically display the IFrame at 100% for this file - OR - to disable. This option only works for files located on your site.
- At Scrolling, select one of the following options:
+
- In the Width text box, enter the width for the IFrame in either pixels (E.g. 700) or as a percentage (E.g. 100%). If no width is entered a default height of 280 pixels is used.
- In the Height text box, enter a height for the IFrame in pixels. If no width is entered a default height of 130px will be used.
- At Auto Height, to automatically display the IFrame at 100% for this file - OR - to disable. This option only works for files located on your site.
- At Scrolling, select one of the following options:
- Auto: The scroll bar displays only when scrolling is required.
- No: No scroll bar is displayed. If this option is selected, ensure width and height settings are set to ensure all the content can be viewed as users will be unable to scroll.
- Yes: Scroll bars display at all times.
- At Border, select No to display the file without a border - OR - Select Yes to display a border around the IFramed content.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an External URL in an IFrame.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an External URL in an IFrame.html
index c85adb3e472..66a9f35d739 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an External URL in an IFrame.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an External URL in an IFrame.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Displaying an External URL in an IFrame
How to display an external URL such as a website page, an image or a file in the IFrame module.
Tip: It is good 'netiquette' (network etiquette) to request permission of a site owner before framing their content.
- - Select Edit > Edit IFrame Options from the module actions menu to opens the Edit IFrame page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit IFrame Options from the module actions menu to opens the Edit IFrame page.
- Go to the Options section.
- At Source, select URL ( A Link To An External Resource ).
- In the Location: ( Enter The Address Of The Link ) text box, enter the URL of the content to be displayed. E.g. http://www.domain.com/brochures/document.docx
@@ -17,7 +16,7 @@ Displaying an External URL in an IFrame
Optional. Maximize
the Other Options section to set any of the following fields:
- - At Allow Transparency, to enable transparency on the IFrame, or to disallow transparency.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this IFrame content. This name specifies a unique name of the IFrame (to use in scripts or as targets for links/IFrames).
- In the Tool Tip text box, enter the tool tip to be displayed when the user hovers their mouse over the IFrame.
- In the Css Style text box, enter a CSS style to be used.
- In the Onload (JavaScript) text box, enter the JavaScript to be executed when the page loads. This field can only be set by Administrators. You can do things like alert ("Here's my IFrame") that will pop up an alert box.
+ - At Allow Transparency, to enable transparency on the IFrame - OR - to disallow transparency.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this IFrame content. This name specifies a unique name of the IFrame (to use in scripts or as targets for links/IFrames).
- In the Tool Tip text box, enter the tool tip to be displayed when the user hovers their mouse over the IFrame.
- In the Css Style text box, enter a CSS style to be used.
- In the Onload (JavaScript) text box, enter the JavaScript to be executed when the page loads. This field can only be set by Administrators. You can do things like alert ("Here's my IFrame") that will pop up an alert box.
Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an Internal File in an IFrame.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an Internal File in an IFrame.html
index 6045e8addbf..25a6a375baa 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an Internal File in an IFrame.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/IFrame/Module Editors/Displaying an Internal File in an IFrame.html
@@ -1,22 +1,21 @@
-
+
-
Displaying an Internal File in an IFrame
How to display an internal file such as an image or document in the IFrame module. Note: If the document opens in a new window this may be a result of a setting on your Web browser.
- - Select Edit > Edit IFrame Options from the module actions menu to opens the Edit IFrame page.
+ - Select Edit > Edit IFrame Options from the module actions menu to opens the Edit IFrame page.
- Go to the Options section.
- At Source, select File ( A File On Your Site ).
- At File Location/File Name: select or upload the required file. See "Setting a File Link" or See "Uploading and Linking to a File"
- The following optional settings are recommended:
-
- In the Width text box, enter the width for the IFrame in either pixels (E.g. 700) or as a percentage (E.g. 100%). If no width is entered a default height of 280 pixels is used.
- In the Height text box, enter a height for the IFrame in pixels. If no width is entered a default height of 130px will be used.
- At Auto Height, to automatically display the IFrame at 100% for this file - OR - to disable. This option only works for files located on your site.
- At Scrolling, select one of the following options:
+
- In the Width text box, enter the width for the IFrame in either pixels (E.g. 700) or as a percentage (E.g. 100%). If no width is entered a default height of 280 pixels is used.
- In the Height text box, enter a height for the IFrame in pixels. If no width is entered a default height of 130px will be used.
- At Auto Height, to automatically display the IFrame at 100% for this file - OR - to disable. This option only works for files located on your site.
- At Scrolling, select one of the following options:
- Auto: The scroll bar displays only when scrolling is required.
- No: No scroll bar is displayed. If this option is selected, ensure width and height settings are set to ensure all the content can be viewed as users will be unable to scroll.
- Yes: Scroll bars display at all times.
- At Border, select No to display the file without a border - OR - Select Yes to display a border around the IFramed content.
- Optional. Maximize
the Other Options section to set any of the following fields:
-
- At Allow Transparency, to enable transparency on the IFrame, or to disallow transparency.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this IFrame content. This name specifies a unique name of the IFrames (to use in scripts or as targets for links/IFrames).
- In the Tool Tip text box, enter the tool tip to be displayed when the user hovers their mouse over the IFrame.
- In the Css Style text box, enter a Css style to be used.
- In the Onload (Javascript) text box, enter the JavaScript to execute when the page loads. This field can only be set by Administrators.
+ - At Allow Transparency, to enable transparency on the IFrame- OR - to disallow transparency.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this IFrame content. This name specifies a unique name of the IFrames (to use in scripts or as targets for links/IFrames).
- In the Tool Tip text box, enter the tool tip to be displayed when the user hovers their mouse over the IFrame.
- In the Css Style text box, enter a Css style to be used.
- In the Onload (Javascript) text box, enter the JavaScript to execute when the page loads. This field can only be set by Administrators.
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/About the Links Module.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/About the Links Module.html
index 3a1e0608c3b..cdbace74fca 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/About the Links Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/About the Links Module.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
About the Links Module
@@ -14,9 +13,7 @@ About the Links Module
Prevent link titles from wrapping
Display an icon beside all links in the module
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 06.02.01 / Minimum DNN Version: 06.02.00
Features: IPortable, ISearchable
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Adding a Link.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Adding a Link.html
index e807b622e23..55e119aff33 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Adding a Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Adding a Link.html
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
Adding a Link
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Editing a Link.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Editing a Link.html
index d0b043ae707..005bf75e7be 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Editing a Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Module Editors/Editing a Link.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
Editing a Link
- Edit any of the fields.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Drop Down List.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Drop Down List.html
index b4e47f3ae6d..813cd8cf4aa 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Drop Down List.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Drop Down List.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Displaying Links in a Drop Down List
How to display links in a drop down list on the Links module. This setting is available for all three modes: link, menu and folder.
-
-
+
- Select the Links Settings tab.
- At Control Type, select Dropdown.
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Displaying Links in a Drop Down List
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Horizontal or Vertical List.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Horizontal or Vertical List.html
index 94aa91f99e3..e4ddd23286f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Horizontal or Vertical List.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying Links in a Horizontal or Vertical List.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Displaying Links in a Horizontal or Vertical List
How to set links to display either vertically or horizontally on the Links module. This setting is available for all three modes: link, menu and folder.
-
-
+
- Select the Links Settings tab.
- At Control Type, select List.
@@ -19,7 +18,7 @@ Displaying Links in a Horizontal or Vertical List
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying an Icon beside Links.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying an Icon beside Links.html
index ea6f988f407..a2da461ee6d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying an Icon beside Links.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Displaying an Icon beside Links.html
@@ -1,20 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Displaying an Icon beside Links
How to display one icon image beside all of links in the Links module. This setting is only available in Link mode.
-
-
+
- Select the Links Settings tab.
- At Display Icon select from these options:
- To display icons, upload and/or select the required image. See "Setting a Page Link" or See "Uploading and Linking to a File"
- To remove icons, select None at the File Name field.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Role Permissions for Links.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Role Permissions for Links.html
index 50100c5731a..8d8c722f3d7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Role Permissions for Links.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Role Permissions for Links.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling Role Permissions for Links
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Enabling/Disabling Role Permissions for Links
Important. Applying this setting to a module with existing links may change the visibility of those links depending on the permissions that were selected when the links were added. The default permissions used when adding a new link is to set the link as visible to the Administrators role only. If permissions aren't used, then these links remain visible to all users who are authorized to view the module. However if permissions are applied at a later time, then these links will only be visible to Administrators.
-
-
+
- Select the Links Settings tab.
- At Use Permission, select from these options:
@@ -20,7 +19,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling Role Permissions for Links
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Wrapping of Link Titles.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Wrapping of Link Titles.html
index 7e7ab0d1009..59203deec7b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Wrapping of Link Titles.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling Wrapping of Link Titles.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling Wrapping of Link Titles
How to set links to allow or prevent the link title from wrapping within the Links module. When wrapping is allowed, link titles may be displayed on more than one line to suit the width of the pane where the module is located. When no wrapping is set, the link title displays in a single line regardless of the pane width. As a result, the module may expand the pane width to accommodate the longest link. Note: This option isn't available for links displayed in a drop down list.
-
-
+
- Select the Links Settings tab.
- At Wrap Links, select Wrap to allow wrapping - OR - No Wrap to prevent wrapping.
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Enabling/Disabling Wrapping of Link Titles
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Info Link.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Info Link.html
index 3963d1b89e2..7b4ed01ad59 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Info Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the Info Link.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling the Info Link
How to enable or disable the Info link beside links on the Links module. The Info link displays as a series of leader dots ( ... ) to the right of each link. Clicking the info link reveals additional information for that link below the link title. This setting is available for all modes. In Link mode, the info link displays the description entered for the link. In Menu mode the info link displays the page description. In Folder mode the info link displays file size. If a page or link description hasn't been entered then the info link isn't displayed on those links.
-
-
+
- Select the Links Settings tab.
- At Display Info Link, select Yes to display the info link - OR - No to hide the info link.
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Enabling/Disabling the Info Link
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Setting the Links Mode.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Setting the Links Mode.html
index 2a704880795..626b5f3e131 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Setting the Links Mode.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Links/Settings/Setting the Links Mode.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Setting the Links Mode
@@ -10,7 +9,7 @@ Setting the Links Mode
Note 2: In Folder mode, the icon associated which each file type is automatically displayed for each file.
-
-
+
- Select the Links Settings tab.
- At Module Mode, select from these options:
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@
Setting the Links Mode
- At the second drop down list, select the parent page.
- Folder: Select to display a list of the files within a selected folder of the site's Digital Asset Management module which is located on the Admin > File Management page. This reveals a second drop down list.
- At the second drop down list, select the Folder name.
- Friends: Select to display a list of the users that you are 'friends' with on this site or have a pending friendship request from.
- Select from these options:
- Normal: Select to display friends in a typical list.
- At Display Attribute, select the user profile attribute to be used for the link and then choose to display links in either Asc (ascending) or Desc (descending) order.
- Business Card: Select to view friends profiles in a business card layout. This layout display additional information such as the status of your friendship (E.g. pending or accepted) and information about your friends.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/About the Media Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/About the Media Module.htm
index 483f4c3e653..b4bc3a2923c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/About the Media Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/About the Media Module.htm
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
-
+
About the Media Module
The Media module (formerly known as the Image module) displays a single media file that can be either an image, movie or sound file. The displayed file can be located on the site, at any URL or on Microsoft Azure. A large number of media types are supported including Flash, Windows media, Media AVI, MPEG, MPG, MP3, MP4, ASF, ASX, WMA, WMV, WAV, QuickTime and Real Video. Optional settings include linking an image to another resource such as another page, file, or website.
The module is integrated with social collaboration tools to allow media updates to be posted to the Journal module.
- Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on this DNN installation by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 04.03.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 06.02.00
Features: IPortable, ISearchable
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
About the Media Module
The Media Module displaying a sound file
-
+
- http://dnnmedia.codeplex.com/
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Administrators/Configuring Social Integration Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Administrators/Configuring Social Integration Settings.html
index dde5ab6f892..ac1eb96b0d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Administrators/Configuring Social Integration Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Administrators/Configuring Social Integration Settings.html
@@ -1,29 +1,30 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Social Integration Settings
How to display a sound file using the Media module. The Media module displays controls with play, pause, rewind, volume and other buttons enabling users to manage the sound. Sound file types include mp3, mwa, etc. Note: If the video or Flash is located on your site, you may need the Host to enable you to upload some file types.
- - Select Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
- Expand the Social Integration section. Here you can see the settings applied to this instance of the Media module and whether those settings are applied to all instances of the Media module. For example, in the below image you can see that media updates will be posted to a user's Journal for all media modules on this site. Users will have the ability to override this setting if they don't want to post the media to their journal, however this is the default selection given to them.
- - At Override Site Settings, if you want to change the default settings applied to all Media modules.
+ - At Override Site Settings, if you want to change the default settings applied to all Media modules.
- - At Post To Journal, to post details of new and updated Media to the user's Journal as the default setting - OR - to add and update media without posting to a user's Journal as the default setting.
- - At For All Media Modules, to set this as the site wide setting for all Media modules.
- - At Notify Administrators on Update, to notify all Administrators whenever there is an update made on any Media module on this site - OR -
-
+ - At Post To Journal, to post details of new and updated Media to the user's Journal as the default setting - OR - to add and update media without posting to a user's Journal as the default setting.
+ - At For All Media Modules, to set this as the site wide setting for all Media modules.
+ - At Notify Administrators on Update, to notify all Administrators whenever there is an update made on any Media module on this site - OR -
+ -
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Embedded Code.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Embedded Code.html
index 8f59be7fe4e..ae9da4fc6e4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Embedded Code.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Embedded Code.html
@@ -1,18 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Displaying Embedded Code
- How to embed media from existing sites and social media outlets such as YouTube, Vimeo, or Twitter in the Media module. The process by which you obtain embedded code will depend on the site, however it is typically as easy as copying and pasting the embed code from the site.
- For Example, to obtain the embed code from YouTube, simply click the Share button on the media and then copy the embed code that is displayed. You might like to change some of the default options such as media size.
+ How to embed media from existing sites and social media outlets such as YouTube, Vimeo, or Twitter in the Media module. The process by which you obtain embedded code will depend on the site, however it is typically as easy as copying and pasting the embed code from the site. E.g. To obtain the embed code from YouTube, simply click the Share button on the media and then copy the embed code that is displayed. You might like to change some of the default options such as media size.
Tip: Once embedded code has been set on a module, you may be unable to edit it if the module action menu is hidden behind the video. A workaround solution is to switch your Control Panel to Layout mode, delete the module and then add and set-up a new Media module.
- - Select Edit > Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
- Expand the Specify Your Media section.
- At Media Type, select Embed Code.
- In the Embed Code text box, enter or paste the code to be embedded.
- In the Alternate Text text box, enter text describing the video, image, etc. This text is not displayed but is a required field.
@@ -28,12 +26,12 @@ Displaying Embedded Code
- In the Only Videos and Flash Use the Following Settings section, review the message and then set the following:
-
- Optional. At Auto-Start Videos, to automatically start the video when the page loads - OR - to require the user to manually start the video.
- Optional. At Loop Videos, to automatically loop the video when it ends - OR - to only play the video once. User can choose to replay videos that are not looped using the controls.
+ - Optional. At Auto-Start Videos, to automatically start the video when the page loads - OR - to require the user to manually start the video.
- Optional. At Loop Videos, to automatically loop the video when it ends - OR - to only play the video once. User can choose to replay videos that are not looped using the controls.
- Optional. To share this media on your Journal, expand the Social Integration section.
- - At Post To Journal, to post details of this media to your Journal - OR - to add the media without posting to your Journal. Note: If this setting has been pre-set by an Administrator for all Media modules on this site, then you will be prevented from changing this setting without first checking the "Override Site Settings" check box below.
- - At Override Site Settings, to override the site wide settings for Media modules that has been set by an Administrator - OR - to use the site wide settings.
+ - At Post To Journal, to post details of this media to your Journal - OR - to add the media without posting to your Journal. Note: If this setting has been pre-set by an Administrator for all Media modules on this site, then you will be prevented from changing this setting without first checking the "Override Site Settings" check box below.
+ - At Override Site Settings, to override the site wide settings for Media modules that has been set by an Administrator - OR - to use the site wide settings.
@@ -41,7 +39,7 @@
Displaying Embedded Code
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Media using OEmbed Link.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Media using OEmbed Link.html
index 8f91479a624..bd577f14c5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Media using OEmbed Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Media using OEmbed Link.html
@@ -1,14 +1,12 @@
-
+
-
Displaying Media using OEmbed Link
- How to display media using an OEmbedded link from existing sites and social media outlets such as YouTube using the Media module. This method is widely supported and only requires the URL where the movie is located.
- Note: Once the media has been set on a module, you may be unable to edit it if the module action menu is hidden behind the video. A workaround solution is to switch your Control Panel to Layout mode, delete the module and then add and set-up a new Media module.
+ How to display media using an OEmbedded link from existing sites and social media outlets such as YouTube using the Media module. This method is widely supported and only requires the URL where the movie is located. Note: Once the media has been set on a module, you may be unable to edit it if the module action menu is hidden behind the video. A workaround solution is to switch your Control Panel to Layout mode, delete the module and then add and set-up a new Media module.
- - Select Edit > Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Edit > Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
- Expand the Specify Your Media section.
- At Media Type, select Website URL.
- In the Embedable URL text box, enter or paste the URL.
- Click the Validate URL link. This displays a message informing you if the URL you enter is supported or not. If the URL is not supported, you may instead be able to access and embed the code. See "Displaying Embedded Code"
- In the Alternate Text text box, enter text describing the video, image, etc. This text is not displayed but is a required field.
@@ -24,16 +22,16 @@ Displaying Media using OEmbed Link
- In the Only Videos and Flash Use the Following Settings section, review the message and then set the following:
-
- Optional. At Auto-Start Videos, to automatically start the video when the page loads - OR - to require the user to manually start the video.
- Optional. At Loop Videos, to automatically loop the video when it ends - OR - to only play the video once. User can choose to replay videos that are not looped using the controls.
+ - Optional. At Auto-Start Videos, to automatically start the video when the page loads - OR - to require the user to manually start the video.
- Optional. At Loop Videos, to automatically loop the video when it ends - OR - to only play the video once. User can choose to replay videos that are not looped using the controls.
- Expand the Social Integration section and set the following:
-
- At Post To Journal, to post details of this media to your Journal - OR - to add the media without posting to your Journal. Note: If this setting has been pre-set by an Administrator for all Media modules on this site, then you will be prevented from changing this setting without first checking the "Override Site Settings" check box below.
- At Override Site Settings, to override the site wide settings for Media modules that has been set by an Administrator - OR - to use the site wide settings.
+ - At Post To Journal, to post details of this media to your Journal - OR - to add the media without posting to your Journal. Note: If this setting has been pre-set by an Administrator for all Media modules on this site, then you will be prevented from changing this setting without first checking the "Override Site Settings" check box below.
- At Override Site Settings, to override the site wide settings for Media modules that has been set by an Administrator - OR - to use the site wide settings.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Video and Flash.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Video and Flash.html
index b1e19147cca..ad6352aa709 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Video and Flash.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying Video and Flash.html
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
-
+
-
Displaying Video and Flash
How to display video or Flash using the Media module. The video displays controls that enables users to play, pause, rewind, volume and other controls is automatically displayed for the movie. Video file types include Flash files (swf), wmv, avi, etc. If the video or Flash is located on your site, you may need the Host to enable you to upload some file types.
- - Select Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
- Expand the Specify Your Media section.
- At Media Type, select Standard File System.
- At File Location/Link Type select URL or File as the file location and then set the link. See "Setting a URL Link", See "Setting a File Link", or See "Uploading and Linking to a File"
-
@@ -25,7 +24,7 @@
Displaying Video and Flash
- In the Only Videos and Flash Use the Following Settings section, read the warning message and then set the following options:
-
- At Auto-Start Videos, to automatically start the video when the page loads - OR - to require the user to manually start the video.
- At Loop Videos, to automatically loop the video when it finishes - OR - to only play the video once. Users must Refresh the page to replay videos which are not looped using the controls.
+ - At Auto-Start Videos, to automatically start the video when the page loads - OR - to require the user to manually start the video.
- At Loop Videos, to automatically loop the video when it finishes - OR - to only play the video once. Users must Refresh the page to replay videos which are not looped using the controls.
@@ -33,14 +32,14 @@
Displaying Video and Flash
- Expand the Social Integration section and set the following:
-
- At Post To Journal, to post details of this media to your Journal - OR - to add the media without posting to your Journal. Note: If this setting has been pre-set by an Administrator for all Media modules on this site, then you will be prevented from changing this setting without first checking the "Override Site Settings" check box below.
- At Override Site Settings, to override the site wide settings for Media modules that has been set by an Administrator - OR - to use the site wide settings.
+ At Post To Journal, to post details of this media to your Journal - OR - to add the media without posting to your Journal. Note: If this setting has been pre-set by an Administrator for all Media modules on this site, then you will be prevented from changing this setting without first checking the "Override Site Settings" check box below.- At Override Site Settings, to override the site wide settings for Media modules that has been set by an Administrator - OR - to use the site wide settings.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying a Sound File .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying a Sound File .html
index 3d7bd670957..647af340471 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying a Sound File .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying a Sound File .html
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
Displaying a Sound File
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying an Image with an optional Link.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying an Image with an optional Link.html
index 4a7b95b638a..008b991a546 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying an Image with an optional Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Displaying an Image with an optional Link.html
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
Displaying an Image with an optional Link
- - The image will now be displayed and (if chosen) posted to your journal.
+ - Click the Update button. The image will now be displayed and (if chosen) posted to your journal.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Editing Media Options .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Editing Media Options .html
index 8796f5fa631..24dcdb53345 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Editing Media Options .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Media/Module Editors/Editing Media Options .html
@@ -1,15 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Editing Media Options
How to edit the media that has been set to display in the Media module.
- - Select Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
+ - Select Edit Media Options from the module actions menu.
- Edit the required fields. Note: To reset images to their original size, remove the Width and Height values from those fields.
-
+ -
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/About the News Feeds Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/About the News Feeds Module.htm
index e693a6eb8f0..e87c7ba1ca5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/About the News Feeds Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/About the News Feeds Module.htm
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the News Feeds Module
The News Feeds (RSS) module displays a summary list of news feeds from one or more sources. A news feed is a dynamically generated list of news items. RSS is an acronym for Really Simple Syndication. Each news item typically includes a date/time stamp, a linked title to read the news item in full, and a brief description. A selection of pre-defined layouts are included allowing you to display the news items in either a static list, as a single scrolling 'ticker' list, as a vertical scrolling list, or in a custom format.
- Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on this DNN installation by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 05.00.01 /Minimum DNN Version: 07.00.00
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds from Syndicated Modules.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds from Syndicated Modules.html
index d919fe6c329..e210359ab68 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds from Syndicated Modules.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds from Syndicated Modules.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
Adding News Feeds from Syndicated Modules
- In the Cache Time text box, enter the number of minutes between refreshes of this feed - OR - Leave this field as -1 to use the default setting for this feed.
-
- This displays the name of the newly added feed.
+ Click the Update button. This displays the name of the newly added feed.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds.html
index a6999635b66..477f799504e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Adding News Feeds.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
Adding News Feeds
-
- This displays the name of the newly added feed.
+ Click the Update button. This displays the name of the newly added feed.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Editing News Feeds.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Editing News Feeds.html
index 60283105b34..2fa4c4ad257 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Editing News Feeds.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Module Editors/Editing News Feeds.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Editing News Feeds
- Edit the details as required.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
- Repeat Steps 2-4 to edit additional feeds.
- Click the Return button to return to the page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring Feed Retrieval Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring Feed Retrieval Settings.html
index 2e0a1a66122..3418cb0fa57 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring Feed Retrieval Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring Feed Retrieval Settings.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,17 +8,18 @@ Configuring Feed Retrieval Settings
Tip: By default, Ajax is disabled and Background Download is enabled. These are the recommended settings.
-
-
+
+
- Select the News Module Settings tab.
- - At Use Ajax, to enable Ajax - OR - to disable Ajax.
- - At Background Download, to enable background loading - OR - to disable.
+ - At Use Ajax, to enable Ajax - OR - to disable Ajax.
+ - At Background Download, to enable background loading - OR - to disable.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring News Retry Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring News Retry Settings.html
index cd23980bed1..4eb96e4b5a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring News Retry Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Configuring News Retry Settings.html
@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
-
+
-
Configuring News Retry Settings
How to configure the retry settings for retrieving news feeds on the News Feeds (RSS) module.
-
-
+
+
- Select the News Module Settings tab.
- In the Retry Times text box, enter the number of times the module should attempt to load a feed before waiting for a longer period. The default setting is 3.
- In the Retry TimeOut text box, enter the number of minutes between retries. The default setting is 120.
@@ -17,7 +17,9 @@ Configuring News Retry Settings
-
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting Default News Caching.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting Default News Caching.html
index d7b616457e5..07195eaecac 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting Default News Caching.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting Default News Caching.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting Default News Caching
How to set the default cache time for all news items within the News Feeds (RSS) module.
-
-
+
- Select the News Module Settings tab.
- In the Default Cache Time text box, enter the default cache time for all news items. This setting is overridden by the cache time set for each news feed. The default setting is 30.
@@ -17,7 +16,9 @@ Setting Default News Caching
-
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting News Layout.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting News Layout.html
index 287cff96cf7..d65ef427143 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting News Layout.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting News Layout.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting News Layout
How to change the layout of news items in a News Feeds (RSS) module by changing the XSL Transformation file applied to the module.
-
-
+
- Select the News Module Settings tab.
- At Xsl Transformation, select a XSL transformation from these options:
@@ -50,7 +49,7 @@
Setting News Layout
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting the Number and Details of News Items .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting the Number and Details of News Items .html
index 2eb047b74f6..e8991f98c04 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting the Number and Details of News Items .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/News Feeds/Settings/Setting the Number and Details of News Items .html
@@ -1,28 +1,27 @@
-
+
-
Setting the Number and Details of News Items
How to set the number of news items as well as the details of each news item displayed on the News Feeds (RSS) module. Note: "Show Item Details" and "Show Item Date" are passed as parameters to the XSL sheet. If you are using a custom XSL sheet and wish to use these parameters you have to include them on the sheet. See the default sheets for an example.
-
-
+
- Select the News Module Settings tab.
- In the Items To Show text box, enter the number of news items to be displayed - OR - Enter -1 to use the number set by the news feed provider.
- At Show Item Details, select from the following:
-
- Check the check box to display a brief description of each item. The description is the beginning of the news item.
- to hide the description.
+ - Mark the check box to display a brief description of each item. The description is the beginning of the news item.
- Unmark the check box to hide the description.
- At Show Item Date, select from the following:
-
- Check the check box to display the date and time for each item.
- to hide the date and time.
+ - Check the check box to display the date and time for each item.
- Unmark the check box to hide the date and time.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/About the Reports Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/About the Reports Module.htm
index 823865044fe..87e596f40fa 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/About the Reports Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/About the Reports Module.htm
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Reports Module
The Reports module displays the results of an SQL query to the database of the site. The report is displayed as a series of records. The Reports Module is designed to query a tabular data store (such as a Relational Database like Microsoft SQL Server) and visualize the results. Only the Host is able to create reports. Page Editors are able to configure a range of setting that control the way reports are displayed in the module.
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 05.05.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 05.04.04
@@ -15,7 +16,8 @@
About the Reports Module
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/About the Data Source Settings Warning Message .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/About the Data Source Settings Warning Message .html
index a6f4773f839..4fd7c034045 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/About the Data Source Settings Warning Message .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/About the Data Source Settings Warning Message .html
@@ -1,22 +1,9 @@
-
-
+
+
-
About the Data Source Settings Warning Message
-
-
-
- The following Red Warning Message is displayed to Page Editors and Administrators on the Reports Settings - Data Source Settings section on the Module Settings page of the Reports module: For security and privacy reasons, only Host Users (SuperUsers) are permitted to edit these settings.
- This message informs users that only SuperUsers are able to edit the Data Source Settings of the Reports module.
-
-
-
Security warning message
-
-
-
-
-
+ The following Red Warning Message is displayed to Page Editors and Administrators on the Reports Settings - Data Source Settings section on the Module Settings page of the Reports module: "For security and privacy reasons, only Host Users (SuperUsers) are permitted to edit these settings". This message informs users that only SuperUsers are able to edit the Data Source Settings of the Reports module.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring Display and Caching Settings .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring Display and Caching Settings .html
index 162851a2c07..939d2059799 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring Display and Caching Settings .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring Display and Caching Settings .html
@@ -1,29 +1,28 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Display and Caching Settings
How to configure the Display and Caching Settings on the Reports module. Note: The Data Source Settings for this module must first be configured by the Host to display any data.
-
-
+
- Select the Report Settings tab.
- Go to the Display and Caching Settings section.
- - At Caching, select from the following options:
- to enable data caching. If checked you can enter the amount of time to cache the data for, in minutes. Note: the following warning will also be displayed: Warning! Enabling Caching when using parameters is a security and privacy risk. See the Reports Module documentation for details
- to disable data caching.
+ - At Caching, select from the following options:
- to enable data caching. If checked you can enter the amount of time to cache the data for, in minutes. Note: the following warning will also be displayed: " Warning! Enabling Caching when using parameters is a security and privacy risk. See the Reports Module documentation for details ".
- to disable data caching.
- At Show Info Pane, select from the following options:
- to display the Info Pane on the view page for the module. The Info Pane displays the title and description of the Report for users.
- to hide the Info pane.
- At Show Controls, select from the following options:
- to display the Run Report and Hide Report Result links on the module.
- to hide the Run Report and Hide Report Result links on the module.
- At Auto Run Report, select from the following options:
- to automatically run the report when a user views the page. Note: By default, a report is automatically run when a user views the module. However, many reports can be time-consuming and resource-intensive. In this case, the Auto Run Report setting can be displayed. However, in order to allow users to run the report the Show Controls setting must be enabled. Note: The module does not, in the current version, automatically enable this setting.
- to manually run a report.
- At Active Visualizer, select one of the available visualizers. By default, there are three visualizers supplied with the Reports module: the Grid Visualizer, the HTML Template Visualizer and the XSL Transformation Visualizer. The default option of Grid Visualizer does not require any files to be uploaded, unlike the other two options. Once you have selected a Visualizer, a number of additional settings specific to the selected option are displayed. For more details See "Configuring the Chart Visualizer Settings", See "Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings", See "Configuring the HTML Template Visualizer Settings", See "Configuring the XSL Transformation Visualizer Settings" and See "Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings".
-
+
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Chart Visualizer Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Chart Visualizer Settings.html
index ae95d8a2664..9cc32358be5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Chart Visualizer Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Chart Visualizer Settings.html
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Configuring the Chart Visualizer Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Tip: In its current version, the Chart Visualizer is limited to displaying this form of Bar Chart. It is limited to displaying the value of one column as the height of the bar. The Chart Visualizer is not installed by default. After installing the module, the installation packages can be found in the DesktopModules/Reports/Install/Visualizers folder. See the section on installing the Chart Visualizer for details. See Managing Reports Module Add-Ins for information on installing Visualizers and Data Sources.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings.html
index 8c909daad59..ef08a6365aa 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings
@@ -9,9 +8,9 @@ Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings
Here's how to set the Grid Visualizer settings on the Active Visualizer:
- At Active Visualizer, select Grid Visualizer. The following additional setting are displayed:
- - At Enable Paging?, to enable paging on the grid, or to disable paging and display all data on one page.
- In the Page Size text box, enter the number of rows to be displayed on each page of data.
- - At Enable Sorting?, to enable users to sort data by clicking on a column header to sort by that column, or to disable sorting. If Show Header? is not checked, this setting has no effect.
- - At Show Header?, to display of column headers on the Grid, or to hide headers.
+ - At Enable Paging?, to enable paging on the grid - OR - to disable paging and display all data on one page.
- In the Page Size text box, enter the number of rows to be displayed on each page of data.
+ - At Enable Sorting?, to enable users to sort data by clicking on a column header to sort by that column- OR - to disable sorting. If Show Header? is not checked, this setting has no effect.
+ - At Show Header?, to display of column headers on the Grid- OR - to hide headers.
- At Grid Lines, select an option to control the appearance of grid lines on reports. Select from the following options:
- Both: Select to display both horizontal and vertical lines.
- Horizontal: Select to display horizontal lines only.
- None: Select to hide all lines.
- Vertical: Select to display vertical lines only.
- In the Additional CSS text box, enter any additional CSS attributes to be placed in the 'style' attribute of the 'table' element produced by this visualizer.
- In the CSS Class text box, enter a list (separated by single spaces) of CSS classes to apply to the 'table' element produced by this visualizer. For more details see CSS Formatting below.
@@ -20,7 +19,9 @@ Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings
-
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the HTML Template Visualizer Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the HTML Template Visualizer Settings.html
index e9cdb0abf4c..2ca6399557a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the HTML Template Visualizer Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the HTML Template Visualizer Settings.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Configuring the HTML Template Visualizer Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
E.g. The following HTML Template was used to produce the output seen below.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings.html
index 49b67cf6c3c..72234937e7f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings
@@ -16,10 +15,10 @@ Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings
- In the Height text box, enter the height of the ReportViewer control used to display the report in pixels.
- At Show, this field indicates which toolbars, buttons, and other controls to display on the ReportViewer control.
- At Report Type, this field indicates if the ReportViewer should operate in Local Report or Server Report mode. Depending on your choice for the Report Type setting, the module will enter one of these modes.
- - At Local Report Mode, the following settings are available in Local Report Mode:
- Data Source Name: The name of the data source, defined in the RDLC file, to populate with data from the Reports Module Data Source.
- Report File: The location of the RDLC file defining the Report to display.
- Enable External Images: Check this check box to allow the visualizer to load images from other sites referenced by the Report.
- Enable Hyperlinks: Check this check box to allow the visualizer to display hyperlinks defined in the Report.
- - At Server Report Mode, the following settings are available in Server Report Mode:
- Server Url: A URL referring to the Web Service interface to an SSRS instance.
- Server Report Path: The path, within the SSRS server, to the Report you wish to display.
- User Name: The user name to use when authenticating to the SSRS server.
- Password: The password to use when authenticating to the SSRS server.
- Domain: The Active Directory domain to use when authenticating to the SSRS server.
+ - At Local Report Mode, the following settings are available in Local Report Mode:
- Data Source Name: The name of the data source, defined in the RDLC file, to populate with data from the Reports Module Data Source.
- Report File: The location of the RDLC file defining the Report to display.
- Enable External Images: to allow the visualizer to load images from other sites referenced by the Report.
- Enable Hyperlinks: to allow the visualizer to display hyperlinks defined in the Report.
+ - At Server Report Mode, the following settings are available in Server Report Mode:
- Server Url: A URL referring to the Web Service interface to an SSRS instance.
- Server Report Path: The path, within the SSRS server, to the Report you wish to display.
- User Name: The user name to use when authenticating to the SSRS server.
- Password: The password to use when authenticating to the SSRS server.
- Domain: The Active Directory domain to use when authenticating to the SSRS server.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the XSL Transformation Visualizer Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the XSL Transformation Visualizer Settings.html
index 4618f1187d6..86e64095f35 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the XSL Transformation Visualizer Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Configuring the XSL Transformation Visualizer Settings.html
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Configuring the XSL Transformation Visualizer Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Special Note Regarding Caching .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Special Note Regarding Caching .html
index cf12afb917c..107fabaa5f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Special Note Regarding Caching .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/Settings/Special Note Regarding Caching .html
@@ -1,21 +1,9 @@
-
+
-
Special Note Regarding Caching
-
-
-
When caching is enabled, a single copy of the data retrieved by the Data Source is stored in-memory so that future requests for the same report can use the cached data rather than re-executing the Data Source. However, since this cached copy is always used to satisfy requests, any parameters you have used in your queries will be disregarded. Therefore, when using caching, parameterized queries are not allowed. If you use parameters in your query and enable caching, you will see an error message similar to the following when trying to run the report: "There was an error while executing the configured data source: There is an error in your SQL at line 1: Must declare the scalar variable "@ParameterName""
-
-
-
An Error Report
-
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/SuperUsers/Installing the Chart Visualizer.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/SuperUsers/Installing the Chart Visualizer.html
index 905007e21f8..7911753d9b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/SuperUsers/Installing the Chart Visualizer.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Reports/SuperUsers/Installing the Chart Visualizer.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,7 +8,6 @@ Installing the Chart Visualizer
is not included with the Report module, however it can be installed and downloaded from SourceForge. In its current version, the Chart Visualizer is limited to displaying this form of Bar Chart. It is limited to displaying the value of one column as the height of the bar. Note: The Chart Visualizer requires that your site is running in a Fully Trusted environment. If you are in a shared hosting environment, you may need to contact your hosting provider to have your site moved to a Full Trust environment. See "Enabling Full Trust for DNN Sites"
Here's how to install the Chart Visualizer:
- test
- Install the Reports module. The installation packages can be found in the DesktopModules/Reports/Install/Visualizers folder.
- The Chart Visualizer requires that the ZedGraph library be installed before it can be successfully installed. In order to do this, download the files from SourceForge. It is important to download the 5.1.1 version as the latest version(s) do not work.) and download the DLL Only package. Then upload ZedGraph.dll and ZedGraph.Web.dll to your website's Bin folder. The Chart Visualizer can now be installed.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/About the Repository Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/About the Repository Module.htm
index b6d47418c57..1328b4f83ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/About the Repository Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/About the Repository Module.htm
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Repository Module
The Repository module stores and displays a range of items. The type of items stored is controlled through the skin which is applied to the module. By changing the skin applied to the module, the Repository can be used for numerous purposes such as a simple blog, a media repository, a file repository, an articles repository, a compact file listing, and more. The Repository module offers fine grained permissions which allows you to control which roles can download, upload, rate and comment on items. Features such as moderation and personal are also included.
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Important Upgrade Note. If you have modified any of the standard templates that are part of the Repository package, be sure to back them up before installing this new release, then restore them after the release has been installed. Alternatively, you can copy them to the /Portals/n/RepositoryTemplates folder which is the preferred location for storing modified templates.
Module Version: 03.05.04 / Minimum DNN Version: 05.03.01
Features: ISearchable
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Editing Item Comments.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Editing Item Comments.html
index 37caab2564d..71ada13b30c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Editing Item Comments.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Editing Item Comments.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Editing Item Comments
@@ -22,7 +21,7 @@ Editing Item Comments
-
- The edited comment now displays a Comment edited message
+ Click the Update button.The edited comment now displays a Comment edited message.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Enabling a Personal Repository.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Enabling a Personal Repository.html
index 3eb081ca56d..9bce02ea08f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Enabling a Personal Repository.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Administrators/Enabling a Personal Repository.html
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-
+
-
Enabling a Personal Repository
How to configure the Repository module to allow users to create their own personal repository which cannot be viewed by other users.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- - At Personal Repository, select from these options:
- at Allow users to see ONLY the files that THEY uploaded (Admins can see all files) to enable personal repositories.
- to disable the All Items category
+ - At Personal Repository, select from these options:
- Mark the check box at Allow users to see ONLY the files that THEY uploaded (Admins can see all files) to enable personal repositories.
- Unmark the check box to disable the All Items category.
- Click the Update link.
Note: You must also set appropriate permissions to enable users to upload and manage these files. See "Setting Repository Role Access"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/All Users/Rating an Item.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/All Users/Rating an Item.html
index fd334a95d6c..a82fa8d9581 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/All Users/Rating an Item.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/All Users/Rating an Item.html
@@ -1,19 +1,18 @@
-
+
-
Rating an Item
How to rate an item in the Repository module. Note: Rating of items may not be available to all users.
- Locate the required item.
- - At RATING, click on the Rating Stars or Dashes . This displays the User Rating panel below the item. Note: If you are not authorized to add rating the User Rating panel is not displayed.
- - Click inside a radio button to select your rating. Rating options are 0 - 10.
+ - At RATING, click on the Rating Stars or Dashes . This displays the User Rating panel below the item. Note: If you are not authorized to add rating the User Rating panel is not displayed.
+ - Click inside a radio button to select your rating. Rating options are 0 - 10.
- Click the POST YOUR RATING button. Your rating is now added to the total tally.
-
+
Posting your Rating
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Configuration/Configuring the Repository Module - Default Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Configuration/Configuring the Repository Module - Default Settings.html
index b3e1260982c..f83d8114a70 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Configuration/Configuring the Repository Module - Default Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Configuration/Configuring the Repository Module - Default Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring the Repository Module (Default Settings)
@@ -14,7 +13,7 @@ Configuring the Repository Module (Default Settings)
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- Recommended. At No Image, select the default image to be displayed when no image is uploaded for an item. See "Setting a File Link" or See "Setting a URL Link". Note: When uploaded images are displayed on the Repository module, they appear as a thumbnail image which is scaled down to a uniform width. This width varies between different skins. However the image you select at No Image is not scaled down. In order to provide the best visual presentation on your Repository you should match the width of the No Image to the thumbnail width on the selected skin.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Troubleshooting Restricted File Type Warning.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Troubleshooting Restricted File Type Warning.html
index 7ca6a117591..3982f5bd1de 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Troubleshooting Restricted File Type Warning.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Troubleshooting Restricted File Type Warning.html
@@ -1,16 +1,11 @@
-
+
-
Troubleshooting: Restricted File Type Warning
You may receive a Restricted File Type warning message when attempting to upload a file via the Link Control to a module. This message is displayed when you attempt to upload a file with an extension that you are not enabled to upload such as a movie or a sound file. E.g. .avi, .wma.
Contact your Administrator or Host to request that the file types you want to upload are permitted.
SuperUsers can add new file types. See "Managing Allowable File Extensions"
-
-
-
The Restricted File Type Warning Message
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Business Card.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Business Card.html
index 6ca09a7b741..8664a5587f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Business Card.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Business Card.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a Business Card
@@ -12,9 +11,9 @@ Uploading a Business Card
- In the Company Name text box, enter the company name.
- In the Company Address editor, enter the company address.
- In the Company Tagline editor, enter the company tagline.
- - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Company Logo, click the Browse... button and select a picture of yourself to be displayed beside this article. Logos are scaled down to a width of 48 pixels. If no image is selected the default image is displayed but it is not scaled.
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. Your First Name and Last Name will be displayed in this text box if you are logged in to the website, however these details can be edited.
- In the Your EMail Address* text box, enter your email address. Your email address will be displayed in this text box if you are logged in to the website, however it can be edited.
- At Show my email address* to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
+ - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Company Logo, click the Browse... button and select a picture of yourself to be displayed beside this article. Logos are scaled down to a width of 48 pixels. If no image is selected the default image is displayed but it is not scaled.
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. Your First Name and Last Name will be displayed in this text box if you are logged in to the website, however these details can be edited.
- In the Your EMail Address* text box, enter your email address. Your email address will be displayed in this text box if you are logged in to the website, however it can be edited.
- At Show my email address*, to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
- Click the Upload button.
- - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
+ - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
* Note: The contributor's name and email address are NOT displayed on business cards.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Directory Listing.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Directory Listing.html
index 94b0584cabd..a9f7868631e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Directory Listing.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Directory Listing.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a Directory Listing
@@ -11,10 +10,10 @@ Uploading a Directory Listing
- Click the UPLOAD button.
- In the Title text box, enter a title for this directory listing.
- In the Resource URL text box, enter the URL to this resource. E.g. http://www.domain.com/resource.aspx
- - In the Description Editor, enter a description of this directory listing.
- - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Image*, click the Browse... button and select an image to be displayed on this listing. This image is scaled down to a width of 48 pixels. If no image is selected the default image is displayed but is not scaled.
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed, but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address* text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in the email address associated with your user account is displayed but can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address* x to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
+ - In the Description Editor, enter a description of this directory listing.
+ - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Image*, click the Browse... button and select an image to be displayed on this listing. This image is scaled down to a width of 48 pixels. If no image is selected the default image is displayed but is not scaled.
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed, but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address* text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in the email address associated with your user account is displayed but can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address*, to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
- Click the Upload button.
- - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
+ - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
* Note: The image, contributor's name, and contributor's email address are NOT displayed on directory listings.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a File - Nifty Toggle Skin.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a File - Nifty Toggle Skin.html
index 1ca296266d4..cbfc0b9cd1b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a File - Nifty Toggle Skin.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a File - Nifty Toggle Skin.html
@@ -1,47 +1,25 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a File (Nifty Toggle Skin)
-
-
-
How to upload a file to the Repository module. This tutorial is based on the Nifty Toggle skin. Note: Upload may not be available to all users.
- Tip: Switching the Editor from Basic Text Box to Rich Text Editor or back will remove any files you have selected at the File and Image fields. For this reason perform any Editor switches before selecting these files.
-
- - Click the UPLOAD button.
- - In the Title text box, enter the title for the item.
- - At File, click the Browse... button and select the file.
- - In the Summary editor, enter a summary description of the file.
- - In the Description editor, enter a description of the file.
- - Complete any of these optional fields:
+ Tip: Switching the Editor from Basic Text Box to Rich Text Editor or back will remove any files you have selected at the File and Image fields. For this reason perform any Editor switches before selecting these files.
+
+ - Click the UPLOAD button.
+ - In the Title text box, enter the title for the item.
+ - At File, click the Browse... button and select the file.
+ - In the Summary editor, enter a summary description of the file.
+ - In the Description editor, enter a description of the file.
+ - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Image, click the Browse... button and select the required file. Large images are scaled down to a width of 100 pixels. If no image is selected the default image will be used.
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address*, to display your email address on this item listing - OR - to keep your email address private.
+ - Click the Upload button.
+ - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
- Click the OK button.
-
- - At Image, click the Browse... button and select the required file. Large images are scaled down to a width of 100 pixels. If no image is selected the default image will be used.
- - At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- - In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- - In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- - At Show my email address*, to display your email address on this item listing - OR - to keep your email address private.
-
-
- - Click the Upload button.
-
-
- - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
-
-
- - Click the OK button.
-
- * Note: The contributor's name and email address are NOT displayed on this module.
+ * Note: The contributor's name and email address are NOT displayed on this module.
Uploading a File (Nifty Toggle Skin)
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Nifty Listing.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Nifty Listing.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8578c89817f..00000000000
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Nifty Listing.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Uploading a Nifty Listing
-
-
-
- Delete this text and replace it with your own content.
-
-
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Portfolio Listing.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Portfolio Listing.html
index eacccb8c6e6..b03b6423f93 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Portfolio Listing.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Portfolio Listing.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a Portfolio Listing
@@ -11,9 +10,9 @@ Uploading a Portfolio Listing
- Click the UPLOAD button.
- In the Title text box, enter the title for the item.
- In the Description editor, enter a description of the file.
- - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Image, click the Browse... button and then locate and select the image. Large images are scaled down a thumbnail width of 175 pixels. If no image is selected the default image will be used but will not be scaled.
- At Categories*, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address* to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
+ - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Image, click the Browse... button and then locate and select the image. Large images are scaled down a thumbnail width of 175 pixels. If no image is selected the default image will be used but will not be scaled.
- At Categories*, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name* text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address*, to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
- Click the Upload button.
- - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
+ - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
* Note: The contributor's name and email address are NOT displayed on portfolio listings. Categories are not displayed on this skin.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Repository Item - Default-Default2-Nifty Skins.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Repository Item - Default-Default2-Nifty Skins.html
index a2a182bed73..713f4a9dfe4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Repository Item - Default-Default2-Nifty Skins.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Repository Item - Default-Default2-Nifty Skins.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a Repository Item (Default/Default2/Nifty Skins)
@@ -24,10 +23,10 @@ Uploading a Repository Item (Default/Default2/Nifty Skins)
- Complete any of these optional fields:
-
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed, but these can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in the email address associated with your user account is displayed but can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address to display your email address on this item listing - OR - to keep your email address private.
+ - At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed, but these can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in the email address associated with your user account is displayed but can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address, to display your email address on this item listing - OR - to keep your email address private.
- Click the Upload button.
- Optional. If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
-
+
Note: The contributor's name and email address are NOT displayed on file listings. Categories are not displayed on this skin.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Slide Image.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Slide Image.html
index d5d2cb065f6..defa82e87d4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Slide Image.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Slide Image.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a Slide Image
@@ -13,9 +12,9 @@ Uploading a Slide Image
- In the Title text box, enter the title for the item.
- At Image, click the Browse... button and then locate and select the required image. Large images are scaled down to a maximum width of 140 pixels. If no image is selected the default image will be used but will not be scaled.
- In the Description Text Editor, enter a description of the file.
- - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Categories*, select one or more categories if available. Note: Category filtering is not provided on the Slides skin.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address, to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
+ - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Categories*, select one or more categories if available. Note: Category filtering is not provided on the Slides skin.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address, to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
- Click the Upload button.
- - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
+ - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
* Note: Category filtering is not provided on the Slides skin.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Video Listing.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Video Listing.html
index e578d358ad7..efdac877bfe 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Video Listing.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading a Video Listing.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a Video Listing
@@ -12,11 +11,9 @@ Uploading a Video Listing
- In the Video Title text box, enter the title for the video.
- At Video File, click the Browse... button and then locate and select the video.
- In the Description Text Editor, enter a description of the file.
- - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Splash Image, click the Browse... button and then locate and select an image. Images are not scaled down therefore they should not be larger than 320 pixels. If no image is selected the video screen will display as blank.
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address* to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
-
-
+ - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Splash Image, click the Browse... button and then locate and select an image. Images are not scaled down therefore they should not be larger than 320 pixels. If no image is selected the video screen will display as blank.
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in to the website, the email address associated with your user account is displayed but it can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address* , to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
- Click the Upload button.
- - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
+ - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
* Note: The contributors email address will not be displayed on this skin.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading an Article.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading an Article.html
index 17284ebf4e0..b461a1c350b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading an Article.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Contributors/Uploading an Article.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading an Article
@@ -12,11 +11,11 @@ Uploading an Article
- In the Title of the Article text box, enter the title for the article.
- At Article Summary, click the Basic Text Box radio button to enter a summary, and then enter the article summary into the text box. Note: If you do not enter an article summary then the text "Add Article Summary..." will be displayed on this listing.
- In the Article Text Editor, enter your article. Note: If you do not enter text for this article then the text "Add Article Text..." will be displayed on this listing.
- - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed, but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in the email address associated with your user account is displayed but can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address* to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
- At Your Picture, click the Browse... button and select a picture of the author to be displayed beside this article. This picture is scaled down to a width of 48 pixels. If no image is selected the default image is displayed but is not scaled.
- At Downloadable Version, click the Browse... button and select a downloadable version of your article such as a .pdf or .docx file.
+ - Complete any of these optional fields:
- At Categories, select one or more categories if available.
- In the Your Name text box, enter your name. If you are logged in to the website, your First Name and Last Name are displayed, but can be edited if required.
- In the Your EMail Address text box, enter your email address. If you are logged in the email address associated with your user account is displayed but can be edited if required.
- At Show my email address*, to display your email address on this item listing- OR - to keep your email address private.
- At Your Picture, click the Browse... button and select a picture of the author to be displayed beside this article. This picture is scaled down to a width of 48 pixels. If no image is selected the default image is displayed but is not scaled.
- At Downloadable Version, click the Browse... button and select a downloadable version of your article such as a .pdf or .docx file.
- Click the Upload button.
- - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
+ - If you are not a moderator, a message reading "Your upload MUST be approved by an Administrator BEFORE it is displayed on the website. You will receive an email when your upload has been approved" is displayed.
- * Note: The contributor's email address is NOT displayed on article listings.
+ * Note: The contributor's email address is NOT displayed on article listings.
Uploading an Article
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying Repository Categories.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying Repository Categories.html
index c3b08434c8a..af349d9a0f3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying Repository Categories.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying Repository Categories.html
@@ -1,18 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Displaying Repository Categories
How to configure the Repository Dashboard module to display all Repository categories.
-
- - Maximize the Dashboard Settings section.
+ -
+
+
+ - Maximize the Dashboard Settings section.
- At Select Repository, select the Repository to be associated with this module. Repository modules are listed by their Tab Name/Module Title. E.g. Home/Repository.
- At Dashboard Mode, select one of the following options:
- Categories (single-column): Select to display the categories of the selected Repository in a single column layout.
- Categories (double-column): Select to display the categories of the selected Repository in a double column layout.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Note: The below example uses the Module Header field to display the category type displayed in each module.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying the Latest or Top Items.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying the Latest or Top Items.html
index 9ba32d11907..e77466ea628 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying the Latest or Top Items.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Repository Dashboard/Displaying the Latest or Top Items.html
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Displaying the Latest or Top Items
How to configure the Repository Dashboard module to display a select number of the latest uploads, top downloads, or top rated items.
-
-
+
- - Maximize the Dashboard Settings section.
+ - Maximize the Dashboard Settings section.
- At Select Repository, select the Repository to be associated with this module. Repository modules are listed by their TabName/ModuleTitle. E.g. Home/Repository
- At Dashboard Mode, select one of the following options:
- Latest Uploads: Select to display the latest uploads to the selected Repository module.
- Top Downloads: Select to display the most downloaded items from the selected Repository module.
- Top Rated: Select to display the best rated items in the selected Repository module.
- In the Indicate the number of items to be displayed text box, enter the number of items to be displayed on the Repository Dashboard. E.g. 5
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Note: The below example uses the Module Header field to display the information displayed in each module. See Module Settings for more details.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding Attributes.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding Attributes.html
index 781f9cd71cf..177ad1d1c09 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding Attributes.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding Attributes.html
@@ -1,30 +1,22 @@
-
+
-
Adding Attributes
How to add attributes and attribute values to the Repository module. Attributes can be exposed in the Repository by creating a Repository Skin with the [ATTRIBUTES] token.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- In the Attributes text box, enter an attribute name in the text box.
- Click the ADD ATTRIBUTE link.
- Repeat Steps 3-4 to add additional attributes.
- - To add Attribute Values to an existing attribute:
-
-
- - In the Attributes list, click on the attribute name.
- - In the Attribute Values text box, enter an attribute value.
- - Click the ADD VALUE link.
-
-
+ - To add Attribute Values to an existing attribute:
- In the Attributes list, click on the attribute name.
- In the Attribute Values text box, enter an attribute value.
- Click the ADD VALUE link.
- Repeat Step 6 to add additional attribute values.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Tip: You do not need to click the Update button to save these changes.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding a Repository Category.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding a Repository Category.html
index 209541dc057..8a515945693 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding a Repository Category.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Adding a Repository Category.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Adding a Repository Category
How to add a category to the Repository module.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- At the Categories drop down list, select root to create a parent category, or select an existing category to create a child category.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting Attributes.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting Attributes.html
index 0c198c2e4cc..bb1abcc0bf2 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting Attributes.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting Attributes.html
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Deleting Attributes
How to permanently delete attributes and/or attribute values from the Repository module.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- At Attributes, the following options are available:
- - To delete an attribute including all related attribute values:
- Click on the attribute name in the Attributes list.
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to delete this Attribute?"
- - To delete a single Attribute Value:
- In the Attributes list, click on the attribute name.
- In the Attribute Values list, click on the attribute value name.
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to delete this Value?"
+ - To delete an attribute including all related attribute values:
- Click on the attribute name in the Attributes list.
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to delete this Attribute?"
- Click the OK button confirm.
+ - To delete a single Attribute Value:
- In the Attributes list, click on the attribute name.
- In the Attribute Values list, click on the attribute value name.
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to delete this Value?"
- Click the OK button confirm.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting a Repository Category.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting a Repository Category.html
index ebf1a5f22ea..26ded270dbe 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting a Repository Category.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Deleting a Repository Category.html
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
-
+
-
Deleting a Repository Category
How to delete a category from the Repository module.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- At the Categories drop down list, select root to delete a root category - OR - Select a parent category to delete its child category.
- In the Categories box below, select the category to be deleted.
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete this Category?"
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
Tip: You do not need to click the Update button to save these changes.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Attributes.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Attributes.html
index 248fded5e11..e23cfc27fb5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Attributes.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Attributes.html
@@ -1,16 +1,15 @@
-
+
-
Editing Attributes
How to edit attributes and attribute values on the Repository module.
-
-
+
- - Select the Repository Settings tab.
+ - Select the Repository Settings tab.
- In the Attributes text box, select the attribute to be edited.
- To edit the attribute, click the Edit button beside it in the Attributes list.
- In the Attributes text box, edit the attribute.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Repository Categories.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Repository Categories.html
index a6d4614b68f..2e48f4c2ec9 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Repository Categories.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Editing Repository Categories.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Editing Repository Categories
How to edit a category on the Repository module.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- At Categories, select root from the drop down list to edit a root category- OR - Select a parent category to edit a child category.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the All Items Category .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the All Items Category .html
index 6940a3a0d1d..f08f2ff98be 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the All Items Category .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Enabling-Disabling the All Items Category .html
@@ -1,19 +1,18 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling the All Items Category
How to enable or disable the All Items category on the Repository module. All items within the Repository are automatically assigned to an All Items category. If this option is enabled, an All Items category is displayed in the Category drop down list. If this option is disabled, items that are not assigned to a category cannot be viewed. If this option is disabled it is recommended that at least one category is created.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- - At Include All Files, select one of the following options:
- to enable the All Items category.
- to disable the All Items category.
+ - At Include All Files, select one of the following options:
- Mark the check box to enable the All Items category.
- Unmark the check box to disable the All Items category.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Reordering Repository Categories.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Reordering Repository Categories.html
index 82bf0754b45..8d08d896a8e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Reordering Repository Categories.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Reordering Repository Categories.html
@@ -1,18 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Reordering Repository Categories
How to reorder categories on the Repository module.
-
- - Select the Repository Settings tab.
+ -
+
+
+ - Select the Repository Settings tab.
- At the Categories drop down list, select <root> to reorder parent categories or select a parent category to reorder its child categories.
- - In the Categories text box, select the category to be moved.
- - Click the Up or Down buttons to re-order.
- - Repeat Steps 3-5 to reorder additional categories.
+ - In the Categories text box, select the category to be moved.
+ - Click the Up or Down buttons to re-order.
+ - Repeat Steps 3-5 to reorder additional categories.
Tip: You do not need to click the Update button to save these changes.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting Repository Role Access.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting Repository Role Access.html
index 787c709e450..9a8dcfda8ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting Repository Role Access.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting Repository Role Access.html
@@ -1,26 +1,25 @@
-
+
-
Setting Repository Role Access
How to set the roles which can perform uploading, downloading, rating, commenting and moderation on the Repository module. These permissions are in addition to the permission set in under Module Settings - Basic Settings. This tutorial also includes how to select the roles who can view comments and ratings. Note: Some Repository skins do not provide file downloading, comments, or ratings.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- Go to the Security Roles field.
- - At Moderation Roles, for each role that can moderate newly uploaded files. Users of this role will also be able to upload files without moderation.
- - At Download Roles, for each role that can download files.
- - At Upload Roles, for each role that can upload files.
- - At Rating Roles, for each role that can add ratings.
- - At Comment Roles, for each role that can add comments.
+ - At Moderation Roles, each role that can moderate newly uploaded files. Users of this role will also be able to upload files without moderation.
+ - At Download Roles, for each role that can download files.
+ - At Upload Roles, for each role that can upload files.
+ - At Rating Roles, for each role that can add ratings.
+ - At Comment Roles, for each role that can add comments.
- At View User Comments, select between the following options:
- Authorized Users Only: Only users who are authorized to add comments can view comments. This is the default setting.
- All Users: All users who can view the module can view comments.
- At View User Rating, select between the following options:
- Authorized Users Only: Only users who are authorized to add ratings can view comments. This is the default setting.
- All Users: All users who can view the module can view ratings.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Design.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Design.html
index 1e3246d9c90..fc99a596287 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Design.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Design.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting the Repository Design
How to set the layout and design options on the Repository module.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- In the Repository Description Editor, enter a description for this repository. This description is displayed at the top of the module.
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Setting the Repository Design
- At Image set to use for Ratings, select the image to be displayed for ratings from the following options:
- Default: Uses a five star rating scale.
- Dashes: Uses a ten dash rating scale. This is default setting.
- At No Image*, select the default image to be displayed where no image is uploaded for an item. See Link Control for more details on selecting images. See "Setting a URL Link" or See "Setting a File Link"
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
* Note: When uploaded images are displayed on the Repository module, they appear as a thumbnail image which is scaled down to a uniform width. This width varies between different skins. However the image you select at No Image is not scaled down. In order to provide the best visual presentation on your Repository you should match the width of the No Image to the thumbnail width on selected skin.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Skin.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Skin.html
index f516e9c0af0..5a8db1219a6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Skin.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Repository/Settings/Setting the Repository Skin.html
@@ -1,19 +1,18 @@
-
+
-
Setting the Repository Skin
How to set the skin used on the Repository module. Note: It is preferable to choose the Repository skin before uploading files to the module as changing skin changes the fields which are displayed on the upload page.
-
-
+
- Select the Repository Settings tab.
- At Repository Skins select one of these skins:
- Articles: Repository for articles. See "Overview of the Articles Repository"
- Blog: Repository for blog posts. See "Overview of the Blog Repository"
- Business Card: Repository that displays business details in a card design. See "Overview of the Business Card Repository"
- Default and Default 2: Repository for files with image previewing. See "Overview of the Default, Default 2 and Nifty Repositories"
- Directory: Repository for a list of resources that link to a URL. See "Overview of the Directory Repository"
- File List: Repository which displays a compact list of files. See "Overview of the File List Repository"
- Metro
- Nifty Toggle: Repository for files with image previewing. Similar functionality to the default skin. See "Overview of the Nifty Toggle Repository"
- Nifty Video: Repository for viewing videos. See "Overview of the Nifty Video Repository"
- Portfolio: Repository for viewing portfolio images. See "Overview of the Portfolio Repository"
- Slides: Repository for viewing images inside frames that looks like traditional slide. See "Overview of the Slides Repository"
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/About the Store Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/About the Store Module.htm
index a2ce3db8b0b..14df2bdc1e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/About the Store Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/About the Store Module.htm
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Store Module
The Store module suite consists of the following five (5) integrated modules which are used together to create an online shopping experience.
- Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on this DNN installation by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions". This module is only available for download from CodePlex (http://dnnstore.codeplex.com).
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions". This module is only available for download from CodePlex (http://dnnstore.codeplex.com).
Module Version: 03.07.07 / Minimum DNN Version: 04.06.02
Features: ISearchable
Here's a summary of the five store modules:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Atos as the Payment Gateway.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Atos as the Payment Gateway.html
index 33a03479c29..cc1482ab282 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Atos as the Payment Gateway.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Atos as the Payment Gateway.html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Configuring Atos as the Payment Gateway
- At PathFile Folder, select the file you just uploaded at Step 5.
- At Bank Logo, select the logo.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Authorize.Net as the Payment Gateway.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Authorize.Net as the Payment Gateway.html
index 858e8baaab8..4820f0c64de 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Authorize.Net as the Payment Gateway.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring Authorize.Net as the Payment Gateway.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Authorize.Net as the Payment Gateway
@@ -17,14 +16,14 @@ Configuring Authorize.Net as the Payment Gateway
- At Capture Type, select from the following options:
- Auth and Capture: This option authorizes the payment and captures the funds.
- Auth Only: This option authorizes the payment but does not capture the funds. This is the default option.
- Capture Only: This option captures the funds but does not authorize the payment.
- At Test Mode, select from these options:
-
- to use the store in test mode only. Transactions are not live in this mode.
- to begin accepting payments.
+ - Mark the check box to use the store in test mode only. Transactions are not live in this mode.
- Unmark the check box to begin accepting payments.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider.html
index 2a16ad7560e..262c60271a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider
@@ -10,7 +9,7 @@ Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider
- Go to the Store Admin module.
- If the Store Info page isn't displayed, click the Store Info link.
- At Gateway, select PayPalProvider.
- - At Use PayPal Sandbox, select from these options:
- to use the store in test mode only. Transactions are not live in this mode.
- to begin accepting payments.
+ - At Use PayPal Sandbox, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to use the store in test mode only. Transactions are not live in this mode.
- Unmark the check box to begin accepting payments.
- In the PayPal ID text box, enter the email address associated with this account.
- Recommended. In the Secure ID text box, enter the Secure Merchant Account ID displayed on your profile summary at PayPal. Complete this field to harden your security.
- Optional. In the PayPal Verification URL text box, edit the PayPal URL used for verifying payments if required. This default value should not require editing.
@@ -27,7 +26,7 @@ Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Tip: Don't forget to at the "Use PayPal Sandbox" when you are ready to begin taking live transactions.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/AddCoupon.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/AddCoupon.htm
index f395c061c43..c50ed803494 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/AddCoupon.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/AddCoupon.htm
@@ -19,15 +19,16 @@ Adding a Coupon
- At Rule Type, select from the following options:
- Order Anything: Select to apply the coupon discount to any order without any restrictions.
- Spends At Least: Select to only apply the coupon discount for orders of or above a certain amount.
- In the Minimum Amount text box, enter the minimum amount that must be spent to receive the discount.
- Orders At Least: Select to only apply the coupon discount for orders of or above a certain amount.
- In the Minimum Amount text box, enter the minimum amount that must be spent in a single order to receive the discount.
- At Discount Type, select from the following:
- Percentage: Select if the discount calculated as a percentage of the entire order.
- In the Percentage text box, enter the percentage.
- Fixed Amount: Select if the discount is a fixed amount regardless of the size of the order.
- In the Amount text box, enter the discount amount as a decimal value.
- Free Shipping: Select if free shipping is applied to the order.
- At Apply To, select from these options:
- Entire Order: Apply the discount type to the entire order.
- All Items In Category: Only apply the discount to products within a single category.
- At Category, select the category that the discount will be applied to and then click the Validate link.
- Specific Product: Only apply the discount to products within a single category
- At Category, select the category that the discount will be applied to and then click the Validate link.
- At Product, select the product that the discount will be applied to and then click the Validate link.
- - At Start Date, click the Calendar link and then select the first date that the coupon can be redeemed.
- - At Validity, select from the following options:
- Permanent: Select if there is no end date for this coupon.
- Single Use: Select if the coupon can only be used one time by each user.
- Until: Select if the coupon is valid until a specific date.
- At End Date, click the Calendar link and then select the last day the coupon can be redeemed.
+ - At Start Date, click the Calendar link and then select the first date that the coupon can be redeemed.
+ - At Validity, select from the following options:
- Permanent: Select if there is no end date for this coupon.
+ - At Single Use: Select if the coupon can only be used one time by each user.
- Until: Select if the coupon is valid until a specific date.
- At End Date, click the Calendar link and then select the last day the coupon can be redeemed.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/DeleteCoupon.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/DeleteCoupon.htm
index 3cbaa0fca79..c54c0c749de 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/DeleteCoupon.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/DeleteCoupon.htm
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Deleting a Coupon
Click the Edit link beside the required coupon.
Click the Delete link located at the base of the page. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Want To Delete This Item?"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/EditCoupon.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/EditCoupon.htm
index 9ff2c2ea5e0..a359ffd8d88 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/EditCoupon.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Coupons/EditCoupon.htm
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Editing a Coupon
- Update one or more fields as required. See "Adding a Coupon"
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling Authorize.Net Test Mode.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling Authorize.Net Test Mode.html
index 0541ce929ca..86df2e19e6c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling Authorize.Net Test Mode.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling Authorize.Net Test Mode.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling Authorize.Net Test Mode
@@ -9,14 +8,14 @@ Enabling/Disabling Authorize.Net Test Mode
- Go to the Store Admin module.
- If the Store Info page isn't displayed, click the Store Info link.
- - At Test Mode, select from these options:
- to use the store in test mode only (Transactions are not live in this mode).
- to begin accepting payments.
+ - At Test Mode, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to use the store in test mode only (Transactions are not live in this mode).
- Unmark the check box to begin accepting payments.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling PayPal Sandbox.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling PayPal Sandbox.html
index ab570b962e1..66b2a816f3f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling PayPal Sandbox.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Enabling-Disabling PayPal Sandbox.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling/Disabling PayPal Sandbox
@@ -9,14 +8,14 @@ Enabling/Disabling PayPal Sandbox
- Go to the Store Admin module.
- If the Store Info page isn't displayed, click the Store Info link.
- - At Use PayPal Sandbox, select from the following options:
- to use the store in test mode only. Transactions are not live in this mode.
- to begin accepting payments.
+ - At Use PayPal Sandbox, select from the following options:
- Mark the check box to use the store in test mode only. Transactions are not live in this mode.
- Unmark the check box to begin accepting payments.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting Store Info.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting Store Info.html
index 440def42bf4..e30d7c4a5d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting Store Info.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting Store Info.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -11,8 +11,8 @@ Setting Store Info
If the Store Info page isn't displayed, click the Store Info link.
In the Store Name text box, enter a name for your store. E.g. Awesome Cycles Store
Recommended. At SEO Feature, select from these options:
- - to inject the Store Name, Description and Keywords into the corresponding META fields of the page where the catalog module is placed. This allows a better indexing by search engines and produces higher ranking. When product details are displayed, the product's fields model name, summary and keywords are used.
-
- In the Description text box, enter a description of your store.
- In the Keywords text box, enter one or more key words or phrases separated by a comma.
- to disable.
+ - Mark the check box to inject the Store Name, Description and Keywords into the corresponding META fields of the page where the catalog module is placed. This allows a better indexing by search engines and produces higher ranking. When product details are displayed, the product's fields model name, summary and keywords are used.
+
- In the Description text box, enter a description of your store.
- In the Keywords text box, enter one or more key words or phrases separated by a comma.
- Unmark the check box to disable.
In the Store Email text box, enter the email address to be used in emails sent by the store. Order details will also be sent to this address.
@@ -20,16 +20,16 @@
Setting Store Info
- In the Currency Symbol text box, enter the symbol to be displayed for product prices. E.g. $
- - Optional. At Portal Templates, to enable site templates on your store.
+ - Optional. At Portal Templates, to enable site templates on your store.
- At Style Sheet, select the style sheet to be used for the store.
- At Store Page, select the page name where the Store Catalog and Store Menu modules are located.
- At Store Account Page, select the page name where the Store Account module is located.
- - Optional. At Authorize Cancel, to enable customers to cancel their orders.
- - Optional. At Inventory Management, to enable inventory management. This displays these additional fields:
-
- At On Out of Stock, select the message to be displayed when a product is out of stock. Note: This feature only works when the [STOCKQUANTITY] token is used in templates.
- At Product's Behavior, select the behavior for out of stock products from these options:
- Accept order if a product is out of stock
- Hide quantity, links and buttons. This hides the field quantity, links/buttons "Add to Cart" and "Buy now!"
- Hide the Product
- Optional. At Avoid Negative Stock, to enable an additional availability test to be performed when a product is added to shopping cart. Note: There is no guarantee of stock availability due to the nature of the Internet.
+ - Optional. At Authorize Cancel, to enable customers to cancel their orders.
+ - Optional. At Inventory Management, to enable inventory management. This displays these additional fields:
+
- At On Out of Stock, select the message to be displayed when a product is out of stock. Note: This feature only works when the [STOCKQUANTITY] token is used in templates.
- At Product's Behavior, select the behavior for out of stock products from these options:
- Accept order if a product is out of stock
- Hide quantity, links and buttons. This hides the field quantity, links/buttons "Add to Cart" and "Buy now!"
- Hide the Product
- Optional. At Avoid Negative Stock, to enable an additional availability test to be performed when a product is added to shopping cart. Note: There is no guarantee of stock availability due to the nature of the Internet.
- At Manage Orders, select the role which is allowed to manage orders. By default, Administrators and SuperUsers are allowed to manage orders.
- At Manage Catalog, select the role which is allowed to manage products, categories and reviews. By default, Administrators and SuperUsers are allowed to manage these.
- - Optional. At Secure Cookies, to encrypt cookie values.
+ - Optional. At Secure Cookies, to encrypt cookie values.
@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@
Setting Store Info
- At Checkout Mode, select one of the following options:
- Registration Required: Select if shoppers must be registered users to complete the checkout process.
-
- Optional. At No Delivery, check the check box if there is no delivery option available. This will disable shipping management. Note: If you do provide delivery and are selling both virtual and physical products, you will need create a Virtual Products shipping rate with a zero cost to handle virtual products. See "Adding Shipping Rates"
- Optional. At Allow Virtual Products, check the check box to allow virtual products. Registration is required for virtual products because a user account is required to save the download counter.
- Optional. At Allow Coupons, check the check box if discounts are available using shopping coupons.
- User Choice: Select if shopper can be either registered users or anonymous users to complete the checkout process.
-
- At Impersonated Account, select the security role and then the user within that role whose account will be used for processing orders by anonymous users.
- Click the Validate User link to ensure the user account is valid.
- Optional. At No Delivery, check the check box if there is no delivery option available. This will disable shipping management.
- Optional. At Allow Coupons, check the check box if discounts are available using shopping coupons.
- Always Anonymous: Shopper are always anonymous when completing the checkout process.
-
- At Impersonated Account, select the security role and then the user within that role whose account will be used for processing orders by anonymous users.
- Click the Validate User link to ensure the user account is valid.
- Optional. At No Delivery, check the check box if there is no delivery option available. This will disable shipping management.
- Optional. At Allow Coupons, check the check box if discounts are available using shopping coupons.
+ - Optional. At No Delivery, if there is no delivery option available. This will disable shipping management. Note: If you do provide delivery and are selling both virtual and physical products, you will need create a Virtual Products shipping rate with a zero cost to handle virtual products. See "Adding Shipping Rates"
- Optional. At Allow Virtual Products, to allow virtual products. Registration is required for virtual products because a user account is required to save the download counter.
- Optional. At Allow Coupons, if discounts are available using shopping coupons.
- User Choice: Select if shopper can be either registered users or anonymous users to complete the checkout process.
+
- At Impersonated Account, select the security role and then the user within that role whose account will be used for processing orders by anonymous users.
- Click the Validate User link to ensure the user account is valid.
- Optional. At No Delivery, if there is no delivery option available. This will disable shipping management.
- Optional. At Allow Coupons, if discounts are available using shopping coupons.
- Always Anonymous: Shopper are always anonymous when completing the checkout process.
+
- At Impersonated Account, select the security role and then the user within that role whose account will be used for processing orders by anonymous users.
- Click the Validate User link to ensure the user account is valid.
- Optional. At No Delivery, if there is no delivery option available. This will disable shipping management.
- Optional. At Allow Coupons, if discounts are available using shopping coupons.
- At Address Provider, select the address provider to use.
- At Tax Provider, select the tax provider to use.
- At Shipping Provider, select the shipping provider to use.
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Setting Store Info
-
- This displays the Orders, Categories, Products, Reviews and (optional) Coupons links at the top of the Store Admin module and the Address Provider Settings, Tax Provider Settings, and (optional) Shipping Provider Settings sections at the base of the module.
+ Click the Update button. This displays the Orders, Categories, Products, Reviews and (optional) Coupons links at the top of the Store Admin module and the Address Provider Settings, Tax Provider Settings, and (optional) Shipping Provider Settings sections at the base of the module.
Next Steps:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting the Store Gateway as Email Only.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting the Store Gateway as Email Only.html
index ea971eacdbd..4508f24188e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting the Store Gateway as Email Only.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Setting the Store Gateway as Email Only.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Setting the Store Gateway as Email Only
- If the Store Info page isn't displayed, click the Store Info link.
- At Gateway, select EmailProvider.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Shipping Settings/Deleting a Shipping Rate.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Shipping Settings/Deleting a Shipping Rate.html
index 63a18db7fc9..7136cb4ae4a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Shipping Settings/Deleting a Shipping Rate.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Shipping Settings/Deleting a Shipping Rate.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Deleting a Shipping Rate
@@ -10,7 +9,7 @@ Deleting a Shipping Rate
Go to the Store Admin module.
If the Store Info page isn't displayed, click the Store Info link.
Maximize theShipping Provider Settings section.
- In the Delete column, beside each shipping rate to be deleted.
+ In the Delete column, beside each shipping rate to be deleted.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Tax Settings/Managing Taxation on Orders .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Tax Settings/Managing Taxation on Orders .html
index bb3295be3f4..ac1438a49ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Tax Settings/Managing Taxation on Orders .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Administrators/Tax Settings/Managing Taxation on Orders .html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Managing Taxation on Orders
Go to the Store Admin module.
If the Store Info page isn't displayed, click the Store Info link.
Maximize the Tax Provider Settings section.
- At Enable Tax, select from these options:- to enable taxation.
- In the Tax Rate text box, enter the taxation rate as a percentage. E.g. 10
+ At Enable Tax, select from these options:- Mark the check box to enable taxation.
- In the Tax Rate text box, enter the taxation rate as a percentage. E.g. 10
- Unmark the check box to disable taxation.
Click the Update Tax Settings link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Adding a Product Category.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Adding a Product Category.html
index b90e7136331..84294f22923 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Adding a Product Category.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Adding a Product Category.html
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Adding a Product Category
-
- You can now view the newly added category details by click the category name in the Store Menu module. This displays the category name and description in the Store Catalog module as shown below.
+ Click the Update button. You can now view the newly added category details by click the category name in the Store Menu module. This displays the category name and description in the Store Catalog module as shown below.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Deleting a Product Category.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Deleting a Product Category.html
index 1ec21521444..0e6c5d64fb2 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Deleting a Product Category.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Deleting a Product Category.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Deleting a Product Category
Click the Edit link beside the category to be deleted.
Click the Delete link. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
Repeat Steps 2-4 to delete additional categories.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Editing a Product Category.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Editing a Product Category.html
index ea8bb70ae18..d22de8bcacf 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Editing a Product Category.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Editing a Product Category.html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Editing a Product Category
- Edit one or more fields as required.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
- Repeat Steps 2-4 to edit additional categories.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Managing Product Category Archiving.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Managing Product Category Archiving.html
index 1af2fb15963..d07a34fb36c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Managing Product Category Archiving.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Categories/Managing Product Category Archiving.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ Managing Product Category Archiving
- On the Store Admin module, click the Categories link.
- Click the Edit link beside the category to be archived.
- - At Archived, select from these options:
- to archive the product. Archiving a category removes it and its associated products from the Store Menu module. Archiving a parent category, will archive all of its child categories.
- to remove archiving. Restoring a category will display it in the Store Menu module. Restoring a parent category also restores all child categories unless they are individually set as archived.
+ - At Archived, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to archive the product. Archiving a category removes it and its associated products from the Store Menu module. Archiving a parent category, will archive all of its child categories.
- Unmark the check box to remove archiving. Restoring a category will display it in the Store Menu module. Restoring a parent category also restores all child categories unless they are individually set as archived.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Product.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Product.html
index 4bd5e8002e2..2316bc60f75 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Product.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Product.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Adding a Product
- At Featured, select from these option:
-
- to set the product as featured. This displays the Special Offer Pricing section where you can complete the following fields:
- In the Special Offer Unit Price text box, enter the offer price. Leave this field blank to remove special offer pricing.
- At Special Offer Start Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the first date for this offer price. If no start date is selected the offer will commence immediately.
- At Special Offer End Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the last date for this offer price. If no end date is selected the offer will be available indefinitely.
- to remove the product from the featured list.
+ - Mark the check box to set the product as featured. This displays the Special Offer Pricing section where you can complete the following fields:
- In the Special Offer Unit Price text box, enter the offer price. Leave this field blank to remove special offer pricing.
- At Special Offer Start Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the first date for this offer price. If no start date is selected the offer will commence immediately.
- At Special Offer End Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the last date for this offer price. If no end date is selected the offer will be available indefinitely.
- Unmark the check box to remove the product from the featured list.
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
Adding a Product
-
- The new product is now displayed in the Store Catalog module and a summary is displayed to Catalog Managers in the Product list.
+ Click the Update button. The new product is now displayed in the Store Catalog module and a summary is displayed to Catalog Managers in the Product list.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Virtual Product.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Virtual Product.html
index 5d4498de737..afd90e03aea 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Virtual Product.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Adding a Virtual Product.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Adding a Virtual Product
- - At Virtual Product, . This displays the Download Information section.
+ - At Virtual Product, mark the check box. This displays the Download Information section.
- In the Download Information section, complete the following fields:
- At Product File, select from these options:
- None: Select if there is no downloadable file associated with this product.
- File ( A File On Your Site ): Select to associate a file with this product. See "Setting a File Link" or See "Uploading and Linking to a File"
- In the Allowed Downloads text box, enter the maximum numbers of downloads permitted. If there is no limit, enter -1. The default settings is for unlimited downloads.
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Adding a Virtual Product
- At Featured, select from these option:
-
- to set the product as featured. This displays the Special Offer Pricing section where you can complete the following fields:
- In the Special Offer Unit Price text box, enter the offer price. Leave this field blank to remove special offer pricing.
- At Special Offer Start Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the first date for this offer price. If no start date is selected the offer will commence immediately.
- At Special Offer End Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the last date for this offer price. If no end date is selected the offer will be available indefinitely.
- to remove the product from the featured list as shown in the below image.
+ - Mark the check box to set the product as featured. This displays the Special Offer Pricing section where you can complete the following fields:
- In the Special Offer Unit Price text box, enter the offer price. Leave this field blank to remove special offer pricing.
- At Special Offer Start Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the first date for this offer price. If no start date is selected the offer will commence immediately.
- At Special Offer End Date, click the Calendar link and navigate to and select the last date for this offer price. If no end date is selected the offer will be available indefinitely.
- Unmark the check box to remove the product from the featured list as shown in the below image.
- Recommended. At Image, select or upload an image for this product. See "Setting a File Link", See "Uploading and Linking to a File" or See "Setting a URL Link"
- Recommended. In the Description text box, enter the full description of the product including any addition images, etc.
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Adding a Virtual Product
-
- The new product is now displayed in the Store Catalog module and a summary is displayed to Catalog Managers in the Product list.
+ Click the Update button. The new product is now displayed in the Store Catalog module and a summary is displayed to Catalog Managers in the Product list.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Editing a Product.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Editing a Product.html
index 5195dcc0be2..9882a3a4a86 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Editing a Product.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Editing a Product.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Editing a Product
- Edit the required fields. See "Adding a Product (Product Manager)" for details of available fields.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Featured Products.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Featured Products.html
index 50730618bc6..e55ee982339 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Featured Products.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Featured Products.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ Managing Featured Products
- Click the Edit link beside the product.
- At Featured, select from these option:
- -
- to set the product as featured. This displays the Special Offer Pricing section.
+ - Mark the check box to set the product as featured. This displays the Special Offer Pricing section.
- Optional. Go to the Special Offer Pricing section and complete any of the following settings:
- In the Special Offer Unit Price text box, enter the offer price. Leave this field blank to remove special offer pricing.
- At Special Offer Start Date, click the Calendar link and select the commencement date for this offer price. If no start date is selected the offer will commence immediately.
- At Special Offer End Date, click the Calendar link and select the last date for this offer price. If no end date is selected the offer will be available indefinitely.
@@ -23,8 +22,7 @@ Managing Featured Products
- -
- to remove the product from the featured list. Any special offer pricing which has been entered will now be ignored.
+ - Unmark the check box to remove the product from the featured list. Any special offer pricing which has been entered will now be ignored.
- Click the Update link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Product Archiving.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Product Archiving.html
index e31c04b02f5..ed55fe4a864 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Product Archiving.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Product Archiving.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -15,9 +15,9 @@ Managing Product Archiving
- - At Archived, select from these options
- to archive the product. This removes the product from the store and lists it as archived in the Product summary list of the Store Admin module.
- to remove archiving. This displays the product in the Store Catalog module.
+ - At Archived, select from these options
- Mark the check box to archive the product. This removes the product from the store and lists it as archived in the Product summary list of the Store Admin module.
- Unmark the check box to remove archiving. This displays the product in the Store Catalog module.
-
- The product is now marked as archived.
+ Click the Update button. The product is now marked as archived.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Special Offer Pricing on Products - Store Admin Only.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Special Offer Pricing on Products - Store Admin Only.html
index 328a4255ad6..f3f30564be7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Special Offer Pricing on Products - Store Admin Only.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Products/Managing Special Offer Pricing on Products - Store Admin Only.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Managing Special Offer Pricing on Products (Store Admin Only)
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Tip: To clear a start or end date, click either the Clear Start Date or Clear End Date buttons respectively.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Approving Product Reviews.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Approving Product Reviews.html
index 7f5b35e16b2..0203a155c3f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Approving Product Reviews.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Approving Product Reviews.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Approving Product Reviews
- Optional. In the Comments text box, edit the comments if required.
- - At Approved, to approve the review and display it on the product detail page.
+ - At Approved, to approve the review and display it on the product detail page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Deleting Product Reviews.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Deleting Product Reviews.html
index 51f2b5464e6..18c53c22741 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Deleting Product Reviews.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Deleting Product Reviews.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Deleting Product Reviews
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
- Repeat Steps 2-5 to delete additional reviews.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Editing Product Reviews.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Editing Product Reviews.html
index 5c8f57a5632..3c53cdf6913 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Editing Product Reviews.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Editing Product Reviews.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Editing Product Reviews
- In the Comments text box, edit the comments as required.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
- Repeat Steps 2-5 to edit additional reviews.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Unapproving Product Reviews.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Unapproving Product Reviews.html
index 24388ea00f3..1e4714dfa56 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Unapproving Product Reviews.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Catalog Managers/Reviews/Unapproving Product Reviews.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,14 +10,14 @@ Unapproving Product Reviews
- At Status, select Approved Only.
- Optional. Filter reviews by Category and/or Product. See "Filtering Product Reviews"
- Click the Edit link beside the required review.
- - At Approved, .
+ - At Approved, .
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
- Repeat Steps 3-6 to set additional reviews as unapproved.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Deleting a Parent Category - Category Manager.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Deleting a Parent Category - Category Manager.html
index 5886231282a..4bdfcb0f119 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Deleting a Parent Category - Category Manager.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Deleting a Parent Category - Category Manager.html
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Deleting a Parent Category (Category Manager)
On the Store Menu module, click the Edit button beside of the required parent category. This displays the Edit Catalog page.
Click the Delete link. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Editing a Parent Category - Category Manager.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Editing a Parent Category - Category Manager.html
index 22996a0a1b3..04e47273c85 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Editing a Parent Category - Category Manager.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Category Managers/Editing a Parent Category - Category Manager.html
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Editing a Parent Category (Category Manager)
- Edit one or more fields as required.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Adding a Product Review .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Adding a Product Review .html
index 2f1f357446f..7247e50f02d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Adding a Product Review .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Adding a Product Review .html
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Adding a Product Review
-
- The review will not be displayed until it is approved.
+ Click the Update button. The review will not be displayed until it is approved.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Completing Checkout - Managing Contact Addresses.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Completing Checkout - Managing Contact Addresses.html
index 468c2717e15..0f4707400c0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Completing Checkout - Managing Contact Addresses.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Customers/Completing Checkout - Managing Contact Addresses.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Completing Checkout - Managing Contact Addresses
- Click the View My Basket link on the Store Mini Cart module - OR - Go to the Store Account module. This displays the Contact tab of the Checkout page.
- At Bill To, select the address you wish to use from the drop down list. If this is the first time you have made a purchase, or if you haven't saved any additional addresses, only your Registration Address (the address associated with your user profile) will be available.
- - Complete or edit these Billing Address fields:
- Optional. At Save, to save this address for later use. Saved addresses are displayed on the Bill To field on this page.
- Optional. At Primary, if this is your primary address.
- In the Description text box, enter a name for this address. E.g. Work, Home, Shop.
- In the First Name text box, enter the first name of the person associated with this address. E.g. Elizabeth
- In the Last Name text box, enter the last name associated with this address. E.g. Smith
- In the Street text box, enter the street address. E.g. 101 Blackburn Road
- Optional. In the Unit # text box, enter a unit number. E.g. Flat 2
- In the Postal Code text box, enter the postal code. E.g. 12345
- In the City text box, enter the city. E.g. New York
- At Country, select a country from the drop down list. Depending o…n your selection, this may populate the Region field below with the regions associated with this country.
- At Region, enter or select the region. E.g. New York
- In the Email text box, enter the email address associated with this address.
- In the Daytime Phone text box, enter the daytime telephone number for this address.
- In the Evening Phone text box, enter the evening telephone number for this address.
+ - Complete or edit these Billing Address fields:
- Optional. At Save, to save this address for later use. Saved addresses are displayed on the Bill To field on this page.
- Optional. At Primary, if this is your primary address.
- In the Description text box, enter a name for this address. E.g. Work, Home, Shop.
- In the First Name text box, enter the first name of the person associated with this address. E.g. Elizabeth
- In the Last Name text box, enter the last name associated with this address. E.g. Smith
- In the Street text box, enter the street address. E.g. 101 Blackburn Road
- Optional. In the Unit # text box, enter a unit number. E.g. Flat 2
- In the Postal Code text box, enter the postal code. E.g. 12345
- In the City text box, enter the city. E.g. New York
- At Country, select a country from the drop down list. Depending o…n your selection, this may populate the Region field below with the regions associated with this country.
- At Region, enter or select the region. E.g. New York
- In the Email text box, enter the email address associated with this address.
- In the Daytime Phone text box, enter the daytime telephone number for this address.
- In the Evening Phone text box, enter the evening telephone number for this address.
- Complete or edit these Shipping Address fields:
- At Shipping Address Options, select from these options:
- Ship the order to the billing address: Select if the shipping address is the same as the billing address and then Skip to Step 5.
- Separate shipping address: Select if the shipping address is different to the billing address and then complete all shipping address fields.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Important Information About Roles.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Important Information About Roles.html
index ea61e6f8bce..91fa8adc93c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Important Information About Roles.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Important Information About Roles.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Important Information About Roles
Store Admin module as viewed by a Catalog Manager
- Order Managers: Member of the role that has been selected at the "Manage Orders" field on the Store Info page of the Store Admin module. These users can access the Orders pages on the Store Admin module.
+ Order Managers: Member of the role that has been selected at the "Manage Orders" field on the Store Info page of the Store Admin module. These users can access the Orders pages on the Store Admin module.
Store Admin module as viewed by an Order Manager
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Canceling Customer Orders.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Canceling Customer Orders.html
index 435bf8e8b7d..b7fd4f2d60d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Canceling Customer Orders.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Canceling Customer Orders.html
@@ -1,15 +1,12 @@
-
+
-
Canceling Customer Orders
How to cancel one or more customer orders using the Store Admin module.
Prerequisite. "Authorize Cancel" must be enabled on the Store Admin module. See "Setting Store Info"
-
- Order Managers
Note: Orders cannot be canceled once they have been dispatched, however they can be canceled following payment, in this case the associated role is removed. The Store module doesn't manage payment refunds. These must be managed using your back office payment system.
Option One:
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Filtering Customer Orders.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Filtering Customer Orders.html
index bf4b765ea5a..ff46888062a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Filtering Customer Orders.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Filtering Customer Orders.html
@@ -1,13 +1,10 @@
-
+
-
Filtering Customer Orders
How to filter customer orders by customer or order status using the Store Admin module.
-
- Order Managers
- On the Store Admin module, click the Orders link. This displays the Order History page.
- Select one of these filters:
- At Customers, select to view all orders placed by the selected customer.
- At Order Status, select to view all orders set to the selected status. Available options are: Awaiting Payment, Paid, Processing, Awaiting Stock, Packing, Dispatched, or Canceled.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Modifying Order Status.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Modifying Order Status.html
index 71951d2a0c8..a5c3b2bfcad 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Modifying Order Status.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Order Managers/Modifying Order Status.html
@@ -1,13 +1,10 @@
-
+
-
Modifying Order Status
How to modify the status of a customer order using the Store module. The customer is sent an email informing them of the new status of their order. Note: You cannot reverse a canceled order.
-
- Order Managers
- Locate the required order and go to the Order Details page. See "Viewing a Customer Order" or See "Filtering Customer Orders". Note: The current status of the selected order is displayed at the Order Status field.
- Optional. In the Comment to the Customer text box, enter a comment to be included in the email and/or recorded against this order.
@@ -17,7 +14,7 @@ Modifying Order Status
- - At Confirm By Email, select from these option:
- to send email notification to the customer of this status change. This is the default option.
- Optional. In the Order Status Management text box, enter a comment to be included in the email message to this customer.
- if you don't want to send a message informing the customer of the status change.
+ - At Confirm By Email, select from these option:
- Mark the check box to send email notification to the customer of this status change. This is the default option.
- Optional. In the Order Status Management text box, enter a comment to be included in the email message to this customer.
- Unmark the check box if you don't want to send a message informing the customer of the status change.
- Click the Save link. This returns you to the Order History page where you can view the updated Status. Note: Status Date field does not update for Processing status.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Adding a Product - Product Manager.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Adding a Product - Product Manager.html
index d4a229350a4..ca274f08938 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Adding a Product - Product Manager.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Adding a Product - Product Manager.html
@@ -1,13 +1,10 @@
-
+
-
Adding a Product (Product Manager)
How to add a product to the store using the Store Catalog module.
-
- Product Managers and Catalog Managers.
Prerequisite. If you wish to add customers who purchase this product to a Security Role, you must create this role before beginning this tutorial.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Editing a Product.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Editing a Product.html
index ef455cec9f9..cc289cf0bf5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Editing a Product.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Editing a Product.html
@@ -1,13 +1,10 @@
-
+
-
Editing a Product
How to edit a product as a Catalog Manager using the Store module.
-
- Product Managers and Catalog Managers.
- Go to the Store page.
- Using the Store Menu module, navigate to and select the category where the product is located.
@@ -15,7 +12,7 @@ Editing a Product
- Click the Edit button beside the title of the required product.
- Edit one or more product details. See "Adding a Product Category" for details of available fields.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Managing Products - Product Manager.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Managing Products - Product Manager.html
index 0d036f3398f..15be4dd8642 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Managing Products - Product Manager.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Managing Products - Product Manager.html
@@ -1,13 +1,10 @@
-
+
-
Managing Products (Product Manager)
How to manage product using the Store Menu and Store Catalog modules.
-
- Product Managers and Catalog Managers.
- Go to the Store page.
- Using the Store Menu module, navigate to and select the category where the product is located.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Setting Special Offer Pricing on Products.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Setting Special Offer Pricing on Products.html
index 7235165916c..2c4acbd0d49 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Setting Special Offer Pricing on Products.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Product Managers/Setting Special Offer Pricing on Products.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Setting Special Offer Pricing on Products
- At Special Offer End Date, navigate to and select the last date for this offer price. If no end date is selected the offer will be available indefinitely.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Tip: To clear a start or an end date click either the Clear Start Date or Clear End Date buttons respectively.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/01 General Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/01 General Settings.html
index db18cd9d379..62bf6c94f91 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/01 General Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/01 General Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Managing Store Catalog General Settings
@@ -9,17 +8,17 @@ Managing Store Catalog General Settings
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
-
+
- Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- - Go to the General Settings section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Catalog Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page. The default setting is Catalog.htm, which is used in Store images throughout this manual. For details on using other templates, See "Templating and Design Guide"
- At Use Default Category, select from these options:
- to set a default category to be displayed on the default catalog page.
- At Default Category, select the default category - OR - Select (None) to display no category and therefore no products by default.
- to use the option set in the catalog template select above. In the default Catalog.htm new products and featured products are displayed by default. This is the default setting.
- At Show Category Message, select from these options:
- to display the message entered in the Message field of the category (as shown in the next image). This is the default setting.
- At Show Category Products, select from these options:
- to displays products in the Store Catalog module. See "Managing Category Product Settings", See "Managing Search Settings" and See "Managing Sort Settings".
- to hide products in the Store Catalog module. Warning. Users cannot view products in the Store Catalog if this option is selected.
- At Show Product Detail, select from these options:
- to enable the Product Details page associated with the More Info link on the Store Catalog. See "Managing Product Details Settings" to manage the related settings. This option also enables you to manage the Show Also Bought Products field and its related settings.
- At Show Also Bought Products, select from these options:
- to display the "Customers Who Bought This Product Also Bought" section on the Product Details page. See "Managing Also Bought Product Settings" to manage the related settings.
- to disable the Also Bought Products field.
- to hide the Product Details page. If this option is selected, it is recommended that you trial this setting with different Catalog Templates to find the correct combination for your store.
- At Show New Products, select from these options:
- to display the New Products section. New Products are shown when customers first navigates to the Store Catalog and on the relevant category page. See "Managing New Product Settings" to manage the related settings.
- to disable the New Products section.
- At Show Featured Products, select from these options:
- to display featured products in the Store Catalog module. See "Managing Featured Product Settings" to manage the related settings.
- to disable featured products.
- At Show Popular Products, select from these options:
- to display popular products in the Store Catalog module. See "Managing Popular Product Settings" to manage the related settings.
- to hide popular products.
- At Allow Print?, select from these options:
- to disable the default print module setting. You have to add the StorePrint.Action button to your container skin to be able to use this feature. See "Templating and Design Guide"
- to use default print option.
- At Enable Content Indexing, select from these options:
- to enable content indexing by the DNN search engine. If you use several Store Catalog modules, you should check this setting on ONLY one Store Catalog module instance. Otherwise, your products will indexed twice (or more) by the search engine.
- to disable DNN Search.
- At Enable Image Caching, select from these options:
- to enable image caching. Note: This option should be unchecked while designing the Store or you will have to wait for the cache duration to see your image changes (impacted settings are size and background color for GIF images).
- to disable image caching.
- In the Cache Duration text box, enter the cache duration (in minutes) for images. The default setting is 2.
+ - Go to the General Settings section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Catalog Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page. The default setting is Catalog.htm, which is used in Store images throughout this manual. For details on using other templates, See "Templating and Design Guide"
- At Use Default Category, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to set a default category to be displayed on the default catalog page.
- At Default Category, select the default category - OR - Select (None) to display no category and therefore no products by default.
- Unmark the check box to use the option set in the catalog template select above. In the default Catalog.htm new products and featured products are displayed by default. This is the default setting.
- At Show Category Message, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display the message entered in the Message field of the category (as shown in the next image). This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box to hide the message.
- At Show Category Products, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to displays products in the Store Catalog module. See "Managing Category Product Settings", See "Managing Search Settings" and See "Managing Sort Settings".
- Unmark the check box to hide products in the Store Catalog module. Warning. Users cannot view products in the Store Catalog if this option is selected.
- At Show Product Detail, select from these options:
- At Show New Products, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display the New Products section. New Products are shown when customers first navigates to the Store Catalog and on the relevant category page. See "Managing New Product Settings" to manage the related settings.
- Unmark the check box to disable the New Products section.
- At Show Featured Products, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display featured products in the Store Catalog module. See "Managing Featured Product Settings" to manage the related settings.
- Unmark the check box to disable featured products.
- At Show Popular Products, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display popular products in the Store Catalog module. See "Managing Popular Product Settings" to manage the related settings.
- Unmark the check box to hide popular products.
- At Allow Print?, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to disable the default print module setting. You have to add the StorePrint.Action button to your container skin to be able to use this feature. See "Templating and Design Guide"
- Unmark the check box to use default print option.
- At Enable Content Indexing, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to enable content indexing by the DNN search engine. If you use several Store Catalog modules, you should check this setting on ONLY one Store Catalog module instance. Otherwise, your products will indexed twice (or more) by the search engine.
- Unmark the check box to disable DNN Search.
- At Enable Image Caching, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to enable image caching. Note: This option should be unchecked while designing the Store or you will have to wait for the cache duration to see your image changes (impacted settings are size and background color for GIF images).
- Unmark the check box to disable image caching.
- In the Cache Duration text box, enter the cache duration (in minutes) for images. The default setting is 2.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/02 Category Product Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/02 Category Product Settings.html
index 82e16f6d1ce..49bc75b8868 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/02 Category Product Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/02 Category Product Settings.html
@@ -1,27 +1,25 @@
-
+
-
Managing Category Product Settings
How to manage the layout of category product listings in the Store Catalog module.
-
- Prerequisite. The "Show Category Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
+ Prerequisite. The "Show Category Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
-
+
- Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- - Maximize the Category Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings.
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page. The template included with the Store is called CategoryContainer.htm.
- At List Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page. The templates included with the Store are called ProductList.htm and ProductListFullInfo.htm templates. The default setting is ProductList.htm.
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page. The default setting is 10.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page. The default setting is 2.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. The default setting is 200.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. E.g. down the page or across the page.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- to display a thumbnail image. This is the default setting.
- to hide the thumbnail image. If this option is selected, skip the next step.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image. The default setting is 90.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. Valid values: #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- At Detail Page, select the page where product details are displayed. Choose Same Page to open the product details on the same page. This is the typical behavior however if you have multiple Store Catalog modules on your site and you want the product details to be displayed on that page, then select that page name.
- At Sub-Categories, select from these options:
- to include in the list products of the sub categories of the selected category.
- to disable.
- At Repositioning, select from these options:
- to apply repositioning at the top of the module rather than at the top of the page when a user is viewing the catalog.
- to disable repositioning.
+ - Maximize the Category Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings.
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page. The template included with the Store is called CategoryContainer.htm.
- At List Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page. The templates included with the Store are called ProductList.htm and ProductListFullInfo.htm templates. The default setting is ProductList.htm.
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page. The default setting is 10.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page. The default setting is 2.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. The default setting is 200.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. E.g. down the page or across the page.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display a thumbnail image. This is the default setting.
- Unmark the check box to hide the thumbnail image. If this option is selected, skip the next step.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image. The default setting is 90.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. Valid values: #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- At Detail Page, select the page where product details are displayed. Choose Same Page to open the product details on the same page. This is the typical behavior however if you have multiple Store Catalog modules on your site and you want the product details to be displayed on that page, then select that page name.
- At Sub-Categories, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to include in the list products of the sub categories of the selected category.
- Unmark the check box to disable.
- At Repositioning, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to apply repositioning at the top of the module rather than at the top of the page when a user is viewing the catalog.
- Unmark the check box to disable repositioning.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/03 Search Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/03 Search Settings.html
index b35e6a9676a..f95a3f3c4da 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/03 Search Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/03 Search Settings.html
@@ -1,19 +1,18 @@
-
+
Managing Search Settings
How to manage search setting for the Store Catalog module.
-
- Prerequisite. The "Show Category Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
+ Prerequisite. The "Show Category Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
-
+
- Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- - Maximize the Sort Setting section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Search Columns, beside each of the columns which can be searched on. The available options are Manufacturer,
+
- Maximize the Sort Setting section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Search Columns, beside each of the columns which can be searched on. The available options are Manufacturer,
Model Number,
Model Name,
Product Summary, and
@@ -24,7 +23,7 @@
Managing Search Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/04 Sort Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/04 Sort Settings.html
index b533494a2dd..088f350ffcb 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/04 Sort Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/04 Sort Settings.html
@@ -1,21 +1,19 @@
-
+
-
Managing Sort Settings
How to manage the way product sorting is managed in the Store Catalog module.
-
- Prerequisite. The "Show Category Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
+ Prerequisite. The "Show Category Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
- .
+ .
- Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- Maximize the Sort Setting section and modify any of the following settings:
- - At Sort Columns, beside each of the product fields which customers can sort by. The available options are Manufacturer,
+
- At Sort Columns, beside each of the product fields which customers can sort by. The available options are Manufacturer,
Model Number,
Model Name,
Unit Price, and
@@ -29,7 +27,7 @@
Managing Sort Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/05 Product Details Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/05 Product Details Settings.html
index 54fbe67b5ea..d3c7ba190d3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/05 Product Details Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/05 Product Details Settings.html
@@ -1,26 +1,25 @@
-
+
-
Managing Product Details Settings
How to manage the layout of product details in the Store Catalog module.
-
- Prerequisite. The "Show Product Detail" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
-
- -
-
+
Prerequisite. The "Show Product Detail" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
+
+ - Go to the Store Catalog module
+ -
+
- - Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- - Maximize the Product Details Settings section and modify any of the following settings.
- At Detail Template, select the template to be applied to the product details page. The templates included with the Store are called ProductDetail.htm and ProductDetailFullInfo.htm. The default setting is ProductDetail.htm.
- At Cart Warning, select from these options:
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- to display a thumbnail image.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image. The default setting is 300.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter a hexadecimal value to set the background color for GIF images. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- to hide the thumbnail image.
- At Show Reviews, select from these options:
- to show reviews on the Product Details page.
- to hide reviews. If reviews are hidden then only Administrators can read review using the Store Admin module.
- At Return To, select the page where the user will be taken to when they click on the Return To Category link on the Product Details page. The default setting is Same Page.
+ - Select the Catalog Settings tab.
+ - Maximize the Product Details Settings section and modify any of the following settings.
- At Detail Template, select the template to be applied to the product details page. The templates included with the Store are called ProductDetail.htm and ProductDetailFullInfo.htm. The default setting is ProductDetail.htm.
- At Cart Warning, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display a warning message when the selected product is already in cart.
- Unmark the check box to hide warning message.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display a thumbnail image.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image. The default setting is 300.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter a hexadecimal value to set the background color for GIF images. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- Unmark the check box to hide the thumbnail image.
- At Show Reviews, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to show reviews on the Product Details page.
- Unmark the check box to hide reviews. If reviews are hidden then only Administrators can read review using the Store Admin module.
- At Return To, select the page where the user will be taken to when they click on the Return To Category link on the Product Details page. The default setting is Same Page.
-
- -
-
+
+ -
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/06 Also Bought Product Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/06 Also Bought Product Settings.html
index b442bcbd7b1..db62e43496a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/06 Also Bought Product Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/06 Also Bought Product Settings.html
@@ -1,27 +1,26 @@
-
+
-
Managing Also Bought Product Settings
How to manage the layout of the Customers Who Bought This Product Also Bought section in the Store Catalog module.
- Prerequisite. Both the "Show Product Detail" and "Show Also Bought Products" fields must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
+ Both the "Show Product Detail" and "Show Also Bought Products" fields must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
-
+
- Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- - Maximize the Also Bought Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to the container of the Also Bought Products section. The template included with the Store is called ListContainer.htm.
- At List Template, select the template to be applied to the Also Bought Products section list. Templates included with the Store are AlsoBoughtProduct.htm and AlsoBoughtProduct_Small.htm. The default setting is AlsoBoughtProduct.htm
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page. The default setting is 10.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page. The default setting is 2.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. The default setting is 200.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. E.g. down the page or across the page.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- to display a thumbnail image. This is the default setting.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image. The default setting is 90.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- to hide the thumbnail image.
- At Detail Page, select the page where you want to display the product details page. The page must have a Store Catalog module on it. Typically this will be set to Same Page, unless you are using multiple Store Catalog modules.
+ - Maximize the Also Bought Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to the container of the Also Bought Products section. The template included with the Store is called ListContainer.htm.
- At List Template, select the template to be applied to the Also Bought Products section list. Templates included with the Store are AlsoBoughtProduct.htm and AlsoBoughtProduct_Small.htm. The default setting is AlsoBoughtProduct.htm
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page. The default setting is 10.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page. The default setting is 2.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. The default setting is 200.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. E.g. down the page or across the page.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display a thumbnail image. This is the default setting.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image. The default setting is 90.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- Unmark the check box to hide the thumbnail image.
- At Detail Page, select the page where you want to display the product details page. The page must have a Store Catalog module on it. Typically this will be set to Same Page, unless you are using multiple Store Catalog modules.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/07 New Product Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/07 New Product Settings.html
index 47c5d944a53..6cfb8c5e705 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/07 New Product Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/07 New Product Settings.html
@@ -1,27 +1,25 @@
-
+
-
Managing New Product Settings
How to set the layout of new product listings in the Store Catalog module.
-
- Prerequisite. The "Show New Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
+ Prerequisite. The "Show New Products" field must be checked in the General Settings section to configure these settings. See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
-
+
- Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- - Maximize the New Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page.
- At List Template select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page.
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page. The default setting is 10.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page. The default setting is 2.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. The default setting is 200.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. I.e. Either down or across the page respectively.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- to display a thumbnail image.
In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- to hide the thumbnail image.
- At Detail Page, select the page where product details are displayed. Choose Same Page to open the product details on the same page. This is the typical behavior however if you have multiple Store Catalog modules on your site and you want the product details to be displayed on that page, then select that page name.
+ - Maximize the New Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings:
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page.
- At List Template select the template to be applied to the default Catalog page.
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page. The default setting is 10.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page. The default setting is 2.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. The default setting is 200.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. I.e. Either down or across the page respectively.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display a thumbnail image.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- Unmark the check box to hide the thumbnail image.
- At Detail Page, select the page where product details are displayed. Choose Same Page to open the product details on the same page. This is the typical behavior however if you have multiple Store Catalog modules on your site and you want the product details to be displayed on that page, then select that page name.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/08 Featured Product Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/08 Featured Product Settings.html
index f51acda723f..2753018eccd 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/08 Featured Product Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/08 Featured Product Settings.html
@@ -1,19 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Managing Featured Product Settings
How to set the layout of featured product in the Store Catalog module.
-
- Prerequisite.
+
Prerequisite.
The "Show Featured Products" field in the General Settings section must be checked to configure these settings.
See "Managing Store Catalog General Settings"
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
-
+
- Maximize the Sort Setting section and modify any of the following settings:
@@ -23,7 +21,7 @@ Managing Featured Product Settings
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. I.e. Down the page or across the page.
- - At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- to display a thumbnail image.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- to hide the thumbnail image.
+ - At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display a thumbnail image.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- Unmark the check box to hide the thumbnail image.
- At Detail Page, select the page where product details are displayed. Choose Same Page to open the product details on the same page. This is the typical behavior however if you have multiple Store Catalog modules on your site and you want the product details to be displayed on that page, then select that page name.
@@ -32,7 +30,7 @@ Managing Featured Product Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/09 Popular Product Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/09 Popular Product Settings.html
index 39a3e1c5767..7ee018af651 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/09 Popular Product Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Catalog Settings/09 Popular Product Settings.html
@@ -1,27 +1,25 @@
-
+
-
Managing Popular Product Settings
How to manage the layout of popular product listings in the Store Catalog module.
-
- Prerequisite. The "Show Popular Products" field in the General Settings section must be checked to configure these settings.
+ Prerequisite. The "Show Popular Products" field in the General Settings section must be checked to configure these settings.
- Go to the Store Catalog module.
-
-
+
- Select the Catalog Settings tab.
- - Maximize the Popular Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings.
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to popular products in the Catalog. Default template is ListContainer.htm
- At List Template, select the template to be applied to popular products on the default Catalog page. Choose from the PopularProduct.htm, or PopularProduct_Small.htm template.
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. If the value is higher than 0, the value will be inserted to the style attribute of the corresponding table cell. For a better control display, you should set this value to 0 and use the CCS classes: td.StorePopularProductItem and td.StorePopularProductAlternatingItem as defined in the file StoreFront.css.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. E.g. down the page or across the page.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- to display a thumbnail image.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- to hide the thumbnail image. If this option is selected, skip the next step.
- At Detail Page, select the page where product details are displayed. Choose Same Page to open the product details on the same page. This is the typical behavior however if you have multiple Store Catalog modules on your site and you want the product details to be displayed on that page, then select that page name.
+ - Maximize the Popular Product Settings section and modify any of the following settings.
- At Container Template, select the template to be applied to popular products in the Catalog. Default template is ListContainer.htm
- At List Template, select the template to be applied to popular products on the default Catalog page. Choose from the PopularProduct.htm, or PopularProduct_Small.htm template.
- In the Rows text box, enter the number of row of items to be displayed across the page.
- In the Columns text box, enter the number of columns of items to be displayed down the page.
- In the Column Width text box, enter the pixel width of each column. If the value is higher than 0, the value will be inserted to the style attribute of the corresponding table cell. For a better control display, you should set this value to 0 and use the CCS classes: td.StorePopularProductItem and td.StorePopularProductAlternatingItem as defined in the file StoreFront.css.
- In the Repeat Direction text box, select either Horizontal or Vertical to set the direction that items incrementally repeat. E.g. down the page or across the page.
- At Show Thumbnail, select from these options:
- Mark the check box to display a thumbnail image.
- In the Thumbnail Width text box, enter the pixel width of each thumbnail image.
- In the GIF Background text box, enter the hex value of the background color to use with GIF image format. The default setting is white (FFF). Valid hexadecimal values are #FFFFFF, #f00, FF0000, F09, etc.
- Unmark the check box to hide the thumbnail image. If this option is selected, skip the next step.
- At Detail Page, select the page where product details are displayed. Choose Same Page to open the product details on the same page. This is the typical behavior however if you have multiple Store Catalog modules on your site and you want the product details to be displayed on that page, then select that page name.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Menu Settings/Managing Category Menu Settings .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Menu Settings/Managing Category Menu Settings .html
index 9695e453efd..a2ccc0260d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Menu Settings/Managing Category Menu Settings .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Store/Settings/Menu Settings/Managing Category Menu Settings .html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Managing Category Menu Settings
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Managing Category Menu Settings
- Go to the Store Menu module.
-
-
+
- Select the Category Menu Settings tab.
- At Display Mode, select from these options:
- Table: Displays categories inside an HTML table. Customers must click on a parent category to view any child categories. This is the default settings.
- List: Displays all categories on the page at the same time. Child categories are indented below their parent categories. This option allows web designers use jQuery or Java.
@@ -21,7 +20,7 @@ Managing Category Menu Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/About the Survey Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/About the Survey Module.htm
index 1eb8131ab36..e73db69b54d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/About the Survey Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/About the Survey Module.htm
@@ -1,13 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Survey Module
The Survey module displays a survey consisting of one or more survey questions. Questions can have either a single or multiple choice answers. One answer to a question can be selected as the correct response, thereby enabling the survey to function as a quiz. Authorized users can submit their response to the survey and/or can view current survey results. This module uses cookies to remember which computers have already submitted a response to the survey, reducing the opportunity for one person to answer the survey repeatedly. Optional features include the ability to set a closing date for submitting responses to the survey, and the ability to set the width of the results graph.
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 04.70.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 05.05.01
Features: ISearchable
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Adding a Question.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Adding a Question.html
index 1e3e6999707..44844eddfde 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Adding a Question.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Adding a Question.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Adding a Question
How to add a question to the Survey module. Single selection questions permit users to select only one answer to a question.
- - Select Add Question from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Add Question link.
+ - Select Add Question from the module actions menu - OR - Click the Add Question link.
- In the Question text box, enter the question. E.g. Who was the leader female actor in My Fair Lady?
- At Type, select one of the following options:
- Select Single Selection to restrict users to selecting only one answer.
- Select Multiple Selection to permit users to select multiple answers.
- Optional. In the View Order text box, enter a number to set the position of this question in the list of questions. E.g. 1=first question, 2=second question, etc. Leave this field blank to order questions in the order they are entered.
- In the New Option text box, enter an option that the user can choose. E.g. Audrey Hepburn.
- - Optional. At Option Is Correct Answer? to mark this option as the correct answer, or if the answer is incorrect, or if you do not want to indicate the correct answer. Note: A question may have multiple correct answers.
+ - Optional. At Option Is Correct Answer? to mark this option as the correct answer- OR - if the answer is incorrect, or if you do not want to indicate the correct answer. Note: A question may have multiple correct answers.
- Click the Add Option link.
@@ -21,7 +20,7 @@
Adding a Question
- Repeat Steps 5-7 to add additional options.
-
- This will save the question and the associated answer options.
+ Click the Update button.This will save the question and the associated answer options.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Editing a Survey Question .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Editing a Survey Question .html
index acaab183427..6cb500bd69d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Editing a Survey Question .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Module Editors/Editing a Survey Question .html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Editing a Survey Question
- Edit any of the following question properties:
- In the Question text box, edit the question.
- At Type, change the selection type if required.
- In the View Order text box, modify the view order of the question.
- To manage question options, perform any of the following:
- To add an option: enter the option name in the New Options text box and click the Add Option link. Repeat Step 3a to add additional options.
- To delete an option: select it and click the Delete button.
- To reorder an option, select the option and then click either the Move Option Up or Move Option Down button one or more times to move the selected option up or down one or more positions respectively.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Clearing Survey Results Data .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Clearing Survey Results Data .html
index 9bef21a831d..19dd4376d21 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Clearing Survey Results Data .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Clearing Survey Results Data .html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Clearing Survey Results Data
How to clear the existing votes on a Survey module. This allows you to restart the survey and is useful if you have been testing or demonstrating the survey.
-
-
+
- Select the Survey Settings tab.
- At Clear Results Data, click the Clear link. The link is now disabled, indicating there are currently no existing results.
@@ -17,7 +16,7 @@ Clearing Survey Results Data
-
+ - Click the Update button.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Exporting Survey Results Data .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Exporting Survey Results Data .html
index 23b0ec8f02d..c7d50ca9ca5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Exporting Survey Results Data .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Exporting Survey Results Data .html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Exporting Survey Results Data
How to export the votes of registered users submitted to the Survey module. Results are saved as a csv (comma separated values) file.
-
-
+
- Select the Survey Settings tab.
- At Survey Results Data, click the Export Data link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Modifying the Survey Result Template .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Modifying the Survey Result Template .html
index f5f653ce3eb..ab9cecc4009 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Modifying the Survey Result Template .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Modifying the Survey Result Template .html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Modifying the Survey Result Template
How to modify the template which defines the content, layout and style of survey results in the Survey module.
-
-
+
- Select the Survey Settings tab.
- In the Survey Results Template text box, edit the HTML as desired.
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Modifying the Survey Result Template
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
List of the Survey Template Tokens
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Closing Date .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Closing Date .html
index 56a639255f7..d04f9ceb7b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Closing Date .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Closing Date .html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting Survey Closing Date
How to set the closing date for survey responses. Once the close date is reached, the Submit Survey link is hidden. Survey results are displayed to users who are authorized to view results.
-
-
+
- Select the Survey Settings tab.
- At Survey Closing Date, click the Calendar link and select the final date that a response can be submitted.
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Setting Survey Closing Date
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Results as Public or Private .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Results as Public or Private .html
index 4d386b20cf7..e49839c29c6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Results as Public or Private .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Survey Results as Public or Private .html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting Survey Results as Public or Private
How to set the survey results as public to all users authorized to view the module or private for Administrators only.
-
-
+
- Select the Survey Settings tab.
- At Survey Results, select Public or Private as required.
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Setting Survey Results as Public or Private
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Vote Tracking .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Vote Tracking .html
index 953c799e188..1f97c48881c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Vote Tracking .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting Vote Tracking .html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting Vote Tracking
How to set the type of tracking used to track the responses to a survey.
-
-
+
- Select the Survey Settings tab.
- At Vote Tracking, select from the following options:
- Vote tracking via cookie: Select to restrict voting to one vote per computer using a cookie. Each computer can only submit results once, unless the cookie is deleted. This option doesn't require users to login to vote.
- 1 Vote/Registered User: Select to restrict voting to one per registered user and requires users to be logged in to vote.
@@ -17,7 +16,7 @@ Setting Vote Tracking
-
+ - Click the Update button.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting the Maximum Graph Width .html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting the Maximum Graph Width .html
index 8619ca63efa..435d300d95e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting the Maximum Graph Width .html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Survey/Settings/Setting the Maximum Graph Width .html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Setting the Maximum Graph Width
How to set the maximum bar graph width of survey results displayed in the Survey module. For example, if you set the width to 200 pixels then the maximum width of the graph bar will be 200 pixels for a 100% response. The default width of the survey bar graph is 100% of the module width.
-
-
+
- Select the Survey Settings tab.
- In the Maximum Bar Graph Width text box, enter the maximum pixel width for the bar graph.
@@ -17,7 +16,7 @@ Setting the Maximum Graph Width
-
+ - Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/About the Users Online Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/About the Users Online Module.htm
index 616e0f95161..117cd7d8f0d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/About the Users Online Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/About the Users Online Module.htm
@@ -1,13 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the Users Online Module
The Survey module displays a survey consisting of one or more survey questions. Questions can have either a single or multiple choice answers. One answer to a question can be selected as the correct response, thereby enabling the survey to function as a quiz. Authorized users can submit their response to the survey and/or can view current survey results. This module uses cookies to remember which computers have already submitted a response to the survey, reducing the opportunity for one person to answer the survey repeatedly. Optional features include the ability to set a closing date for submitting responses to the survey, and the ability to set the width of the results graph.
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Module Version: 04.70.00 / Minimum DNN Version: 05.05.01
Features: ISearchable
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Configuring the Users Online Module.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Configuring the Users Online Module.html
index 84a84d7b8a9..bd90738d91c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Configuring the Users Online Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Configuring the Users Online Module.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -12,8 +12,8 @@ Configuring the Users Online Module
The following messages are displayed on the UsersOnline Settings page of all Users Online modules if the module is disabled:
- - Users Online is currently disabled in Host Settings
- - Users Online is currently disabled in the Scheduler
+ - Users Online is currently disabled in Host Settings.
+ - Users Online is currently disabled in the Scheduler.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Setting Membership Details.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Setting Membership Details.html
index 141b2b370e7..9ca01e87670 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Setting Membership Details.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Users Online/Setting Membership Details.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Setting Membership Details
@@ -25,7 +24,7 @@ Setting Membership Details
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/About the Wiki Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/About the Wiki Module.htm
index 5b76d911973..5ec750b749f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/About the Wiki Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/About the Wiki Module.htm
@@ -1,14 +1,12 @@
-
+
About the Wiki Module
The Wiki module enables authorized users to create and manage a Wiki website. Wiki's are designed to enable multiple contributors to build a community based information resource. Contributors add new content and update existing information to progressively enrich the caliber of the content. Wiki's are typically accessible to anonymous contributors however the usual security levels can be set on this Wiki. Each Wiki topic is a Wiki page. Links between pages are created by adding a link the topic name. This Wiki includes searching, version history, comments and ratings.
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
Note: This module is intended for production use only.
-
-
-
Important. It is recommended that the module is configured prior to use.
Module Version: 04.05.02 / Minimum DNN Version: 06.00.00
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Comments for Individual Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Comments for Individual Pages.html
index d960c53b6fb..3315ab763a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Comments for Individual Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Comments for Individual Pages.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Allowing Wiki Comments for Individual Pages
@@ -9,15 +8,15 @@ Allowing Wiki Comments for Individual Pages
- Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
- Expand the Comment Settings section.
- - At Allow Page Comments, .
+ - At Allow Page Comments, mark the check box.
- - At Enable on Existing, .
- - At Enable Comments by Default, to deselect the "Enable Page Comments" field when adding a new page. This option requires comments to be enabled on each individual page. See "Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages"
- - Optional. At User Commentsto send a notification message when a comment is added. Notifications will be sent to role(s) as set in the Notification Settings section. See "Configuring Notification Settings"
+ - At Enable on Existing, unmark the check box.
+ - At Enable Comments by Default, to deselect the "Enable Page Comments" field when adding a new page. This option requires comments to be enabled on each individual page. See "Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages"
+ - Optional. At User Comments, to send a notification message when a comment is added. Notifications will be sent to role(s) as set in the Notification Settings section. See "Configuring Notification Settings"
- Click the Save button. You can now enable comments on one or more pages. See "Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages"
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages.html
index 35fe68c6be7..7407219a42d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages
@@ -9,8 +8,8 @@ Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages
- Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
- Expand the Rating Settings section.
- - At Allow Page Ratings, .
- - At Enable on Existing, .
+
- At Allow Page Ratings, mark the check box.
+ - At Enable on Existing, unmark the check box.
@@ -19,7 +18,7 @@
Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages
-
At Default Rating Mode, select from these options:
-
- to pre-select the "Enable Page Ratings" field on both existing and new pages.
- to deselect the "Enable Page Ratings" field when adding a new page. This will not change this setting on existing pages. Selecting this option will require you to enable rating for individual pages. See "Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page"
+ - Mark the check box to preselect the "Enable Page Ratings" field on both existing and new pages.
- Unmark the check box to deselect the "Enable Page Ratings" field when adding a new page. This will not change this setting on existing pages. Selecting this option will require you to enable rating for individual pages. See "Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page"
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Notification Settings.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Notification Settings.html
index cf37cca68fb..b7873f0e6bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Notification Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Notification Settings.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Notification Settings
@@ -10,14 +9,14 @@ Configuring Notification Settings
- Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
- Expand the Notification Settings section and select from these options:
- To enable typical notifications:
-
- Optional. At Edit Roles to notify all roles who are authorized to edit the Wiki.
- Optional. At View roles? to notify all roles who are authorized to view the Wiki.
+ - Optional. At Edit Roles, to notify all roles who are authorized to edit the Wiki.
- Optional. At View roles?, to notify all roles who are authorized to view the Wiki.
- - At Custom Roles to create custom permissions and set as follows:
+
- At Custom Roles, to create custom permissions and set as follows:
- To assign a role as an editor, click on the role name in the Available list and click the Add selected Available Item to Assigned> link.
- To remove a role as an editor, click on the role name in the Assigned list and click the Remove selected Assigned Item < link.
- To assign all roles as editors, click the Add All Available Items to Assigned>> link.
- To remove all roles as editors, click the Remove All Assigned Items>> link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Wiki Editing Permissions.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Wiki Editing Permissions.html
index 6cc7b7a8961..ebe623889b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Wiki Editing Permissions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Configuring Wiki Editing Permissions.html
@@ -1,23 +1,22 @@
-
+
-
Configuring Wiki Editing Permissions
How to configure editing permissions for the Wiki module. You can use either the standard module permissions as set on the Module Settings page, or create a unique set of editing permissions. Note: Only Administrators and SuperUsers can access manage configuration.
- - Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
+ - Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
- Expand the Security Settings section.
- At Module Security, select from these options:
-
- Check the check box to use the edit permissions set for this module on the Module Settings page. See "Setting Module Permissions"
+ - Mark the check box to use the edit permissions set for this module on the Module Settings page. See "Setting Module Permissions"
- - to create custom permissions. This will expose the "Wiki Edit Roles" field where you can set the custom permissions. For example, in the below image editing rights have been assigned to all users in the Staff role.
+
- Unmark the check box to create custom permissions. This will expose the "Wiki Edit Roles" field where you can set the custom permissions. For example, in the below image editing rights have been assigned to all users in the Staff role.
- To assign a role as an editor, click on the role name in the Available list and click the Add selected Available Item to Assigned> link.
- To remove a role as an editor, click on the role name in the Assigned list and click the Remove selected Assigned Item< link.
- To assign all roles as editors, click the Add All Available Items to Assigned>> link.
- To remove all roles as editors, click the Remove All Assigned Items>> link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html
index d968923fa0e..9366f596e10 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Disabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Disabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages
- Navigate to a page where you want to disable comments.
- Click the Edit link.
- - At Enable Page Comments, .
+ - At Enable Page Comments, unmark the check box.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html
index 2c2dea11705..321fda13861 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
-
+
-
Disabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages
How to prevent users from adding rating on all pages of the Wiki module. This hides any existing rating but doesn't delete them. If ratings are enabled again in the future, the existing rating will be restored.
- - Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
+ - Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
- Go to the Rating Settings section.
- - At Allow Page Ratings, . Note: It doesn't matter what options are set for the following two steps, as long as this setting is unchecked, ratings will be disabled.
+ - At Allow Page Ratings, unmark the check box. Note: It doesn't matter what options are set for the following two steps, as long as this setting is unchecked, ratings will be disabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on Individual Wiki Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on Individual Wiki Pages.html
index b0458dc9f0e..17c4a9ae38c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on Individual Wiki Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Disabling Ratings on Individual Wiki Pages.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Disabling Ratings on Individual Wiki Pages
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Disabling Ratings on Individual Wiki Pages
- Navigate to a page where you want to disable ratings. See "Navigating the Wiki"
- Click the Edit link.
- - At Enable Page Ratings, to disable.
+ - At Enable Page Ratings, to disable.
- Click the Save button.
- Repeat Steps 1-4 to disable ratings on other pages.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on All Wiki Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on All Wiki Pages.html
index 2612c19f074..3c918ddeed0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on All Wiki Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on All Wiki Pages.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling Comments on All Wiki Pages
@@ -9,15 +8,15 @@ Enabling Comments on All Wiki Pages
- Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
- Expand the Comment Settings section.
- - At Allow Page Comments, to allow comments to be added to Wiki pages. This will enable and check the "Enable on Existing" field below.
- - At Enable on Existing, to enable comments to be added to both new and existing Wiki pages.
+ - At Allow Page Comments, to allow comments to be added to Wiki pages. This will enable and check the "Enable on Existing" field below.
+ - At Enable on Existing, to enable comments to be added to both new and existing Wiki pages.
- - At Enable Comments by Default, to pre-select the "Enable Page Comments" field when adding a new page.
- - Optional. At User Comments to send a notification message when a comment is added. Notifications will be sent to one or more roles as set in the Notification Settings section. See "Configuring Notification Settings"
+ - At Enable Comments by Default, to pre-select the "Enable Page Comments" field when adding a new page.
+ - Optional. At User Comments, to send a notification message when a comment is added. Notifications will be sent to one or more roles as set in the Notification Settings section. See "Configuring Notification Settings"
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html
index 54f8672962f..f12b9f6ee2f 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages
@@ -11,7 +10,7 @@ Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages
- Navigate to the required page. See "Navigating the Wiki"
- Click the Edit Wiki Topic link.
- - At Enable Page Comments, .
+ - At Enable Page Comments, mark the check box.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page.html
index f419fad0fb8..2b78ec8a03c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page
@@ -10,7 +9,7 @@ Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page
Prerequisite. Ratings must be allowed for this Wiki module. See "Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages"
- Edit an existing Wiki page. See "Editing a Wiki Page"
- - At Enable Page Ratings, .
+ - At Enable Page Ratings, mark the check box.
- Repeat Steps 1-2 to enable ratings on additional pages.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html
index 3090002dc49..0d3d9c7f9c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Configuration/Enabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages.html
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-
+
-
Enabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages
How to enable users to add ratings to all pages of the Wiki module.
- - Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
+ - Select Wiki Configuration from the Wiki module actions menu.
- Expand the Rating Settings section.
- - At Allow Page Ratings, to enable ratings. This will enable the remaining fields and check the "Enable on Existing" field.
+ - At Allow Page Ratings, mark the check box to enable ratings. This will enable the remaining fields and check the "Enable on Existing" field.
-
- At Enable of Existing, to enable ratings on all new and existing pages - OR - to enable ratings on new pages only.
- - Optional. At Default Rating Mode, to pre-select the Enable Page Ratings field when adding a new page.
+ At Enable of Existing, mark the check box to enable ratings on all new and existing pages - OR - to enable ratings on new pages only.
+ - Optional. At Default Rating Mode, mark the check box to pre-select the Enable Page Ratings field when adding a new page.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Adding a Wiki Page.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Adding a Wiki Page.html
index 0eac6c16db3..4b4158515ce 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Adding a Wiki Page.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Adding a Wiki Page.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Adding a Wiki Page
@@ -14,22 +13,22 @@ Adding a Wiki Page
- In the Page Name text box, enter the name for the new page. Note: The page name appears in the Wiki Index using the capitalization entered here. Note: A maximum of 50 characters is permitted.
- - Optional. Maximize the Page Search Engine Optimization section.
- In the Title text box, enter a title to be displayed on this Wiki page as well as in the browser title for this page. Note: A maximum of 256 characters is permitted.
- In the Description text box, enter a description to be used in the Meta-Description tag for the HTML of the page where this module is located. Note: A maximum of 500 characters is permitted.
- In the Keywords text box, enter a description to be used in the Meta-Description tag for the HTML of the page where this module is located. Note: A maximum of 500 characters is permitted.
+ - Optional. Maximize the Page Search Engine Optimization section.
- In the Title text box, enter a title to be displayed on this Wiki page as well as in the browser title for this page. Note: A maximum of 256 characters is permitted.
- In the Description text box, enter a description to be used in the Meta-Description tag for the HTML of the page where this module is located. Note: A maximum of 500 characters is permitted.
- In the Keywords text box, enter a description to be used in the Meta-Description tag for the HTML of the page where this module is located. Note: A maximum of 500 characters is permitted.
- - In the Editor, enter the page content. Note: When you create a link to a page which does not yet exist, the page will not appear in the Wiki Index until content is added to it. For details on adding page links, Maximize the Wiki Text Directions section.
- - Optional. at Enable Page Comments to enable users to post comments to this page.
- - Optional. at Enable Page Ratings to enable users to rate this page.
- - Optional. Click the Save and Continue link to save the details entered so far and immediately continue adding content.
+ - In the Editor, enter the page content. Note: When you create a link to a page which does not yet exist, the page will not appear in the Wiki Index until content is added to it. For details on adding page links, Maximize the Wiki Text Directions section.
+ - Optional. Mark the check box at Enable Page Comments to enable users to post comments to this page.
+ - Optional. Mark the check box at Enable Page Ratings to enable users to rate this page.
+ - Optional. Click the Save and Continue button to save the details entered so far and immediately continue adding content.
- - Click the Save link.
+ - Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Deleting a Wiki Page.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Deleting a Wiki Page.html
index 95a3aeb9216..70b236d85e7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Deleting a Wiki Page.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/Wiki/Module Editors/Deleting a Wiki Page.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Deleting a Wiki Page
- Click the Edit Wiki Topic link.
- Click the Delete link. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete?"
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/About the XML Module.htm b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/About the XML Module.htm
index 0cc546fd328..2b76cb29551 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/About the XML Module.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/About the XML Module.htm
@@ -1,13 +1,11 @@
-
+
About the XML Module
The XML module, also called the XML/XSL or DNN/XML module, displays the result of an XML/XSL transform by combining the transformation language of XSL (Extensible Style Sheet Language) to the data contained in an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file. This module allows you can create multiple output formats from the same XML document. The results can be displayed inside the module as HTML, accessed by clicking a download link on the module or as a direct download.
-
-
-
+ Installation Note: This module must be deployed and installed on your site by a SuperUser. See "Deploying and Installing More Extensions"
The XML module can be extended using additional XML data providers and rendering providers other than XSL such as Razor and Pretty Print. These providers are not part of the project and must be downloaded separately. See the XML project page (http://dnnxml.codeplex.com/documentation) for more details.
Module Version: 06.00.01 / Minimum DNN Version: 05.06.02
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Creating a XML-XSL Transformation Using an Internal XML File.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Creating a XML-XSL Transformation Using an Internal XML File.html
index 3e6e2ebb23f..d26287f92ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Creating a XML-XSL Transformation Using an Internal XML File.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Creating a XML-XSL Transformation Using an Internal XML File.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
Creating a XML/XSL Transformation Using an Internal XML File
How to create an XML/XSL transformation using an XML file that has been uploaded to the Digital Asset Management module that is located on the Admin > File Management page. This tutorial uses the default settings that display the results as HTML inside the XML/XSL module. In the below example, both the XML and XSL files are located in the Digital Asset Management module that is located on the Admin > File Management page.
- - Select Edit Module Configuration from the XML/XSL module actions menu.
- - Maximize the XML Data Source Settings section.
+ - Select Edit Module Configuration from the XML/XSL module actions menu.
+ - Maximize the XML Data Source Settings section.
- At Data Source Typ, select File and then set the file link. See "Setting a File Link" or See "Uploading and Linking to a File"
- Go to the Rendering Settings section. The XSL Transformation radio button is selected by default.
- Set the link to the XSL file. See "Setting a URL Link", See "Setting a File Link" or See "Uploading and Linking to a File". Skip to Step 8 to use the default options and skip the optional settings.
@@ -17,8 +16,8 @@ Creating a XML/XSL Transformation Using an Internal XML File
- - Optional. Maximize the XSL Parameters section to add XSL parameters. See "Managing XSL Parameters"
- - Optional. Maximize the Advanced Options section and set any of these optional settings:
- Render the output as link to download (See "Setting XML/XSL Output as a Download Link") or set a direct download. See "Setting XML/XSL Output to Download"
- Set query string parameters. See "Setting Query String Parameter Value Pair"
- Include output in DNN site searches. See "Enabling/Disabling XML Search Indexing"
+ - Optional. Maximize the XSL Parameters section to add XSL parameters. See "Managing XSL Parameters"
+ - Optional. Maximize the Advanced Options section and set any of these optional settings:
- Render the output as link to download (See "Setting XML/XSL Output as a Download Link") or set a direct download. See "Setting XML/XSL Output to Download"
- Set query string parameters. See "Setting Query String Parameter Value Pair"
- Include output in DNN site searches. See "Enabling/Disabling XML Search Indexing"
- Click the Update link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Displaying XML-XSL Output In the Module.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Displaying XML-XSL Output In the Module.html
index 51ce5bcafe1..37336283ad8 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Displaying XML-XSL Output In the Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Displaying XML-XSL Output In the Module.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Displaying XML/XSL Output In the Module
-
+ - Click the Update button.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XML Query String Parameters.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XML Query String Parameters.html
index e65c32cff4b..26061137ae1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XML Query String Parameters.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XML Query String Parameters.html
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
-
+
-
Managing XML Query String Parameters
How to add, edit and delete query string parameters that has been added to an XML/XSL transformation on the XML/XSL module. The URL Query string parameters allow you to pass data to the URL that is producing the XML. The source of the XML does not need to be an XML file it could be a dynamic page that takes in the parameters and process them and produces an XML output. The security settings allow you access secure services that provide XML such as weather or stock prices services.
- - Select Edit Module Configuration from the module actions menu. This opens the XML Module Configuration page.
+ - Select Edit Module Configuration from the module actions menu. This opens the XML Module Configuration page.
- Maximize
- the XML Data Source Settings section and perform one of the following:
- To add an XML Parameter:
- Click the Add Parameter link.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this query string parameter.
- Optional. At Required, if this parameter is required.
- At Data Origin, select a value from the drop down list.
- Click the Save button.
- To edit an XML Parameter:
- Click the Edit button beside the parameter to be edited.
- Edit the Name, Required and/or Data Origin fields as required.
- Click the Save button.
- To delete an XML Parameter:
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to remove this item from the data store? Once removed it cannot be retrieved."
+ the XML Data Source Settings section and perform one of the following:- To add an XML Parameter:
- Click the Add Parameter link.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this query string parameter.
- Optional. At Required, if this parameter is required.
- At Data Origin, select a value from the drop down list.
- Click the Save button.
- To edit an XML Parameter:
- Click the Edit button beside the parameter to be edited.
- Edit the Name, Required and/or Data Origin fields as required.
- Click the Save button.
- To delete an XML Parameter:
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to remove this item from the data store? Once removed it cannot be retrieved."
- Click the OK button confirm.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XSL Parameters.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XSL Parameters.html
index adcb6664bf0..2e8b278cb89 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XSL Parameters.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Project Modules/XML/Module Editors/Managing XSL Parameters.html
@@ -1,16 +1,15 @@
-
+
-
Managing XSL Parameters
How to add, edit or delete an XSL parameter to be applied to the XSL file which is used in an XML/XSL transformation on the XML/XSL module.
- - Select Edit Module Configuration from the module actions menu. This opens the XML Module Configuration page.
- - Maximize the Rendering Settings section.
+ - Select Edit Module Configuration from the module actions menu. This opens the XML Module Configuration page.
+ - Maximize the Rendering Settings section.
- Maximize
- the XSL Parameters section and perform one of the following:
- To add an XSL Parameter:
- Click the Add Parameter link.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this query string parameter.
- At Required, if this parameter is required- OR - if this parameter is optional.
- At Data Origin, select a value from the drop down list.
- Click the Save button.
- To edit an XSL Parameter:
- Click the Edit button beside the parameter to be edited.
- Edit the Name and/or Data Origin as required.
- Click the Save button.
- To delete an XSL Parameter:
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to remove this item from the data store? Once removed it cannot be retrieved."
+ the XSL Parameters section and perform one of the following:- To add an XSL Parameter:
- Click the Add Parameter link.
- In the Name text box, enter a name for this query string parameter.
- At Required, if this parameter is required- OR - if this parameter is optional.
- At Data Origin, select a value from the drop down list.
- Click the Save button.
- To edit an XSL Parameter:
- Click the Edit button beside the parameter to be edited.
- Edit the Name and/or Data Origin as required.
- Click the Save button.
- To delete an XSL Parameter:
- Click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to remove this item from the data store? Once removed it cannot be retrieved."
- Click the OK button confirm.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your Profile Photo.html b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your Profile Photo.html
index bd11d8b99f4..6f26ced803a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your Profile Photo.html
+++ b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your Profile Photo.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Uploading a New Image
- Click the Upload File button and then select the file from your computer.
- This displays the selected image beside the Photo field.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
- Select the photo from the File drop down list. This displays the image to the right of this field.
- Optional. This photo is set as visible to the public by default, however you can increase your privacy by changing the visibility of this field.
@@ -27,14 +27,14 @@ Selecting a Previously Uploaded Image
- At File, select the required photo from the drop down list. This displays the image to the right of this field.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Removing your Profile Image
- At File, select < None Specified >.
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
Setting Image Privacy
diff --git a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Account.html b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Account.html
index f8d9126263f..89211906cc4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Account.html
+++ b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Account.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Managing your User Account
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Profile.html b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Profile.html
index b7723e5a7e6..54eec22ba68 100644
--- a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Profile.html
+++ b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Managing your User Profile.html
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
Managing your User Profile
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Unregistering your User Account.html b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Unregistering your User Account.html
index 373cbc13f9d..f2a41ac4ed5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Unregistering your User Account.html
+++ b/Documentation/Managing Your User Account/Managing Your Profile/Unregistering your User Account.html
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Unregistering your User Account
-
- You are now unregistered and have been automatically logged out of the site. A message is sent to you confirming that your account has been unregistered. A message is also sent to the Administrator advising that you have unregistered.
+ Click the OK button confirm. You are now unregistered and have been automatically logged out of the site. A message is sent to you confirming that your account has been unregistered. A message is also sent to the Administrator advising that you have unregistered.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Creating an Image Map.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Creating an Image Map.html
index a34efb876be..e0091763667 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Creating an Image Map.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Creating an Image Map.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Creating an Image Map
- These additional editing options are available:
- To edit an existing area, click on it in the preview window, edit the properties as required and then click the Update Area button.
- To remove an area, click the Remove Area button.
- To remove all areas, click the Remove All button.
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html
index 4ebc27a0150..776ce566727 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Editing an Image Map
- Click the Image Map Editor button in the toolbar - OR - Right click on the image and then select Image Map Editor from the drop down list. This opens the Image Map Editor window.
- Add, edit/update and delete mapped areas as required. See "Creating an Image Map"
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html
index 9a0099cb5f4..540405c98eb 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
Editing an Image
Select Properties... from the drop down list. This opens the Properties window.
- To change the image: At Image Src, click the Image Manager button and then locate and select the new image.
- Modify any other properties as required. See "Setting Image Properties"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
Tip: The new image will inherit the properties of the previous image.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html
index 3d0146f2017..fabdd2a0985 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Setting Document Properties
Right-click on the document and click the Properties... button from the drop down list. This opens the Hyperlink Manager.
Add/edit the link, anchor or email address as required.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html
index daaab450071..cf082bcfaf5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Setting Image Properties
- In the Top text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the top margin.
- In the Bottom text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the bottom margin.
- In the Right text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the right margin.
- In the Left text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the left margin.
At CSS Class, select a class for this image.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Using the Resource Manager.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Using the Resource Manager.html
index 1ca35f8e826..d9bc91df0f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Using the Resource Manager.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Using the Resource Manager.html
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
Using the Resource Manager
In the Folder window, select the parent folder and then click the New Folder button.
In the Enter the new folder name dialog box, overwrite the text "NewFolder" with the name for this new folder.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
Using the Resource Manager
- Select the image or folder to be deleted and then click the Delete button. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete the selected file? The selected file may be in use. If deleted, some pages will not be displayed properly.
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html
index 472b7d1f4d3..63b47dce8a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Adding a Page Link
- In the Link Text text box, edit the linked text. Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image.
- At Target, select the target window for this link. The default option is None which opens the link in the current window.
- In the Tooltip text box, enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link.
- At CSS Class, select a class for the link - OR - Select Clear Class to use the default class.
- Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking information is displayed.
- Check the Log the user, date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html
index d9922dc268b..f845324c353 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
Adding a URL Link
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html
index 1a014b159db..a997686d815 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Adding an Anchor Link
- In the Link Text text box, enter/edit the linked text as required.
- At Target, select the target for this link - OR - Select None to use the existing window.
- In the Tooltip text box, enter the text to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link.
- At CSS Class, select the CSS class to use.
- Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking information is displayed.
- Check the Log the user, date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html
index 86ddb7a67fd..127b862d00a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
Adding an Anchor
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html
index 51723508b02..7c647f45648 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Adding an Email Link
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Editing an Anchor.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Editing an Anchor.html
index 685b8e58199..12adac3ed4a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Editing an Anchor.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Editing an Anchor.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Editing an Anchor
Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button. This opens the Hyperlink Manager.
Edit the anchor as required.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
Option Two:
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
Editing an Anchor
Select Properties... from the drop down list. This opens the Hyperlink Manager.
Edit the anchor as required.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html
index c872de3e748..e6249dae212 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Editing a Table
Right-click using your mouse. This displays the drop down list.
Select an option to modify the rows, columns or cells of the table - OR - Select either the Table Properties or Cell Properties option to use the Table Wizard to modify the table.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Cell Properties.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Cell Properties.html
index a03a61f19f2..8fbcb000348 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Cell Properties.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Cell Properties.html
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
Setting Cell Properties
At Cell Properties, set any of the following:
- In the Height text box, set the cell height in either pixels or as a percentage by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons. The value will automatically be saved in pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol (%) into the text box. E.g. Enter 100px or 100 to set the height as 100 pixels, or enter 100% to set the height as 100%. Leave blank for no specified height.
- In the Width text box, set the cell width in either pixels or as a percentage as for height. Leave blank for no specified width.
- At Content Alignment, click the arrow of the Alignment Selector button and select the alignment of content.
- At Background Color, click the Color Picker button and select the background color.
- At Style Builder, click the Style Builder button and build one or more styles. See "Using the Style Builder"
- At CSS Class, select a class for this/these cells.
- At Back Image, click the Image Manager button and select a background image for the table.
- In the Id text box, enter an Id reference for this/these cells.
- At No Text Wrapping, to disallow text within this/these cells from wrapping to another line - OR - to allow text to wrap.
- Alternatively, you can select another tab of the Table Wizard to set more properties.
+ Click the OK button confirm. Alternatively, you can select another tab of the Table Wizard to set more properties.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Accessibility.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Accessibility.html
index 042b96d6e20..8c9a6ba2d2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Accessibility.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Accessibility.html
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
Setting Table Accessibility
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Properties.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Properties.html
index 55b8bf35144..5f1fbf88c90 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Properties.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting Table Properties.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
Setting Table Properties
- Select a CSS layout design from the drop down list. The design is displayed in the Preview window below.
- At Apply Special Formats To, select which rows or column you want to apply special formatting to. You can see the changes in the Preview window below.
Optional. Select a new tab to set additional properties.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting the Table Design.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting the Table Design.html
index abe959415df..8332b364022 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting the Table Design.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Setting the Table Design.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
Setting the Table Design
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Using the Table Wizard.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Using the Table Wizard.html
index 6d3a3be5d9e..4fd466b0725 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Using the Table Wizard.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/DotNetNuke RadEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Using the Table Wizard.html
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Using the Table Wizard
Select an Increase or Decrease button to modify the table design. You can choose to add columns and rows, as well as span columns and rows.
Optional. Change tabs to set other properties.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html
index fa964befe4f..8f24bf5a0b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image Map.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Editing an Image Map
Click the Image Map Editor button in the toolbar - OR - Right click on the image and then select Image Map Editor from the drop down list. This opens the Image Map Editor window.
Add, edit/update and delete mapped areas as required. See "Creating an Image Map"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html
index 403dc503a3a..f2a029a6236 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Editing an Image.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Editing an Image
Right-click on the image.
Select Properties... from the drop down list.- To change the image: At Image Src, click the Image Manager button and then locate and select the new image.
- Modify any other properties as required. See "Setting Image Properties"
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
Tip: The new image will inherit the properties of the previous image.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html
index 32533d81eaf..c26e122de42 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Document Properties.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Setting Document Properties
Right-click on the document and click the Properties... button from the drop down list. This opens the Hyperlink Manager.
Edit the link as required.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html
index e8378af6d18..2374491050d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Images and Media/Setting Image Properties.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Setting Image Properties
At Margin, set any of these fields: - In the Top text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the top margin.
- In the Bottom text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the bottom margin.
- In the Right text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the right margin.
- In the Left text box, enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the left margin.
At CSS Class, select a class for this image.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html
index bba17fca753..63ffa85bbdd 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a Page Link.html
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
Adding a Page Link
- In the Link Text text box, edit the linked text. Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image.
- At Target, select the target window for this link. The default option is None which opens the link in the current window.
- In the Tooltip text box, enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link.
- At CSS Class, select a class for the link - OR - Select Clear Class to use the default class.
- Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking information is displayed.
- Check the Log the user, date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html
index 7eb8da0b328..13caaef2758 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding a URL Link.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Adding a URL Link
Optional. In the Tooltip text box, enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link.
Optional. At CSS Class, select a class for the link - OR - Select Clear Class to use the default class.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html
index 0f89d2e1d05..dd275a54d95 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor Link.html
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Adding an Anchor Link
- In the Link Text text box, enter/edit the linked text as required.
- At Target, select the target for this link - OR - Select None to use the existing window.
- In the Tooltip text box, enter the text to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link.
- At CSS Class select the CSS class to use.
- Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking information is displayed.
- Check the Log the user, date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html
index eb98e600ded..c108ba6519e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Anchor.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Adding an Anchor
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html
index 906ffeb1e3a..6c22fc457d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Links and Anchors/Adding an Email Link.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Adding an Email Link
In the Subject text box, enter a subject which will populate the subject field of the email message.
Optional. At CSS Class, select a class for the link - OR - Select Clear Class to use the default class.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html
index e3c15f47469..cb27ab03d05 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Editor/TelerikEditorProvider/Managing Tables/Editing a Table.html
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Editing a Table
Right-click using your mouse. This displays the drop down list.
Select an option to modify the rows, columns or cells of the table - OR - Select either the Table Properties or Cell Properties to use the Table Wizard to modify the table.
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Opening a Link in a New Web Browser Window.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Opening a Link in a New Web Browser Window.html
index 65fc6d3c32e..2e4e975000a 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Opening a Link in a New Web Browser Window.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Opening a Link in a New Web Browser Window.html
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling Opening a Link in a New Web Browser Window
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks.html
index 0e824612155..549f989da48 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks.html
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Enabling/Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks
-
- Note: Link tracking isn't enabled and displayed until the item is updated and you return to the Edit Page for this item.
+ Click the Update button. Note: Link tracking isn't enabled and displayed until the item is updated and you return to the Edit Page for this item.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling the Link Log.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling the Link Log.html
index 36a9b6e1d7c..be379bc2b05 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling the Link Log.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Link Control/Module Editors/Enabling-Disabling the Link Log.html
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Enabling/Disabling the Link Log
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
To Disable the Link Log:
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
Enabling/Disabling the Link Log
- At Log The User, Date, And Time For Every Link Click? to disable the Link Log
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Using the Install Extension Wizard.html b/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Using the Install Extension Wizard.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 57999266de8..00000000000
--- a/Documentation/Using Common Tools/Using the Install Extension Wizard.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
- Using the Install Extension Wizard
- How to install an extension using the Install Extension Wizard. This tutorial assumes are currently viewing the Upload New Extension page of the Install Extension Wizard. This wizard can be accessed via the action menu of certain modules such as the Dashboard and Extensions module.
-
- - On the Upload New Extension Package page:
-
- Click the Browse... button.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - Select the required file from your computer.
- - Click the Next button.
-
- - Optional. The Upload Results page will be displayed if there is an unusual result such as a legacy Skin or Container, or the language package has already been uploaded. In this case, select the required action and click the Next button - OR - Click the Cancel button and start again.
- - On the Package Information page, review the package information and then click the Next button.
- - On the Release Notes page, review the release notes and then click the Next button.
- - On the Review License page:
-
- - At License, review the license for this extension.
- - At Accept License?to agree to the license terms.
- - Click the Next button.
-
- - On the Package Installation Report page, review the package installation results.
- - Click the Return button to return to the module. Note: The newly added extension is now listed on the Installed Extensions tab of the Extensions module.
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/3 Deploying Language Packs.htm b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/3 Deploying Language Packs.htm
index 59c38ed8e03..d1aba0762dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/3 Deploying Language Packs.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/3 Deploying Language Packs.htm
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-
+
Deploying Language Packs
How to deploy one of the five language packs included with DNN via the Advanced Configuration Settings page.
- Tip: Language packs can also be deployed via the Host > Extensions page ( See "Installing and/or Deploying Available Extensions") or the Admin Languages page, See "Installing Available Languages".
+ Tip: Language packs can also be deployed via the Host > Extensions page (See "Installing and/or Deploying Available Extensions") or the Admin Languages page, See "Installing Available Languages".
- Navigate to Admin > Advanced Settings > Advanced Configuration Settings.
- Select the Language Packs tab.
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Deploying Language Packs
- - Complete Steps 3 onwards of the installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard". The country flag associated with the newly deployed language is now displayed in the top right corner of your site.
+ - Complete Steps 3 onwards of the installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard". The country flag associated with the newly deployed language is now displayed in the top right corner of your site.
@@ -24,10 +24,10 @@
Deploying Language Packs
- -
+
-
See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language"
- -
+
-
See "About Content Localization"
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/4 Installing Authentication Systems.htm b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/4 Installing Authentication Systems.htm
index 0101a989b10..21a15cdb7c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/4 Installing Authentication Systems.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/4 Installing Authentication Systems.htm
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
Installing Authentication Systems
- - Complete Steps 3 onwards of the installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete Steps 3 onwards of the installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/5 Install Providers.htm b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/5 Install Providers.htm
index 12eb602f81f..9d46f6930a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/5 Install Providers.htm
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Advanced Configuration Settings/5 Install Providers.htm
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Installing Providers
- - Complete Steps 3 onwards of the installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete Steps 3 onwards of the installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Event Viewer/All Users/Sending Exceptions by Email.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Event Viewer/All Users/Sending Exceptions by Email.html
index 7040e500b9d..485e9efb4a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Event Viewer/All Users/Sending Exceptions by Email.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Event Viewer/All Users/Sending Exceptions by Email.html
@@ -1,11 +1,7 @@
-<<<<<<< HEAD
-=======
-
->>>>>>> 5297e8b... Snippet path updates.
-
+
Sending Exceptions by Email
@@ -15,13 +11,12 @@ Sending Exceptions by Email
- Navigate to Admin > Event Viewer - OR - Navigate to a Log Viewer module.
- Expand the Viewer section.
- Locate the required exceptions. Filtering records by type such as General Exception can be useful. Note: If color coding is enabled, exceptions are colored red.
-<<<<<<< HEAD
+
- beside each record to be emailed.
-=======
+
-
beside each record to be emailed.
->>>>>>> 5297e8b... Snippet path updates.
- Expand the Send Log Entries section.
- In the Email Address text box, enter one or more email addresses separated by a semi-colon ( ; ). E.g. host@domain.com;host@domain.com.au
- Optional. In the Subject text box, enter a subject for the message. Leave blank to use "[Portal Name] Exceptions".
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/About the Languages Management Module.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/About the Languages Management Module.html
index be1afd02957..7bce7f99140 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/About the Languages Management Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/About the Languages Management Module.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ About the Languages Module
- Enable multiple languages (cultures)
- Manage the languages files (such as the welcome email message sent to new users) associated with a site
- - Manage Content Localization, which allows you to create localized module content in multiple languages (cultures). Note: Additional tasks relating to Content Localization which are not undertaken using the Languages module are covered in the Content Localization section. See "About Content Localization"
+ - Manage Content Localization, which allows you to create localized module content in multiple languages (cultures). Note: Additional tasks relating to Content Localization which are not undertaken using the Languages module are covered in the Content Localization section. See "About Content Localization"
- SuperUsers can install, create and manage languages and language localization
The Languages module is pre-installed on the Admin > Advanced Settings > Languages page and can be added to site pages.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 InstallAvailableLanguages.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 InstallAvailableLanguages.html
index cacc0d4357d..04d4df20970 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 InstallAvailableLanguages.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 InstallAvailableLanguages.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Installing Available Languages
- - Complete Steps 3-7 of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete Steps 3-7 of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
- Repeat Steps 6-7 to deploy additional language packs.
- Navigate back to the Admin > Languages module to see the newly installed language(s) displayed in the Culture grid. Installed languages must be manually enabled on a site. This allows a SuperUser to install the language and an editor or Administrator to enable it at a later time.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 Installing a Language Pack.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 Installing a Language Pack.html
index f01c38e17cf..775d175cd71 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 Installing a Language Pack.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Languages/SuperUsers/01 Installing a Language Pack.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Installing a Language Pack
- - Complete the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
-
You are now returned to the Languages module where the newly installed language is displayed in the Culture grid. Installed languages must be manually enabled on a site. This allows a SuperUser to install the language and an editor or Administrator to enable it at a later time.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List Entry.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List Entry.html
index cb7236db422..5aa46b05411 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List Entry.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List Entry.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Deleting a List Entry
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List.html
index 03287aa5bca..9d57a71c32e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Lists/Deleting a List.html
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Deleting a List
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Site Settings/Basic Settings/Appearance/Uploading a Site Skin and-or Container.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Site Settings/Basic Settings/Appearance/Uploading a Site Skin and-or Container.html
index b9ac5969e60..8bbf2119ca9 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Site Settings/Basic Settings/Appearance/Uploading a Site Skin and-or Container.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Site Settings/Basic Settings/Appearance/Uploading a Site Skin and-or Container.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Uploading a Site Skin and/or Container
@@ -14,7 +13,7 @@ Uploading a Site Skin and/or Container
- - Complete all steps of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete all steps of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying a Default Site Container.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying a Default Site Container.html
index b27bce698a8..6b4eec1fb67 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying a Default Site Container.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying a Default Site Container.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ Applying a Default Site Container
- Locate and optionally preview the required container. See "Previewing a Container Package"
- At Apply To, select one or both of the following options:
-
- Website: to apply the container to all site pages.
-
- Admin: to apply the container to all Admin Console pages.
+ - Website: to apply the container to all site pages.
+
- Admin: to apply the container to all Admin Console pages.
- Click the Apply link below the chosen container.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying the Default Site Skin.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying the Default Site Skin.html
index e37f3fee3c7..fe936f6aef3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying the Default Site Skin.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/All Users/Applying the Default Site Skin.html
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-
+
Applying the Default Site Skin
How to apply a skin as the default skin for all modules on a site. This setting does not override page settings. See "Advanced Settings for Existing Pages"
- - Navigate to Admin > Advanced Settings > Skins and go to the Skin Editor module - OR - Go to a Skins module.
+
- Navigate to Admin > Advanced Settings > Skins and go to the Skin Editor - OR - Go to a Skins module.
- Locate and optionally preview the required skin. See "Previewing a Skin Package"
- At Apply To, select one or both of the following options:
-
- Website: to apply the skin to all site pages.
- Admin: to apply the skin to all Admin Console pages.
+ - Website: to apply the skin to all site pages.
- Admin: to apply the skin to all Admin Console pages.
- Click the Apply link.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/Skin Designer/About the Skin Designer Module.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/Skin Designer/About the Skin Designer Module.html
index 7197c72e8cf..e678f452821 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/Skin Designer/About the Skin Designer Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Skins/Skin Designer/About the Skin Designer Module.html
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
-
+
-
- About the Skin Designer Module
- The Skin Designer module is only located on the Admin > Advanced Settings > Skins page. It enables Administrators to set container and skin token values.
+ About the Skin Designer
+ The Skin Designer is only located on the Admin > Advanced Settings > Skins page. It enables Administrators to set container and skin token values.
-
-
The Skin Designer Module
+
+
The Skin Designer
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Taxonomy/About the Taxonomy Manager Module.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Taxonomy/About the Taxonomy Manager Module.html
index eaa5f1db71e..f15f0115e65 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Taxonomy/About the Taxonomy Manager Module.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/Taxonomy/About the Taxonomy Manager Module.html
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-
+
About the Taxonomy Manager Module
- The Taxonomy Manager module allows you to create and manage tags which are used to classify site content. Tags can be associated with pages (See "Page Details Settings for Existing Pages") and modules. Depending on the skin used on your site, users may be able associate content with existing tags created using the Taxonomy Manager module. They may also be able to create their own tags which can then be managed using the Taxonomy Manager module.
+ The Taxonomy Manager module allows you to create and manage tags which are used to classify site content. Tags can be associated with pages (See "Page Details Settings for Existing Pages") and modules. Depending on the skin used on your site, users may be able associate content with existing tags created using the Taxonomy Manager module. They may also be able to create their own tags which can then be managed using the Taxonomy Manager module.
Authenticated users who can view the module can see the list of existing vocabularies. Editors and Administrators can create and manage site specific vocabularies.
SuperUsers can create and manage application wide vocabularies that are available to all sites.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/All Users/Filtering User Accounts by Online Users.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/All Users/Filtering User Accounts by Online Users.html
index e6cbf43a2b6..fb7cbf125f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/All Users/Filtering User Accounts by Online Users.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/All Users/Filtering User Accounts by Online Users.html
@@ -1,13 +1,12 @@
-
+
-
Filtering User Accounts by Online Users
How to filter user accounts to only view users who are currently logged in to this site using the User Accounts module.
- This filter is integrated with the Users Online module. The Users Online module must be enabled by a SuperUser for this filter to work.
+ This filter is integrated with the Users Online module. The Users Online module must be enabled by a SuperUser for this filter to work.
- Navigate to Admin > User Accounts - OR - Go to a User Accounts module.
- Click the Online link. This displays the matching user account records.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/Configuring User Account Settings.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/Configuring User Account Settings.html
index 36791857f95..e7368bf252d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/Configuring User Account Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Admin Console/User Accounts/Configuring User Account Settings.html
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Configuring User Account Settings
-
-
+ Click the Update button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Configuration Manager/Enabling Full Trust for DotNetNuke Sites.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Configuration Manager/Enabling Full Trust for DotNetNuke Sites.html
index 8dd8642ab51..e3b4951cde0 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Configuration Manager/Enabling Full Trust for DotNetNuke Sites.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Configuration Manager/Enabling Full Trust for DotNetNuke Sites.html
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Enabling Full Trust for DNN Sites
- Click the Save Changes button.
-
-
+ Click the OK button confirm.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Installing a Dashboard Control.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Installing a Dashboard Control.html
index 65a311b7927..4c85722c804 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Installing a Dashboard Control.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Installing a Dashboard Control.html
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
-
+
-
Installing a Dashboard Control
@@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Installing a Dashboard Control
- Navigate to Host > Dashboard.
- Click the Install Dashboard Control button. This displays the Upload New Extension Package page of the Install Extension Wizard.
- - Complete all steps of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete all steps of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Managing Dashboard Controls.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Managing Dashboard Controls.html
index 6f488bf81bc..129cea50b3c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Managing Dashboard Controls.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Dashboard/Managing Dashboard Controls.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Enabling or Disabling a Dashboard Control
Installing a Dashboard Control
- Click the Install Dashboard Control link. This displays the Upload New Extension Package page of the Install Extension Wizard.
- - Complete all steps of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete all steps of the Install Extension Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Fetching List of Purchased Extensions.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Fetching List of Purchased Extensions.html
index d3d7b04ddf8..e56e9104074 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Fetching List of Purchased Extensions.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Fetching List of Purchased Extensions.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Fetching List of Purchased Extensions
- Navigate to Host > Extensions.
- Select the Purchased Extensions tab.
- Optional. To enter or update your store information, click the Enter Store Credentials or the Update Store Credentials button.
-
- In the Username text box, enter the username for your DotNetNuke Store (http://store.dnnsoftware.com/) account.
- In the Password text box, enter the password for your DotNetNuke Store account.
- Click the Save button.
+ - In the Username text box, enter the username for your DotNetNuke Store (http://store.dnnsoftware.com/) account.
- In the Password text box, enter the password for your DotNetNuke Store account.
- Click the Save button.
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Installing an Extension.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Installing an Extension.html
index 307eed06c06..f092caf0ad6 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Installing an Extension.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Installing an Extension.html
@@ -1,17 +1,15 @@
-
+
-
Installing an Extension
-
How to install any type of extension using the Extensions module.
Best Practice. When creating skin packages, please ensure that the name of each package in the manifest file is unique. If a package name is used more than once, you will receive an error if you attempt to re-install the package.
- Navigate to Host > Extensions.
- Click the Install Extension Wizard button. This opens the Install Extension Wizard.
- - Complete the Installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
+ - Complete the Installation Wizard. See "Using the Install Extension Wizard"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Managing Authentication System Settings.html b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Managing Authentication System Settings.html
index 51b38cbb7bc..1a3b9d83a0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Managing Authentication System Settings.html
+++ b/Documentation/Using the Control Panel/Host Console/Extensions/Managing Authentication System Settings.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+
@@ -29,12 +29,12 @@ Managing Authentication System Settings
- - Click the Update Extension link.
+ - Click the Update Extension button.
-
+
Related Topics:
-
diff --git a/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Publishing/Publishing a Secondary Language Page.html b/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Publishing/Publishing a Secondary Language Page.html
index b3e992f25ad..e1a959c80c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Publishing/Publishing a Secondary Language Page.html
+++ b/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Publishing/Publishing a Secondary Language Page.html
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
diff --git a/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Translating/01 Translating a Page.html b/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Translating/01 Translating a Page.html
index 3f37240b60b..4a325008dee 100644
--- a/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Translating/01 Translating a Page.html
+++ b/Documentation/Advanced Site Management/Content Localization/Translating/01 Translating a Page.html
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
diff --git a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/About Modules.html b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/About Modules.html
index b263bb891b6..9313a265b66 100644
--- a/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/About Modules.html
+++ b/Documentation/Building Your Site/Adding and Managing Modules/About Modules.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-
+